Configuration System

Artis one
Configuration
System
Configuration with the VA10 SW
2 Document Version / Disclaimer / Copyright
Document Version
Siemens Healthcare GmbH reserves the right to change its products and services at any
time.
In addition, manuals are subject to change without notice. The hardcopy documents cor‐
respond to the version at the time of system delivery and/or printout. Versions to hard‐
copy documentation are not automatically distributed.
Please contact your local Siemens Healthineers office to order a current version or refer to
our website http://www.siemens-healthineers.com.
Disclaimer
Siemens Healthcare GmbH provides this documentation “as is” without the assumption of
any liability under any theory of law.
The content described herein requires superior understanding of our equipment and may
only be performed by qualified personnel who are specially trained for such installation
and/or service.
Copyright
“© Siemens Healthineers, 2013” refers to the copyright of a Siemens Healthineers entity
such as:
Siemens Healthcare GmbH - Germany
Siemens Shenzhen Magnetic Resonance Ltd. - China
Siemens Shanghai Medical Equipment Ltd. - China
Siemens Healthcare Private Ltd. - India
Siemens Medical Solutions USA Inc. - USA
Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics Inc. - USA and/or
Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics Products GmbH - Germany
Artis one AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 2 of 405 © Siemens Healthineers, 2013

05.19
Table of Contents 3
1 General Information 10
1.1 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.1.1 General Safety Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.1.2 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.1.3 Product-specific Remarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.1.4 General Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.1.5 Conventions and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.2.1 Additionally Required Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.2.2 Required Test Equipment, Tools and Service Aids. . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2 Proceedings when changing the Configuration 23
3 System Options 24
4 Local Host 28
4.1 Site Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

4.1.1 Site-specific customer and system data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.1.2 Time zone (date & time) Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.2 TCP/IP LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.2.1 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
4.2.2 Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4.2.3 IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4.2.4 WINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.2.5 DNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.2.6 IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4.3 Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.4 Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
4.4.1 Password Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.5 Monitor Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.6 Modality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.7 syngo task cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5 Security 49
5.1 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6 Service 54
6.1 Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
6.2 FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
6.3 Auto Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
6.4 Eventlog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
6.5 Backup/Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
6.6 Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
6.6.1 General Information about Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
6.6.2 General Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
© Siemens Healthineers, 2013 AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 3 of 405 Artis one

05.19
4 Table of Contents
6.6.3 Select New License File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

6.6.4 License Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6.6.5 Licenses with the Artis one VA10 SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
6.6.6 Trial License (Demo License) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
7 DICOM 70
7.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7.1.1 Local AETs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
7.1.2 General DICOM Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
7.2 Character set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
7.3 Structured Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
7.4 Offline Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
7.5 Network Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
7.5.1 TCP/IP and Hostname settings of DICOM Network Nodes. . . . . . . 80
7.5.2 DICOM Settings for DICOM Network Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
7.6 Print Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
7.6.1 TCP/IP and Host Name Settings of DICOM Print Device (Camera) 94
Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.2 DICOM Settings for DICOM Print Devices (Camera) Nodes . . . . . . 96
7.6.3 Camera Parameter Settings for DICOM Print Devices . . . . . . . . . . 98
7.6.4 Deleting a DICOM Print Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
7.7 HC Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
7.7.1 Overview of the HC Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
7.8 LUT Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
7.8.1 Import/Remove LUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
7.8.2 LUT Files settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
7.9 HIS/RIS Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
7.9.1 TCP/IP and Hostname settings of HIS/RIS nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
7.9.2 DICOM settings for HIS/RIS Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
7.10 HIS/RIS Setup with Worklist settings and MPPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
8 Import/Export 123
8.1 Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

8.1.1 TCP/IP and Hostname settings of Import/Export Remote Host 123
Nodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1.2 Definition of Image Import/Export Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
9 System Mgmt. (System Management) 128
10 Artis one system (1), System Config 129
10.1 System Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

10.1.1 Collimator long Distance Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
10.1.2 User Location Interface I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
10.1.3 User Location Interface III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
10.1.4 Reference Air Kerma Multi-Threshold Alert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
10.1.5 Multimodality Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
10.1.6 MCI Component PN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
10.1.7 Language Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

05.19
Table of Contents 5
10.1.8 Regulating Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

10.1.9 Reference Air Kerma display during X-ray Pause. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
10.1.10 Reference Air Kerma Base for Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
10.1.11 CARE Monitor Threshold (mGy)[0,99999] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
10.1.12 HIPAA configured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
10.1.13 Table Object Distance [0,40]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
10.1.14 Table Object Distance for CARD Profile [0,40] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
10.2 System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10.2.1 Carto System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10.2.2 Virus Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10.2.3 ECG-System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
10.2.4 Sensis Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
10.2.5 ECG Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
10.3 License Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
10.3.1 Storage Extension 3 (key) and Storage Extension 4 (key) . . . . . . 142
10.3.2 Scene Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
10.3.3 DR Acquisition Module (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10.3.4 DSA Acquisition Module (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10.3.5 High Speed 30 fps Module (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10.3.6 Card Acquisition Module (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10.3.7 CLEARstent (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
10.3.8 CLEARstent Live (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
10.3.9 Perivision (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
10.3.10 DR Stepping (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
10.3.11 3D Acquisition (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
10.3.12 3D HeartSweep Acquisition (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
10.3.13 Fluoro Loop Module (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
10.3.14 Automap Module (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
10.3.15 Quant QCA (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
10.3.16 Quant QCA2D with bifurcation (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
10.3.17 Quant QCA3D (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
10.3.18 Quant QVA (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
10.3.19 Left Ventricle Analysis (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
10.3.20 CD-R Archive Module (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
10.3.21 MPPS(key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
10.3.22 ECG-Recording Module (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
10.3.23 ECG-Gated Fluoro Module (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
10.3.24 Generator Limitation 800mA (key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
10.3.25 KV - MS Exposure Point [1,4]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
10.4 Select Group To Configure items Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
10.4.1 Footswitch/Handswitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
10.4.2 IQ: Parameters for angiomatic (ang). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
10.4.3 IQ: Parameters for Preprocessing (ACU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
10.4.4 IQ: Universal Dominant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
10.4.5 IQ: INoise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
10.4.6 IQ: Multi scale motion detector (MSMD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
10.4.7 IQ: Eve2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
10.4.8 IQ: Harmonisation (DDO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
10.4.9 IQ: Edge Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
10.4.10 IQ: Auto and Sigmoid Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
10.4.11 IQ: Auto Pixel Shift (APS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

05.19
6 Table of Contents
10.4.12 IQ: CLEARstent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

10.4.13 IQ: CLEARstent Live . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
10.4.14 IQ: Nomsie. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
10.4.15 IQ: Overlay Ref. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
10.4.16 ECG gated X-ray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
10.4.17 FD Monitoring Parameter (ACU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
10.4.18 Xray Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
10.4.19 Hardware Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
10.4.20 LINE Frequency Voltage Resistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
10.4.21 Nominal anode frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
10.4.22 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
10.4.23 Reference Air Kerma Multi-Threshold Alert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
11 Artis one System (2), Others (SWMs, Config Check, ...) 178
11.1 M-Switch PortConfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

11.2 EHC/OSD Import Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
11.3 Pre Program Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
11.4 Tube Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
11.5 SWM EHC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
11.6 SWM RTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
11.7 SWM ULI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
11.8 SWM MCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
11.9 VNC MCI (MCI Download Part 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
11.10 Restore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
11.11 Artis Hardware Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
11.12 Config Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
11.12.1 Configuration Check, Evaluating the Log and Correcting Incon‐ 209
sistencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.13 Version Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
11.14 Format Image Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
12 Artis one Components (1), Image System 214
12.1 Image System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

12.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
12.1.2 Acquisition Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
12.1.3 Image Processing Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
12.1.4 Image Overlay Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
12.1.5 Image Review Control (Display ECG Signal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
12.1.6 Overlay Text for Examination Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
12.1.7 Overlay Text for Post Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
12.1.8 Overlay Text for Quantification Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
12.1.9 Overlay Text for Reference Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
12.1.10 Overlay Text for Dormant Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
12.1.11 System Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
12.1.12 QUANT PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
12.1.13 Network Node: ...... / Offline Device: ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
12.1.14 Completed Flag Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
12.1.15 SCP Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

05.19
Table of Contents 7
12.1.16 Flexible pixel shift (FPS) grid size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

12.1.17 AXIOM Monitoring Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
12.1.18 OGPE Configuration Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
12.1.19 Configure Exam Protocol Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
12.1.20 Video Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
12.1.21 C.A.R.E settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
13 Artis one Components (2), Other Components 243
13.1 CSF_A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

13.1.1 SIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
13.2 OSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
13.2.1 general device settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
13.2.2 Local OSD parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
13.2.3 OSD Animation parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
13.2.4 Local DDIS parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
13.2.5 Sensis related configuration items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
13.2.6 OSD Page - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
13.2.7 OSD Page - Native . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
13.2.8 OSD Page - DSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
13.2.9 OSD Page - Sensis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
13.2.10 OSD Page - MPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
13.2.11 OSD Page - MPR 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
13.2.12 OSD Page VRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
13.2.13 OSD Page VRT 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
13.2.14 OSD Page Workflow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
13.2.15 OSD Page - Exam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
13.2.16 OSD Page - Roadmap. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
13.3 Stand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
13.3.1 Collision Help Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
13.3.2 Max. speed in patient safety zone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
13.3.3 Column Back side Proxy : Yes/No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
13.3.4 Stand Test Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
13.3.5 Safety Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
13.3.6 General Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
13.3.7 General Drive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
13.3.8 Room Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
13.3.9 HeartSweep Trajectories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
13.3.10 Perivision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
13.3.11 Default ISO Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
13.3.12 Preprogramming timeouts/parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
13.3.13 Patient Transfer Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
13.3.14 Sys Pos - Patient Transfer Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
13.3.15 Sys Pos - Head Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
13.3.16 Sys Pos - Parking position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
13.3.17 Sys Pos - Left Side Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
13.3.18 Sys Pos - Right Side Position Table Rotated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
13.3.19 Sys Pos - OR Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
13.3.20 Sys Pos - Peri Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
13.4 Collimator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
13.4.1 User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
13.4.2 FD Format M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

05.19
8 Table of Contents
13.5 Angiomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

13.6 System Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
13.6.1 StartupValues for SystemController . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
13.6.2 Audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
13.6.3 Write protection of direct positions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
13.7 ACU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
13.7.1 FD Video Gain Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
13.7.2 MFIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
13.8 EHC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
13.8.1 general device setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
13.8.2 Sound Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
13.8.3 EHC Button Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
13.9 CMU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
13.9.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
13.10 Error Reporting (Maintenance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
13.10.1 Settings of maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
13.11 Support Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
13.11.1 Days between doing a System Backup in background . . . . . . . . . 299
13.11.2 Free space on IAS Backup HDD for System Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
13.11.3 Tune Up parameters for FD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
13.11.4 Reports parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
13.11.5 Parameters for 3D Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
13.11.6 BACKUPRESTOREHOSTDETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
13.11.7 SDC Backup Xml files validity in Days (-1:Infinite). . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
13.12 3D Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
14 External Devices (Paper Printer, etc.) 310
14.1 Paper Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

14.1.1 Available paper printer media formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
14.1.2 Configured Printers and Syngo Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
14.2 PS LUT Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
15 Applications 314
15.1 Pat. Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

15.2 Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
15.3 CorRea (Correct & Rearrange) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
15.4 MPPS (Modality Performed Procedure Steps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
15.4.1 MPPS Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
15.5 Worklist Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
15.6 syngo.via . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
16 Artis one, Configuration Panel in the Customer UI 325
16.1 Add Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

16.1.1 Adding a Printer (CSE only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
16.1.2 Network Paper Printer installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
16.1.3 Configure the Paper Printer in syngo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
16.1.4 Uninstalling a Network Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

05.19
Table of Contents 9
16.2 Transfer (Artis one - Configuration Panel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

16.2.1 Autotransfer Tabcard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
16.2.2 Local Devices Tabcard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
16.2.3 Network Nodes Tabcard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
16.3 Patient Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
16.3.1 HIS/RIS Tabcard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
16.4 Regional and Language Options (UI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
16.4.1 Language Setting for the Syngo Display (Text Monitor/Display). . 339
16.4.2 Keyboard Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
16.5 Organize Stored Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
17 Exam Set Editor 345
17.1 Exam Sets editing (User and Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

17.1.1 User (Customer) Access to Exam Sets (Normal and Expert) . . . . . 345
17.2 Service Access by CSE to Exam Sets (Normal and Expert). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
18 Procedures 352
18.1 Starting the Local Service (Service UI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

18.2 Starting/Closing the Configuration in Local Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
18.3 Doing changes under Artis One System/Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
18.3.1 Starting and handling the Menu Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
18.3.2 Command Bar (Action Bar) Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
18.3.3 Status ICONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
18.4 Doing changes in syngo SW Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
18.4.1 Starting and Stepping through the Menu Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
18.4.2 Deleting syngo Configurations and/or Menu Pages . . . . . . . . . . . 362
18.5 Starting the Artis one - Configuration Panel in the Customer UI . . . . . . . . . 364
18.6 Starting Configuration of the Quantification (Option) in the User UI . . . . . . 366
18.7 IP Address Reservation Tool for Creating a Unique IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . 367
18.8 Changing the Computer Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
18.9 Rules & Syntax for Host Name, Logical Name and AET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
18.9.1 Rules & Syntax for Host Name of DICOM Remote Node . . . . . . . . 370
18.9.2 Rules & Syntax for Application Entity Title (AET). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
18.9.3 Rules & Syntax for Logical Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
18.10 SRS Help Desk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
18.11 Changing the EHC Inlay & attaching the Button Icon Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
18.12 Fluoroscopy Field Limitation and Electronic Shutter Adjustment . . . . . . . . . 378
18.12.1 Adjusting fluoroscopy field limitation for FD systems. . . . . . . . . . 378
18.12.2 Adjusting the electronic shutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
19 Changes to Previous Version 383
20 List of Hazard IDs 384
21 Index 385

05.19
10 1 General Information
1.1 Notes
1.1.1 General Safety Notes

When performing the work steps and checks, the general safety information for medical
products must be observed ( General Safety Notes / TD00-000.860.01).
They also include information about Note and Hazard Messages.
How to open the document General Safety Notes in the Artis one CB-DOC:
1. Select Safety in the Artis one CB-DOC Main menu.
2. Click on System > Safety Information in the Safety menu.
3. Click on 1 Safety information of the General Safety Notes document.
Note and Hazard Messages
1. Note
Used to provide additional information about the current or next work step.
Also see the Artis one CB-DOC under “Help / Tools > Help > 5 Document Content >
5.2 Pictographs”:
Fig. 1: Note
2. Hazard Messages
Used to make a distinction between possible hazards using the following safety levels/
signal words:
- DANGER
- WARNING
- CAUTION
- NOTICE

05.19
General Information 1 11
Also see the Artis one CB-DOC under “Help / Tools > Help > 5 Document Content >
5.1 Hazard Messages”:
Fig. 2: Hazard Messages
1.1.2 Safety Information
1.1.2.1 General Safety Information

When performing the work steps and checks, the general safety information for medical
products must be observed.
When performing all activities on the system, the safety information contained in the Op‐
erator Manuals must be observed
 WARNING
Missing training can result in failure.
Incorrect service can lead to damage for personnel and system.
 Service is only permitted by trained personnel.
hm_serv_Training

05.19
 WARNING
Unwanted disconnection of electrical cables.
Interruption of interventional procedure.
 Check fixation of connectors and cables after service procedures.
hm_serv_FixCablesAfterService
 WARNING
Incorrect assembly, e.g. loose screw connections.
Damage for patient, personnel or system!
 Each step of service processes shall be performed according to the documen‐
tation, e.g. screws shall be fastened properly.
hm_serv_wrong_assembly
 CAUTION
Bypass image is not displayed in exam room display.
Interruption of interventional procedure.
 Perform check of bypass mode in the following way:
hm_serv_CheckBypassImage
1.1.2.2 Checking the Ground Wires
 WARNING
Improperly established protective ground conductor connections during installa‐
tion, maintenance, or service.
Personal injury due to electric shock.
 Protective conductor tests shall be performed in accordance with the instruc‐
tions in the technical documentation prior to initially switching on the device/
system, as well as after finishing all types of service / installation activities
and prior to handing over the system to the customer.
hm_serv_ProtectiveEarthMeasurement

05.19
1.1.2.3 Switching off Power to the Control Cabinets
 WARNING
Even after switching off the system (shutdown), power is still present at the con‐
trol cabinet and generator.
If not observed, death or serious bodily injury can occur.
 Observe the warning signs in the cabinets.
 Switch off the power supply to the X-ray system with the on-site on/off
switch.
hm_serv_LabelPowerPresent
1.1.2.4 Other Safety Information
 WARNING
Image system supplied by the UPS after system shutdown.
Electric shock during service activities in the Image System.
 If the Image System UPS is configured, unplug the power input connector in
the image system or switch off the UPS prior to beginning service work.
hm_serv_WarnSetUPSPowerMayBePresent
1.1.3 Product-specific Remarks

n Duty cycle of the motors is 10%
The table motors are designed for permanent operation of 10% duty cycle. In order to
avoid overload, each motor may be moved at a maximum of 6 min/h.
n Definition of the Table Positions
Fig. 3: Definition of right, left ...
Left side
Head side Foot side
Right side

05.19
Fig. 4: Artis one Table
1.1.4 General Remarks
1.1.4.1 Tolerance Data
General tolerances for linear dimensions according to ISO 2768
Limit values for over 3 mm over 6 mm over 30 over 120 over 400 over 1000 over 2000
the nominal to 6 mm to 30 mm mm to 120 mm to 400 mm to mm to mm to
range mm mm 1000 mm 2000 mm 4000 mm
Admissible tol‐ ± 0,5 mm ± 1 mm ± 1,5 mm ± 2,5 mm ± 4 mm ± 6 mm ± 8 mm
erance
These tolerances apply to all dimensions given in these instructions, unless another toler‐
ance is expressly indicated after the value.
Torque Values
A tolerance of ± 10 % is permissible for torque values.
1.1.4.2 Screen Shots and Graphics in this Document

n Screenshots and graphics used in this document should be viewed as examples only.
They cannot describe all possible input combinations; they have an informative char‐
acter and are used only for better orientation.
n The actual parameters that must be configured can be found in the text and the tables
or depend on the requirements and configuration (items included in the shipment) of
the individual Artis one system.
- Config pages will be empty (blank page only) if there are no parameters to config‐
ure or only HIDDEN parameters.

05.19
1.1.5 Conventions and Abbreviations
1.1.5.1 System Naming Conventions
Tab. 1 System Naming
EAS Product Name EAS System Type Remarks

Artis one Artis_EAS Used for all countries
1.1.5.2 Abbreviations
Item Explanation
^ Control key (<CTRL>)
AB Anatomic Background
ACQ Acquisition
ACU Acquisition Control Unit
AET Application Entity Title: name of the DICOM service participating in the
communication, either as a user (SCU) or the provider (SCP).
AGC Automatic Gain Control
ANG Angiomatic
APD AC Power Distribution
API Application Programming Interface
ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASCM Advanced Stand Control Module
AutoConf Automatic Configuration. Can be selected in the ConfigCheck result
AutoLic Automatic Licensing. Can be selected in the System Configuration
AUX Auxiliary
AXCS Angio X-Ray Communication System
AXIS Angio X-ray Imaging System for Artis one
bps Bits per second
CAF Configuration Actual File
CAL Calibration
CAN Controller Area Network
CAP Common Application Program

05.19
C.A.R.E / Combined Application to Reduce Exposure

CARE
CAUD Caudal. Detector in patient “Footwards” position
CB-DOC Computer-based Documentation
CCM Collimator Control Module
CDF Configuration Description File
CIS Customer Interaction Solution. Centralization of all Hospital Data in one
central database
CompMgr Component Manager
CorRea Correct & Rearrange
cmd Windows NT command console
CRAN Cranial. Detector in patient “Headwards” position
CS Customized Solution or Customer Services
CSA Common Software Architecture
C.S.E. / CSE Customer Service Engineer
CSF Common Software Function, e.g. SW Package in the RTC.
CT Computed Tomography
DCS Display Carriage (Suspension) System
DDIS Data DISplay
DEXI Digital EXposure Index
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol: assignment procedure of the nu‐
meric IP address to nodes, in which blocks of addresses are leased to cli‐
ents on a first-come, first-served basis. Typically, DHCP is combined with
WINS so that an IP address is both dynamically assigned and automatically
associated with a domain name. This can be combined with DNS, result‐
ing in a dynamically assigned numeric IP address that is automatically as‐
sociated with both NetBIOS and Internet names.
DICOM Digital Imaging & Communication Network Protocol
diruse Directory usage
DL Fluoroscopy (DurchLeuchtung)
DMG Dead Man Grip
DNS Domain Name Service: address resolution procedure which associates nu‐
meric IP addresses with Internet-style names.
DPF Digital Pulsed Fluoroscopy
DR Digital Radiography

05.19
DSA Digital Subtraction Angiography

DVD Digital Video Disc or Digital Versatile Disc
DVD-REC DVD Recorder
EAS Efficient Angio System (Product Name for EAS is: Artis one)
ECG Electro CardioGram
EE Edge Enhancement
EHC Examination Hardware Control
EP Electro Physiology
EPRI Electronic Patient Record Inerface. It is a Web interface (Internet Explorer
browser) to a server, which provides additional data regarding the selec‐
ted patient.
ESD Electrostatic Sensitive Device or ElectroStatic Discharge
EXAM EXAMination type
FD Flat Panel Detector
FDA Federal Drug Administration. Government institution only in USA
FPS Flexible Pixel Shift
FTP File Transfer Protocol: a client-server application that transfers files from
one computer to another.
FW FirmWare
Gateway A display that controls traffic between two networks using factors above
the network layer.
GSDF Gray Scale Standard Display Function
GSM Global Session Manager
GUI Graphical User Interface
HC Hardcopy Camera
HIPAA Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996 (for USA only)
HIS Hospital Information System
HKDL High Contrast Fluoroscopy (HochKontrast DurchLeuchtung)
HQ Headquarters
HTML HyperText Markup Language
HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol
HW HardWare
IAS Image Acquisition System

05.19
IP Internet Protocol (see also TCP/IP)

IQ Image quality
IQAP Image Quality Assurance Program
ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network
ISK Allen screw (InnenSechsKant)
ISO International Organization for Standardization
IVS Image Visualization System
JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group
KB Knowledge Base
LAN Local Area Network
LAO Left anterior oblique. Detector on patient “left side” and in the oblique po‐
sition
LIH Last Image Hold
LMHOSTS Address resolution procedure which statically associates numeric IP ad‐
dresses with NetBIOS names. The LMHOSTS file is checked to see whether
the name is being addressed in this file
L-NAT Local Host Network Address Translation
LSS Local System Server (includes MNP)
LUT Lookup Table
LVA Left Ventricle Analysis
MCI Motion Control Industry
MDM Multi Display Manager (SW for managing input and display of multiple
video sources). Used for “Large Display” LCD Monitor.
MED Siemens MEDical (Healthcare) Group
MLC Midsize LabCockpit Controller. It was called CAC (Controller Artis Cockpit)
before it was renamed to MLC
MNP Managed Node Packages (= System Management)
MOD Magnetic Optical Disk or MODality
MP Multi-purpose
MPP Multi-PurPose
MPPS Modality Performed Procedure Step. This is a DICOM service
MR Magnetic Resonance
MSMD Multi-Scale Motion Detector

05.19
NetBIOS Network Basic Input/Output System: a collection of network services and

programming interfaces. NetBIOS services run on network protocols such
as TCP/IP.
NAT NATive or Network Address Translation
neg negative
NIC Network Interface Card, an expansion card that provides a physical con‐
nection to the network.
NTP Network Time Protocol
NTSC National Television System Committee. TV standard (e.g. USA)
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
OGP OrGan Program
OGPE OrGan Program Editor
OS Operating System
PACS Picture Archive and Communication System
PAL Phase Alternating Line. TV standard (e.g. Germany)
PDU Protocol Data Unit. Used to transfer a data packet via a serial interface
that does not support plain text.
PMM Power Management Module
PMS Service Software Package
pos positive
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol; establishes a transparent TCP/IP connection via a
modem or router connection.
QA Quality Assurance
QCA Quantitative Coronary Analysis
Quant Quantification
QVA Quantitative Vessel Analysis
RAO Right anterior oblique. Detector on the patient “right side” and in the obli‐
que position
RAS Remote Access Services: a Windows NT service that supports dial-in and
dial-out connections using modems and ISDN.
RDIAG Remote DIAGnostics
RIP Routing Information Protocol. Common protocol for managing router in‐
formation within a local area network.
RIS Radiology Information System

05.19
RM Roadmap
Rot Rotation
Router A multiport computer or piece of dedicated hardware that examines net‐
work-layer addresses of packets on a network and, if necessary, retrans‐
mits them on a different network.
RTC Real Time Controller
rti Runtime interface tool
SAM Service Access Manager
SC Service Center
SCM Stand Control Modul
SCP Service Class Provider: a server waiting for a DICOM communication.
SCU Service Class User: the initiator of DICOM communication or Stand Control
Unit
SID Source Image Distance. Distance from X-Ray source to the detector
SMfit Siemens Monitor fitness. SMFit measurement instrument for luminous
density measurement. Used for “Large Display” LCD Monitor.
S-NAT Server-Network Address Translation
STC Siemens Tool Catalogue
SPC Spare Parts Catalogue
SPI SCSI-3 Parallel Interface
SRS Siemens Remote Service
SUB Subtraction
SW SoftWare
SWM SoftWare Manager
TCM Table Control Modul
TCP/IP Transport Control Program / Internet Protocol, the most widely used
standard for networking.
TCP/IP ad‐ Four-digit, dot-separated code to identify nodes on a network.
dress
UI User Interface or Update Instructions
ULI User Location Interface
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
USC UPTIME Service Center
VDX Video Digital Switch

05.19
VCR Video Cassette Recorder

VNC Virtual Network Computing
VPN Virtual Private Network
WAN Wide Area Network
WINS Windows Internet Name Service: address resolution procedure that dy‐
namically associates numeric IP addresses with NetBIOS names. It is possi‐
ble to combine DNS and WINS.
WWW World Wide Web

05.19
1.2 Requirements
1.2.1 Additionally Required Documents

Operator Manual
1.2.2 Required Test Equipment, Tools and Service Aids
n Standard tool kit 97 02 457

n TKD Field Service Kit 97 02 606 RE999
(ESD Field Service Kit)

05.19
Proceedings when changing the Configuration 2 23
1. Before changing the configuration:

a) Use the “Backup/Restore” utility on the Service Home page to make a current
“Syngo System and Configuration Data Backup”.
b) Check whether the complete system is functioning properly.
2. When performing configuration changes:
a) Only make changes in the configuration which are permitted for the CSE or explic‐
itly authorized by the factory (Speed Info, IQ Specialist group, HSC, etc.). Observe
the explanation text for the specific parameter!
b) Only components or options that are installed/present in the system may be con‐
figured!
c) If an (“....... (key)”) option is configured without the required valid license key, it is
not possible to save the configuration! This means the new license key (license.dat
file) must be installed before changing the configuration. Attention: Using autol‐
ic will set all available options which require licenses to yes, regardless of whether
or not the license key is installed.
d) Make sure to Save the changes only if you are sure that they should be valid per‐
manently, otherwise Exit do not save. After saving, the message “restart ap
plication pending” can appear.
3. Making configuration changes valid:
a) If the configuration was changed and saved, the version check and the configura‐
tion check will be started automatically when exiting the specific configuration
module. Use autoconfig to correct all inconsistencies shown by the configuration
check.
b) Make absolutely sure to leave the Configuration by clicking on Home to make the
changes valid. If the “restart application pending” info appeared previ‐
ously, the decision box now appears to initiate a reboot “now” or “later”.
Click on now if no further configuration changes have to be made.
Click on later if other configuration changes have to be made. Make sure to leave
the configuration again with clicking on Home to obtain the prompt window
again to finally initiate the system reboot.
4. If there are problems after the configuration was changed:
a) If problems occur after the configuration was changed, the original status can be
recovered by restoring the “Syngo System and Configuration Data Backup” us‐
ing the Backup/Restore utility in the Service Home page.

05.19
24 3 System Options
Configuration of the“System Options”:

1. Start the Configuration. ( Starting/Closing the Configuration in Local Service
/ Page 355)
 The “Configuration Main Menu” screen is displayed where all configuration
sub-menus can be selected:
Fig. 5: Configuration Main menu for the Artis one with all possible parameters

If the “Initial Setup” window appears, proceed as described under list point 5.
( Fig. 8 Page 26)

05.19
System Options 3 25
2. Double-click on System Options.

Fig. 6: Starting the "System Options" configurations
 The “System Options” page is displayed:

Fig. 7: System Options with Artis one

05.19
26 3 System Options
Tab. 2 System type used for Artis one
System Type Remarks

Artis_one Used in all countries for Artis one
3. Check/configure the configurations in the “System Options” menu.

a) System type
System type “Artis_one” is always configured.
b) List of system options
Select the corresponding checkbox/es to activate and deselect them to deactivate
the desired option/s.
 Only options that are installed/present in the system may be configured!
 System Management must be first stopped/deactivated under “System Mgmt >

Agent Controls” to make the check box undimmed.
Depending on what is configured here, the required Configuration menus are cre‐
ated for the selected options and provide the corresponding configuration parame‐
ters.
4. Click on Next in the “Action Bar”.
- If no change/s have been made:
 The Configuration Home Menu appears.
- If change/s have been made:
 The “Initial setup” window appears.
5. Initial Setup window:
Fig. 8: Sample of Initial Setup
When the syngo-based system is configured for the first time (only in the factory dur‐
ing system startup) or if an option was added/removed in the “List of system op‐

05.19
System Options 3 27
tions”, the service software will guide the CSE through the necessary mandatory con‐
figuration procedure/s.
Click on Next.
 The guided configuration procedure starts.
By clicking again on Next, move step by step through the guided configuration proce‐
dure/s to perform the necessary mandatory configuration/s.
6. When finished, use Home in the “Function Bar” to close the Configuration and go
back to the Service Home menu. Do not close the Configuration menu with the “X”
button of the Windows window!
7. Make the changes valid.
If the information “restart application pending” appeared, the decision box
to initiate a reboot pops up. Click on “now” to reboot the system.

05.19
28 4 Local Host
4.1 Site Info

The customer and system data as well as the Service Headquarters data are config‐
ured here.
Procedure for making Changes: ( Doing changes in syngo SW Modules / Page 361)
4.1.1 Site-specific customer and system data

General-system and site-specific information has to be entered in the fields of this screen
for easy identification of the system.
Fig. 9: Site Info (Artis one)
(1) Mandatory Data Input Boxes

(2) Selection of Remote Service Center
 Entries in the mandatory fields ( 1/Fig. 9 Page 28) must be correct. This is important for
sufficient node registration if “System Management” is enabled.
The headline of this menu shows, e.g.:
Modality type System Type Product name Software version

XA1 Artis_one Artis one VA10A 130730
1. XA = AX Modality

05.19
Local Host 4 29
All fixed items in this screen are set automatically during software installation and by se‐
lecting the appropriate System type in the “System Options” menu ( 1/Fig. 7 Page 25).
System
n Serial No
This field is mandatory. It may not include any characters other than numbers from 0
to 9. The number may not have a “leading zero”! The contents of the serial number
are checked according to the selected System Type in the “System Options” win‐
dow. ( 1/Fig. 7 Page 25)
n Station Name
Any desired name can be entered as a station name as long as it meets the following
criteria and restrictions: Enter up to 16 characters, “ \ ” may not be used.
Usually the node name (= computer name) of your product is used.
The Station Name is displayed on all images acquired by this system/station.
Nothing special has to be considered when changing the Station Name. Perform a
new syngo system and configuration backup.
Service
n Remote Service Center ( Checking the Customer Specific Location and System Da‐
ta / AXA6-SRS.843.01)
Choose either Europe, Asia or USA depending of the continent where the system is
located. Choose “(Please Select Value)” if no Remote Service Center is connected.
Test(not_for_Customer_Site) is only for factory use!
 The entry of the RDIAG server used must also be performed manually under Auto Report
Customer and Address

n Id
This field is mandatory! Do not use spaces and the following special characters:
\/:∗?<>|″
n Location
This field is mandatory! Select the correct country from the drop-down list.
Saving Changes:
1. Select Save in the “Action Bar” to save the values that were entered.
 The new values are saved when ready appears in the “Action Bar”.
- In some cases, the pop-up window
“FTP target LUX09505 will be reset to installation default
The password will be changed to default value
Accept installation default values?”
appears, asking for an ftp password change.
Do not acknowledge the pop-up window with OK; if you select OK, the ftp pass‐
word will be reset and it will have to be set back to the correct value (siemens)
manually.

05.19
30 4 Local Host
- Acknowledge the pop-up window only by selecting Keep Current settings

and close the adjacent window only by clicking on the “x” in the top right corner.
2. After the changes are saved, click on > to advance to the next page or click on Finish
to exit the “Site Info” window.
4.1.2 Time zone (date & time) Settings
4.1.2.1 Time zone (date & time) settings, NTP Time Server not activated
Use > to advance to this page:
Fig. 10: Site Info, Step 2
n Time zone
Select the appropriate time zone from the drop-down menu.
n NTP Time Server
The NTP Time Server activate check box is not checked.
- Check the Time Zone , Date and Time and, if needed, adapt them manually here.
n Daylight Time
Automatic switch of daylight time / standard time should always be configured, if ap‐
plicable.

05.19
Local Host 4 31
n Date
This config item appears only if the NTP Time Server activate check box is not
checked.
Check the Time Zone and Date: If needed, adapt them manually here.
The date can be set back a max. of one day.
With correction of the date by more than one day, an appropriate error message is
sent out and the entry is rejected.
n Time
This config item appears only if the NTP Time Server activate check box is not
checked.
Check the Time. If needed, adapt it here manually.
4.1.2.2 Time zone (date & time) settings, NTP Time Server activated
Make sure that all the steps as listed in the previous section “Time zone (date & time)
settings, NTP Time Server not activated” were performed. ( Time zone (date & time) set‐
tings, NTP Time Server not activated / Page 30)
Reason:
The time must be set manually at least once!
1. The AXIS time is synchronized with the NTP time server only during bootup or Applica‐
tion Restart. Systems which always run through without getting switched off can indi‐
cate time differences, depending on the run time and clock drift.
2. Synchronization takes place only if the time difference is not more than 10 minutes.
The service technician must set the time manually so that it does not differ by more
than ± 10 minutes. Then the time will be synchronized after the next Reboot or Appli‐
cation Restart.
3. Comment: There are detailed event log entries from these processes which state
whether or not synchronization took place and about how much the time difference
there was to the server before and after synchronization.
n NTP Time Server
If the intention is to use the NTP Time Server, proceed as follows:
a) Make sure that the time was set manually at least once within a ± 10 minute
range.
b) Check the NTP Time Server activate check box.
 The following screen appears:

05.19
32 4 Local Host
Fig. 11: Site Info menu, Time zone with NTP Time Server
c) NTP time server (enter IP address or DNS name)

Enter the IP address or the DNS name of the on-site NTP server in this field and, if
needed, adjust the time zone.
Click on Verification to verify the entry.
A check is performed to determine if the time provided by the NTP server is within
 the date and time range of the application licenses. If not, the NTP Server will not be
accepted.

05.19
Local Host 4 33
d) Click on Save.
When the time server is configured and the changes are saved, it is possible sporadi‐
cally that the window
“Message from webpage” ( Fig. 12 Page 33)
pops up and the NTP Server setup fails.
Fig. 12: Message from the webpage (NTP)
Work-around:
1. Set the time manually once again. It may not differ by more than ± 2 minutes.
2. Repeat the NTP setup and save the changes.
 The NTP setup should now be successful.

05.19
34 4 Local Host
4.2 TCP/IP LAN

Enter the appropriate data in this screen.
Fig. 13: Local Host, TCP/IP LAN
4.2.1 Identification
During initial startup, the “Computer name” must be reassigned under “Identification”.
The Computer name (= Host name) identifies the system in the network .
n Restrictions regarding the Computer Name:
- It must be in agreement with the local network administrator!
- It must be unique in the network!
- Only capital letters may be used!
- Enter 1 to 15 characters
- Do not use special characters ; : " < > * + = \ | ? ,
- Do not use the “_” (underscore) character, as it can cause problems (even if it is
possible to enter it).
- Avoid using the “-” (minus) character, as it could cause problems (even if it is
possible to enter it).
- Do not use only numerical characters.

05.19
Local Host 4 35
- Do not use a numerical character at the beginning of the name

n Changing the Computer Name
This has an effect on the Dicom AEs, the Versant database, System Management, as
well as on the User Default Password !
To change the computer name, follow this procedure: ( Changing the Computer
Name / Page 368)
n Using DNS
The DNS name entered should be used as the “Computer name”.
4.2.2 Adapter
A maximum of three network adapters can be selected in the “select name” box in the
IVS:
Fig. 14: TCP/IP LAN adapters
4.2.2.1 AXCS (internal) network adapter

Adapter: AXCS : Intel(R) I350 Gigabit Network Connection
1. The IP address 10.1.1.4 has already been assigned and may not be changed.
2. The Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 has already been assigned and may not be
changed.
3. If the IP address 10.1.1.4 is already specified by the SW for the gateway, it must be
deleted!
 With the AXCS (internal) network adapter, the “default gateway IP address 10.1.1.4”
must be deleted with del. See the procedure in the Software Installation Instruction.
4. In Windows 7, “Auto Detect” must be configured in the Utility “Properties” under

“Properties” for Linkspeed & Duplex.
4.2.2.2 DICOM (external) network adapter

Adapter: DICOM : Intel(R) I350 Gigabit Network Connection
1. Select the DICOM (external) network adapter and select the Specify an IP address
button.
2. Enter the DICOM IP in the IP address box (depends on the Hospital Network Adminis‐
trator) and accept this with add.
If the IP address 192.xxx.x.x (the default from the factory or from the software CD) is
 already present, it must be deleted with del. Then the IP address can be entered here by
the customer and accepted with add.

05.19
36 4 Local Host
3. Enter the subnet mask (e.g. 255.255.255.0)

4. Enter the IP address for the router under gateways if a router is being used. If a router
is not configured, then enter the same IP as under IP address.
More than one Gateway can be configured. In this case, a static route must be config‐
ured for the SRS Gateway under “Routing” ( Routing / Page 40).
5. In Windows 7, the following must be configured for Utility > “Network Connections”
under “Properties” for Linkspeed & Duplex:
- “Auto Detect” for systems with the LEONARDO/syngo X Workplace. If the 1000
Mbps network card is used with the X-Leonardo (e.g. for Dyna CT), configure
“1000Mbps/Auto Negotiate” here.
- “Auto Detect” (factory setting) or “100Mbps/Full Duplex” for systems with
ACOM.net, depending on the ACOM.net SW version and the hospital network en‐
vironment.
4.2.2.3 NetLink (IAS <--> IVS, internal) network adapter

Adapter: Netlink :Intel(R) I350 Gigabit Network Connection
1. The IP address 192.168.171.131 has already been assigned and may not be changed.
2. The Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 has already been assigned and may not be
changed.
3. In Windows 7, “Auto Negotiate” must be configured in the Utility “Properties” under
“Properties” for Linkspeed & Duplex.
4.2.3 IP Address
1. Obtain an IP address from DHCP server
If Obtain an IP address from DHCP server is selected and thus Specify an IP address
 (default) is to be deselected, the entry for the “Default Gateway” must first be deleted
with del.
2. Specify an IP address
Normally select this option (DHCP is not available or not used). The following three
input boxes will then appear:
- IP address
- Subnet mask
- gateways
If Specify an IP address (default) is deselected and Obtain an IP address from DHCP

 server is to be selected in its place, the entry for the “Default Gateway” must first be de‐
leted with del.

05.19
Local Host 4 37
3. IP address
With entry of the IP address, subnet mask or a gateway address, a “0” may never be en‐
tered at the beginning of the four-digit numerical group.
Correct: 221. 45. 1. 1 / Incorrect: 221.045.001.01
Result of an incorrect entry: No “MedCom pending” and reboot when exiting the service
software using Home. The next time a bootup is performed, the application software

cannot be completely downloaded and initialized.
Action to correct the error:
1. If possible, boot the system.
2. Start the service software.
3. Delete the inadmissible IP address with del.
4. Then enter the correct IP address and accept it with add.
 If the IP address 192.xxx.x.x (the default from the factory or from the software CD) is
already present, it must be deleted.
- Changing the IP address.

Changing the IP address is possible only by deleting the old IP address with del.
Then enter the new IP address and accept it with add.
If System Management is already installed, it must first be uninstalled prior to
changing the IP address. After changing the IP address, System Management must
be reinstalled. The SRS Help Desk must be informed about the change of the IP ad‐
dress. ( SRS Help Desk / Page 371)
The IP address must be changed (e.g) if:
Process Reason
System Startup at the Cus‐ When shipped, the IP address is entered by the production
tomer's Location line.
System Software Installation When the software is downloaded (TCP/IP LAN is not re‐
stored!), the default IP address from the software CD is al‐
ready entered here.
4. Subnet mask
Enter the subnet mask data for each adapter, if applicable.
5. gateways
Enter the Gateway data, if applicable.
- DICOM (external) Network (Network Area for Remote Targets).
 Before “Obtain an IP address from DHCP server” is selected, the “Default Gateway”
must be deleted here with del.

05.19
38 4 Local Host
- AXCS (internal) Network (for internal AXIOM Artis system Network Area).
If filled in here, the “default gateway IP Adresse 10.1.1.4” must be deleted.
4.2.4 WINS
1. Primary WINS server
Enter the IP address of the primary WINS server here.
2. Secondary WINS server
Enter the IP address of the secondary WINS server here.
3. Enable DNS for Windows Resolution
Not used for Artis one systems. Do not activate the check box!
4. Enable LMHOSTS Lookup
Activate the check box, e.g. click on it and set a checkmark. This function is enabled
for Artis one systems.
4.2.5 DNS
Do not configure a DNS (Domain Name Server) if it is not available; otherwise, you may
experience problems during startup of Windows 7.
1. Domain
The DNS name entered should be used as the “Computer name”.
2. DNS service search order
The search order of the DNS service is configured here.
Choose an existing IP address from the drop-down list field or enter the address in the
other field and click on add to append a new IP address to the drop-down list.
4.2.6 IPv6
Mark the “Configure IPv6” check box if the system is connected to a network environ‐
ment using an IP address server with the new IP address range, Version 6.
One of these two methods for how to obtain an IP address must be chosen:
1. Obtain an IPv6 address from DHCPv6 server

No further action is needed. All addresses are assigned automatically and handled by
the DHCPv6 server.
2. Specify an IPv6 address
Manually enter following information about the IP address:
a) IPv6 address
Choose an existing IP address from the drop-down list field or enter the address in
the other field and click on add to append a new IP address to the drop-down list.

05.19
Local Host 4 39
b) Subnet prefix length

Enter the length in the field
c) IPv6 gateway
Choose an existing gateway IP address from the drop-down list field or enter the
address in the other field and click on add to append a new gateway IP address to
the drop-down list.
d) IPv6 DNS
Choose an existing DNA IP address from the drop-down list field or enter the ad‐
dress in the other field and click on add to append a new DNS IP address to the
drop-down list.
“If Configure IPv6” is configured:

When an attempt is made to configure any new network node using the syngo Local
Service UI, it is possible that the Test
of the corresponding valid IPv6 address will always fail and the error message ’Host is
not alive’ is displayed:
In this case, proceed as follows:

Work-around for testing the IPv6 Address
1. Start 'Utilities', 'Excape to OS'
2. Select 'NT Command Interpreter'
3. Enter the command 'ping <IPv6 address> ↵', e.g.:
'ping 2001:db8:12:0:399d:5860:8123:3'
4. Click on the Go button.

05.19
40 4 Local Host
4.3 Routing
Routing is required to establish the connection to the the SRS (SIEMENS Remote Server).
The route to the “SRS gateway” (SRS Router) is configured here.
Fig. 15: Static Route Configuration
Routing Configuration
1. Configure Gateway
The SRS Help Desk must be informed when there is a “Server Network Address Transla‐
 tion” (S-NAT). It must then perform the necessary configurations on the SRS portal.
( SRS Help Desk / Page 371)
a) “Hospital.” Static Route to SRS

If required, enter the hospital internal IP address for the static route to the SRS as‐
signed by the hospital’s Network Administrator.
Click on Test to check whether the Static Route to SRS is working.

05.19
Local Host 4 41
b) Outside NAT:
NAT = Network Address Translation
- The listed Access Server is the back-end server for the RDiag functionali‐
ties. In some cases, the network administration allows only its own address
range, which would consequently suppress any traffic with the original IP ad‐
dress. Therefore, the NAT check box must be checked and addresses in the al‐
lowed address range must be entered for each server.
- How to determine whether there is a Outside NAT used:
There is no check available. Outside NAT (= Server NAT) requires major
changes to the SRS configuration that start in the router configuration. There‐
fore it should be communicated to the CSE prior to performing the SRS config‐
uration.
c) “Remote Service Center”
The parameters are already set by the configuration under ““Site Info””.
Click on Test to check whether the static route to the Remote Service Center is
working.
2. Click on Control Rip Listener.
 The following menu appears:
Fig. 16: Control RIP Listener
a) RIP Listener:
RIP = Routing Information Protocol)
- Check the RIP Listener check box only when making an initial router configura‐
tion.
- The RIP Listener is an implemented tool to compile routing information on the
network and automatically corrects the routing tables.
- If RIP Listener is configured, the RIP information is compiled in the network for
a maximum of 15 min. after starting the system, then it is automatically set to
inactive.
To keep from having to always update the route information in the system, the
RIP Listener must be deactivated following a successful router configuration.
- Remove the checkmark in the RIP Listener check box after a successful ini‐
tial router configuration!

05.19
42 4 Local Host
4.4 Users
The “Users” menu makes it possible to set the account name and password for the local
system application and the password for the local PPP account.
Fig. 17: Users menu
A check must be performed to ensure that the correct keyboard driver is installed before
entering passwords in this screen.

One of the following two methods can be used for this check:
n Open a “Notepad” window and write the password there
n Write the password, e.g. in the “Account for UI” line
In both cases, check whether the password is correctly written.
User Settings, Account for UI

1. Account for UI
The default account is set to ”meduser ↵”. Enter this account and the appropriate
password to start the application. If the “Enable Autologin” check box is marked, the
request for this account will be skipped during system bootup.
2. Default Password
Do not put a checkmark in this check box.
If you do not select this item, you need to manually enter a password and confirm it in
the fields under “or give password”.
When selecting the “Default Password” checkmark box, a password is created accord‐
ing to certain rules known to the service engineer. ( Password Rules / Page 43).
3. Enable Autologin
If a checkmark is set here in the “Enable Autologin” checkbox, the Application SW will
start automatically during the system’s boot procedure.
If there is no checkmark set here, the “Autologin” is disabled and the bootup will stop.
The user is asked for a login name (account) and matching password to continue the
normal bootup and to start the Application Software. Example: Login: meduser and

05.19
Local Host 4 43
Password:. See the AX PASSWORD LIST, Speed Info ID 14522 in the CS Knowledge
Base. The password depends on the computer name. ( Password Rules / Page 43)).
 Always place a checkmark in this check box! The AXIS Smart always uses Auto login.
User Settings, Account for PPP

1. Default Password
A modem is not released for use! Do not make any changes in the default password
check box and do not type anything in the fields under “or give password”.
User Settings, Account for Administrator
n Account for Administrator
According to the security regulations, it is not allowed to use a predefined administra‐
tor password. It has to be set manually for each system during startup (you will be
forced to do this during the initial setup).
n Disable account
Never place a checkmark in this check box! Disabling the account for the administra‐
tor is not allowed!
4.4.1 Password Rules

Passwords are comprised of 3 parts.
Password Syntax:
n Part 1: The special character @
n Part 2: Account name medUser or medPPP
n Part 3: The last three letters of the computer name in upper-case letters.
n Example for the computer name: medpc
- The password for the user "“medUser”” is comprised as follows:
@medUserDPC
- The password for the user "“PPP”” is comprised as follows:
@medPPPDPC
 Observe upper and lower case conventions!
4.4.1.1 Changing the Computer Name, Effect on the Password
 Changing the computer name has an effect on the password!
If the computer name is changed in the TCP/IP LAN menu, the checkmark is automatically
removed for Default Password and the password is entered in the or give Password box.
In other words, the old password is still valid.

05.19
44 4 Local Host
However if Default Password is checked, the new password applies according to the
password rules.
Example:
If the computer name is changed, e.g. from medpc to CARD, @medUserARD results as
the new password for the “medUser” (@medPPPARD) user for the PPP User).
However these passwords are active only if the Default Passwort box is checked.

05.19
Local Host 4 45
4.5 Monitor Type

Fig. 18: Monitor Type settings
“Monitor Type settings”

“Monitor Type”
1. color
Always select color and Siemens (True Color) in the drop-down menu.
2. greyscale
Never select this! Currently not used for AX systems!
“Multi Monitor settings”
1. Enable Multi Monitor Configuration
Do not activate this check box! This function is currently not used by AX systems!
2. Start syngo in single monitor
This check box must always be activated.

05.19
46 4 Local Host
4.6 Modality
Modality Configuration
n MultiModality System
Check the “MultiModality System” check box if you want to retrieve work lists for the
XA and RF modalities.
With Multi-modality, both modalities can be selected and configured in the user set‐
tings (HIS/RIS Pat. Reg.).
This has no influence on image objects, they will always be sent with the XA modality.
n Modality
- “Any” is always selected.
- For AX systems, normally configure only the “XA” modality!
n Query Modalities
- “Any” can be selected.
-For AX systems, normally configure only the “XA” modality!
For AX systems, normally configure only the XA modality!“Any” is always selected.

05.19
Local Host 4 47
Fig. 19: Modality

05.19
48 4 Local Host
4.7 syngo task cards

These 3 task cards are activated automatically by syngo during system startup.

Do not change the default settings of the 3 configuration items!!
All 3 check boxes must be checked.
Fig. 20: syngo task cards
syngo task cards configuration settings

n Activate Filming task card at startup
Prerequisite: Hardcopy option (Key: FILM_VSF) must be installed.
Default: The check box is checked
n Activate Viewer task card at startup
n Activate 3D task card at startup

05.19
Security 5 49
5.1 Settings
This configuration is performed in cooperation with the customer's administrator. See the
Retrofit Instructions: ( syngo Security Option / AXA6-000.814.02)
Start the configuration: ( Starting/Closing the Configuration in Local Service
/ Page 355)
A HIPAA problem (see List items 15. and 16.) can appear after the first time installation/
configuration of the Syngo Security Option and every time after restoring the Configura‐
tion and System Data backup and if then on the Artis one, a 3D Reconstruction is star‐
ted:
n automatically after a 3D Acquisition is finished.
n Or if the user selects “Send to 3D” in the Postprocessing-tabcard or in the Patient
 n
Browser.
Or if the User selects “Interactive Reconstruction” in the 3D-tabcard.
Problem solution:
A "%medhome%\UninstallLog\Ax_IAH_HipAAReco_Privileges.bat ↵" batch file is pro‐
vided and has to be run to support required privileges. The batch file has to be executed
as the administrator when HIPAA is enabled.. Also see the procedure for List Items 15.
and 16.
Prerequisites for enabling the Security settings:

n The “Security Setting” package is loaded during the SW download process, see: ( Re‐
storing the Security Settings (Option) / AXA6-000.816.01)
n To check the security settings, also see the SW download document. ( Restoring the
Security Settings (Option) / AXA6-000.816.01)
n The syngo Security / HIPPA SW License SECURITY_PRIVACY_BASIC is imported/instal‐
led. See: ( Installation / AXA6-000.814.02)
Important Remarks to be observed:
n Do not change the administrator password from the Siemens default!
Doing so may prevent the local CSE and/or SRS personnel from gaining access to the
security application to provide assistance.
n Do NOT disable interactive logins!
Doing so will result in having to reload the software.
Interactive login is controlled from Local Service under “Configuration > Local Host
Users” settings. The “Enable Autologin” function check box must be selected.
( Users / Page 42)
n Once security is enabled and properly configured, perform a Security Settings
backup from local service, backup and restore!
Doing so will allow the configuration to be exported to use on other systems with the
same SW version, if needed.
This function is also called “Syngo System and Configuration Backup” or “COBR”.

05.19
50 5 Security
n Once security is enabled and properly configured, perform a complete image

COBR image for disaster recovery purposes.
The Acronis and Ghost SW can both create disk images for disaster recovery. ( Days
between doing a System Backup in background / Page 299)
This recovery backup should be kept in a safe place on site along with the COBR for
the system prior to enabling security.
COBR refers to the older syngo “Complete Backup and Restore” functionality.
Configuration/Installation of the syngo Security Option:
1. Before the Security status is changed to “Active” to enable HIPAA, perform a syngo
System and Configuration Data Backup to a CD/DVD or USB device.
This is necessary to be able to undo the HIPAA activation later on. Mark the backup
medium accordingly and keep it in a safe place on site.
Security properties can be set only once!!

Deactivation is not possible due to security reasons (e.g., it is not possible to deactivate
audit trailing after it has already been set).
 If disabling or changing the security settings is absolutely necessary, it can be done by

reloading the software. But it is necessary to use a “Syngo System and Configuration Da‐
ta Backup” that was made before the security status was changed to “Active”. More de‐
tailed information is provided in the “SYNGO Security Settings” documents (Help in the
Application SW).
2. Click on Configuration > Security Settings.

 One of the following screens appears:
Fig. 21: Safety Settings (inactive) Fig. 22: Security Settings (active)

05.19
Security 5 51
3. Displayed Security status:

- Active
HIPAA is already installed and active. Nothing can/should be changed here any‐
more. See: ( Fig. 22 Page 50)
Click on Finish to exit this mask.
- Inactive
HIPAA is not yet installed. See: ( Fig. 21 Page 50)
If HIPAA has to be installed/activated then perform the required configurations
step by step starting from list item 4 (Security properties).
For the required setup/configuration, see: ( Fig. 22 Page 50)
Security properties can be set only once!!

Deactivation is not possible due to security reasons (e.g., it is not possible to deacti‐
vate audit trailing after it has already been set).
 If disabling or changing the security settings is absolutely necessary, it can be done

by reloading the software. But it is necessary to use a “Syngo System and Configura‐
tion Data Backup” that was made before the security status was changed to “Active”.
More detailed information is provided in the “SYNGO Security Settings” documents
(Help in the Application SW).
4. Security properties
a) User Management
Select it. The users are to be specified and defined.
b) Data access check
Select it. The users are to see only certain data (e.g. VIP).
c) Functional check
Select it. The users can perform only certain functions.
d) Auditing
Select it. An audit trail according to HIPAA regulations will be activated. The Audit
Trail is located in the Artis one Control Panel. ( Artis one, Configuration Panel in
the Customer UI / Page 325)
e) Security status
The current status of the security function is displayed here.
Security “Inactive”: All check boxes are displayed normally and are available to be
checkmarked.
Security “Active”: All check boxes except “SSL encryption” are displayed dimmed
and show the current checkmarks.
The security features can only be set when enabling the security usage. Once
these settings are saved, they are frozen. If this dialog is re-entered later on, the
settings can be only viewed, but not changed.
5. DICOM access
a) Enable trusted host functionality
Select it. This parameter always must be selected.

05.19
52 5 Security
6. Remote service access

a) SSL encryption
Do not select. This parameter may have no checkmark and is not displayed dim‐
med.
7. Select Reset in the “Action Bar” only if the changes which were done have to be can‐
celed.
After clicking on Reset , either make new changes and continue this procedure with
the next list item 8. (Save), or exit this configuration without making any changes by
clicking on Finish.
9. Acknowledge the message “...successfully saved” with OK
10. Select Finish in the “Action Bar” to leave the Security Settings screen.
11. “Config Check” will be executed. If inconsistancies are there detected, click on Auto‐
config to remove them.
12. Select Home to leave the configuration Home Page.
13. Confirm the reboot of the system in the “System Reboot Required” message win‐
dow
14. After reboot of the system is finished, perform the necessary setups in the User’s Ap‐
plication SW.
Detailed information is provided in the SYNGO Security Settings documents (Help in
the Application SW).
15. If the 3D Acquisition (key) option and/or the 3D HeartSweep Acquisisition (key) op‐
tion is installed in the system:
Execute the batch file
%medhome%\UninstallLog\Ax_IAH_HipAAReco_Privileges.bat ↵
which is provided to support required privileges.
The batch file has to be executed as the administrator when HIPAA is enabled..
The batch has to be executed again after every SW installation, configuration and
backup/restore.
Problems solved by executing this batch:
- Auto transfer of reconstructed data does not work.
- If HIPAA is active, 3D reconstruction cannot be saved.
16. Due to a syngo problem, the following command has to be executed as the adminis‐
trator:
seci configValue install System Client_BuiltInDataSecPermissions #*DI‐
COM_USER@%COMPUTERNAME%@1f,#*UAutoReco@%COMPUTERNAME%@1f
“List of direct user permissions applied to all data security authorlze calls.” ↵
This command has to be executed in a cmd shell as the user administrator and as the
last step of a EAS installation. This means configuration and backup/restore following
SW installation.
The command has to be executed again after a host name change.
The following steps are required for execution as the user administrator:
a) Deactivation of auto login (“Enable Autologin”) in the Service UI.

05.19
Security 5 53
b) Switch the user to Administrator (“Log In Different User...”)

c) Select the entry “Switch to Operating System Login...” in the syngo menu under
Options.
d) Log on as administrator.
The administrator password is available in the SIEMENS Knowledge Base (KB).
Problems solved by executing this command:
- Patient browser: Import of data has to be triggered twice for completion.
17. Make sure that an “Acronis” backup (Image) is made for disaster recovery. ( Days be‐
tween doing a System Backup in background / Page 299)

05.19
54 6 Service
6.1 Mail
All configurations and entries required here are made automatically if the particular
RDIAG server is selected and saved under Configuration > Local Host Site Info > Remote
Service Center.
It is necessary to check here again whether these entries were correctly made by the
software. ( Mail / AXA6-SRS.843.01)
Fig. 23: Mail

05.19
Service 6 55
6.2 FTP
All configurations and entries required here are made automatically if the particular
RDIAG server is selected and saved under Configuration > Local Host Site Info > Remote
Service Center.
It is necessary to check here again whether these entries were correctly made by the
software. ( FTP / AXA6-SRS.843.01)( Testing FTP / AXA6-SRS.843.01)
Fig. 24: FTP

05.19
56 6 Service
6.3 Auto Transfer

Fig. 25: Auto Transfer
activate/deactivate automatic Transfers (initiated by the autoreport tool)

1. activate automatic Transfers
Default: not checked (Q)
When connecting SRS, this check box is checked (H) and templates under Auto Re‐
port must be set up and activated accordingly. See: ( Auto Trans‐
fer / AXA6-SRS.843.01) and ( Auto Report Template configura‐
tions / AXA6-SRS.843.01).
Additional Auto Transfer Templates can be created, which are used only by the facto‐
ry and by HC CX CS HSC AX or HC CX CS PS AX for monitoring systems and for trouble‐
shooting purposes. In this case, an additional Auto Report template must be set up
and activated either via Remote Service or by the CSE as instructed by the factory, HC
CX CS HSC AX or HC CX CS PS AX. See ( Auto Report Template configura‐
tions / AXA6-SRS.843.01).
2. activate Passive FTP
Default: not checked (Q)
When connecting SRS, this check box must be checked (H). See: ( Auto Trans‐
fer / AXA6-SRS.843.01).

05.19
Service 6 57
6.4 Eventlog
Fig. 26: Event log
This function is used to customize the event log user interface of the service software.
( Eventlog / AXA6-SRS.843.01)
n Log only Service messages
If checked, only service messages are logged in the event log.
Default: Unchecked

05.19
58 6 Service
6.5 Backup/Restore
 Only for Engineering! Do not make changes here!
Fig. 27: Backup/Restore
Here packages, groups and files&directories can be added and/or removed that are
used by the Backup & Restore utility in the Service Home Menu.
The following Local Packages are available by default:
n 4D_IAH
n Auto Report
n AxCalibration3D
n AxIAELocalSettings
n AxJobLists
n Clone Package
n Configuration
n Exam Sets
n FD Data
n File Export
n Security settings

05.19
Service 6 59
n SW Distribution

05.19
60 6 Service
6.6 Licensing
With the “Licensing” function, existing and/or newly issued “Application Licence Keys”
(e.g. for options) can be downloaded from the license CD to the system (licence.dat file
in the AXIS IVS (Host)).
 The licenses for Artis one will be shipped from SCM on CD media only.
If there is a problem with a received license.dat file (e.g. file corrupted), contact the Li‐
censing Center support.
 Tel.: + 49 9191 8080 => 1 9 4
e-mail: e-mail: ibclicensingcenter.healthcare@siemens.com
Procedure for making changes: ( Doing changes in syngo SW Modules / Page 361)
After starting Licensing, License Details is always selected as the default!
Fig. 28: Configuration, Service, Licensing
If the “Error -10” is displayed under “Status”:
 the corresponding feature is an expired license or an expired trial (demo) license. See:
( Trial License (Demo License) / Page 69)

05.19
Service 6 61
6.6.1 General Information about Licensing

n With every new system that is shipped, all SW licenses for all SW options that the cus‐
tomer has ordered are already installed.
n In addition, a license CD (license.dat text file) with all SW licenses for the SW options
ordered by the customer are included in the shipment as a “Backup”. The license.dat
text file contains all required license data for all the SW options purchased by the cus‐
tomer.
n Software Reload/Update with Valid “Backup”
The licenses are part of the “Syngo System and Configuration Backup” and are auto‐
matically reloaded with the configuration data when performing Restore of the “Syn‐
go System and Configuration Backup”. The procedure is described in the document
“VA10x Software Installation Instructions, ( Restoring the Configuration Da‐
ta / AXA6-000.816.01)“.
In this instance, licenses do not have to be reloaded on the system.
n Software reload/update without “Syngo System and Configuration Backup” or
download of new SW licenses:
The license.dat text file must be imported from the license CD to the system!
n If an additional SW option is ordered later by the customer, a new license.dat Text-
File is generated by the “Licensing Center” and is shipped to the customer on CD, or
if requested, per e-mail (license.dat text file as an attachment). It replaces the previ‐
ous license file. If sent by e-mail, the USC or the CSE must burn the license file to a CD
or copy it to a memory stick and from there it can be imported to the system.
If there is a problem with a received license.dat file (e.g. file corrupted), contact the Li‐
censing Center support.
 Tel.: + 49 9191 8080 => 1 9 4
e-mail: e-mail: ibclicensingcenter.healthcare@siemens.com
n The new license.dat text file must then be imported from the CD memory-stick to the
system. The old license.dat system text file is moved into the History folder. See:
( Select New License File / Page 63)
n Following the license import, “Configuration > System System config” must be selec‐
ted. By selecting AutoLic in the “Action Bar”, all options for which there are valid licen‐
ses are automatically set to Yes. It must then be saved with Save.
n If the “System config” is exited, “Config Check” starts automatically. If due to the new
licenses it is necessary to download the corresponding Config data and/or software to
the components, an appropriate “Component Error” will always appear.
In this case, click on AutoConf in the “Action Bar” in the “Config Check” menu. All re‐
quired components will then be configured automatically. As an alternative, each
component can also be selected manually under “Artis Components” and configured.
If the “Config Check” menu is exited, “Version Check” starts automatically once the
Next has been clicked on to display a conflict for the components that still require a
SW download.
If an optional HW component that requires a SW download has been installed, the
“SW-Download” may be performed only after making the change in the system config‐

05.19
62 6 Service
uration. Then start Config Check again and download the Config data in the compo‐
nents that have been made ready using AutoConf.
All changes made automatically must be accepted with OK and saved with Save.
 Repeat the “Config Check” as often as necessary and take appropriate corrective meas‐
ures until no more error messages appear!
6.6.2 General Settings

Click on General Settings in the licensing screen.
Fig. 29: Configuration, Service, Licensing, General Settings
The following Checkboxes are selectable:

1. Use Local License File
With AXIS Smart, always mark this check box!
2. Use Central License Server
Do not mark this check box because this function is not used with AXIS Smart.

05.19
Service 6 63
6.6.3 Select New License File
 The licenses for Artis one systems (VA10 SW) are shipped from SCM on CD media only.
Click on Select New License File in the licensing screen.

Fig. 30: Licensing, selecting the new license file
Choose one of the two radio buttons for either uploading and using a new license.dat file
from an external media or using an already loaded License File from the “History” folder.
License File to be set
n Browse to select the License File
a) Insert the CD/DVD which contains the license.dat file into the DVD Drive (R:) or
insert the USB stick which contains the license.dat file into the USB socket (F:) of
the AXIS-Smart Image System computer.
b) Click on Browse.
 e.g. the following “Choose File to Upload” window will appear:

05.19
64 6 Service
Fig. 31: Selecting the file to upload
In this example, the license.dat file is located under “Public (F:)” (USB stick).
 The Logical Drives R: or F: only appear under “Computer”, if a medium is inserted!
c) Depending on the medium used, browse either on the path of Logical Drive R: or
F: for the license.dat file.
d) Follow the software dialog/s, if required.
e) Select the desired license.dat file. Example:
R:\AX_xxx_14028_29Jul2002_0829_license.dat
f) Download (copy) the new license.dat file to the system as the active license.dat
file.
The old license.dat file will be copied automatically to the History Folder.
g) Select Save in the “Action Bar” to save the values that were entered.
h) Acknowledge the message “...successfully saved” with OK
i) Select Finish in the “Action Bar”.
j) Config Check will be started automatically. Click on autoconfig to remove discrep‐
ancies.
If a storage option has been added/removed, the formatting of the Image System
Solid State Disks will start.
All stored images will be lost. Follow the SW dialog.

05.19
Service 6 65
k) Remove the medium from either the DVD drive or the USB socket of the AXIS-
Smart Image System computer.
In the case of the USB stick, eject the medium under (F:) using the software (icon
in User Interface) before removing it from the USB socket.
l) Click on Home to leave the configuration.
m) If a reboot (“medcom pending” message) is requested, confirm by clicking on re‐
boot now.
n Select the License File from History
Select (highlight) the old license.dat file in the drop-down window.
a) Select Save in the “Action Bar” to save the values that were entered.
b) Acknowledge the message “...successfully saved” with OK
c) Select Finish in the “Action Bar”.
6.6.4 License Details

Click on License Details in the licensing screen.
Fig. 32: Configuration, Service, Licensing, Licensing Details
The following displays (no changes!) are possible:

n Available Features
The existing options and their status are displayed in this window.

05.19
66 6 Service
n Feature Details
Click on (highlight) the desired feature (license). The details of these features are dis‐
played in this window.
6.6.5 Licenses with the Artis one VA10 SW

The licenses listed here reflect the status when this document was prepared and is only
for information and overview purposes. It is subject to change at any time. Please verify
with the current updated list in the Sales Catalog (SFP) and/or in CENSUS (Licensing Cen‐
ter).
Tab. 3 Licenses available with the Artis one VA10 SW
License Syntax Function/Remark

3D_ACqu_Artis 3D Acquisition
3D Acquisition (Trial)
3D_COROSCAN 3D Coroscan, also called 3D HeartSweep Ac‐
quisition.
3D Coroscan, also called 3D HeartSweep Ac‐
quisition (Trial)
ARTIS_QUANT_QCA2D_BIFURC Quant QCA 2D with bifurcation
Quant QCA 2D with bifurcation (Trial)
ARTIS_QUANT_QCA3D Quant QCA 3D, also called Artis IZ 3D
Quant QCA 3D, also called Artis IZ 3D (Trial)
AUTOMAP Automap Module
Automap (Trial)
AX_IAE_CARD_DYNACT AX Integrated Angio Workstation Evaluation
(IAE), a function of CARD_DYNACT
AX Integrated Angio Workstation Evaluation
(IAE), a function of CARD_DYNACT (Trial)
AX_IAE_RECO_DYNA3D AX Integrated Angio Workstation Evaluation
(IAE), a function of RECO_DYNA3D (Dyna
3D Reconstruction ).
(IAE), a function of RECO_DYNA3D (Dyna
3D Reconstruction) (Trial)
AX_IAE_4D_VIEWER AX Integrated Angio Workstation Evaluation
(IAE), a function of 3D_VIEWER
(IAE), a function of 3D_VIEWER (Trial)

05.19
Service 6 67

AX_IAE_LA_SEG AX Integrated Angio Workstation Evaluation
(IAE), a function of LA_SEG (LA Segmenta‐
tion)
(IAE), a function of LA_SEG (LA Segmenta‐
tion) (Trial)
AX_IAE_3D_SEG AX Integrated Angio Workstation Evaluation
(IAE), a function of 3D_SEG (3D Segmenta‐
tion)
(IAE), a function of 3D_SEG (3D Segmenta‐
tion - Trial)
CARD_ACQ Card Acquisition Module
Card Acquisition Module (Trial)
CDR_ARCHIVE CD-R Archiving Module
CLEAR_STENT_LIVE Clear Stent Live Module
CLEARstent Live (Trial)
DICOM_AC_00 DICOM Attribute Configurator
( DAC Version VA40 for WIN 7 Sys‐
tems / AX00-000.816.02)
DICOM_QUERY_RETR DICOM Query/Retrieve
DICOM_STORAGE DICOM Storage
DR DR Module
DR Module (Trial)
DR_STEPPING DR Stepping
DR Stepping (Trial)
DSA_ACQ DSA Acquisition Module
DSA Recording Module (Trial)
ECG_GATED_FLUORO ECG-gated Fluoro Module
ECG-gated Fluoro Module (Trial)
ECG_RECORDING ECG Recording Module
FILM_PAPER_PRINTER PS Printer
FILM_VSF DICOM Print

05.19
68 6 Service

FLUORO_LOOP Fluoro Loop Module
Fluoro Loop (Trial)
GENERATOR_LIMITATION_800_MA Reduction of X-ray generator power to max.
800 mA for sites with poor supply power line
(line resistance too high)
For China only.
GET_WORKLIST DICOM Worklist
DICOM Worklist (Trial)
HIGH_SPEED_ACQ High Speed Acq. 30 fps Module
Rapid Recording Module (Trial)
IC_STENT IC Stent The new name is CLEARstent
IC Stent The new name is CLEARstent (Trial)
LV Analysis (Trial))
MPPS_SUPPORT MPPS Support Module
MPPS Support (Trial)
MR_SUPPORT_i MR Support i Module also called
“Remote Assistance”. Performed by using
Remote Desktop SW.
NEWCOR_IF SENSIS Integration Module
PERIVISION Perivision
Perivision (Trial)
QUANT_QCA Quant QCA
Quant QCA (Trial)
QUANT_QVA Quant QVA Vessel Analysis
Vessel Analysis (Trial))
SCENEREC Scene Recording Module, also called AXIS
Smart Vid/Rec Option.
SECURITY_PRIVACY_BASIC syngo Security / HIPPA
STORAGE_EXT_3 Storage Extension 3

05.19
Service 6 69

STORAGE_EXT_4 Storage Extension 4
SYNGO_GENERAL_LICENSE syngo General License
6.6.6 Trial License (Demo License)

Trial Licenses (= Demo Licenses) can be installed on the system as a temporary license for
an option.
Expiration of the Trial License/s:
n The “Expire Date” of the Trial/Demo License can be viewed under Licensing Details in
the“Expire Date” box for the corresponding “Feature”:
Fig. 33: Expired Trial License
n If the “Error -10” is displayed for a feature under “Status”, this means that this fea‐
ture is either an expired license or an expired Trial (Demo) license.
- If the expired feature is still needed, the particular license must be renewed, i.e.,
must be purchased by the customer.
Then the new license.dat file must be imported under Select New License File.
( Select New License File / Page 63)
- If the expired Feature is no longer required, then set this option to “No” in the “Sys‐
tem Config” and save the change.

05.19
70 7 DICOM
7.1 General
Here, the application AETs of the local system and the general timeout settings for all
DICOM processes are defined.
7.1.1 Local AETs

As a default, there are the 3 AETs HIS / RIS, Study Transfer and Print available for the 3
different Windows services (processes) that are running.
The 4th AET Select HIS/RIS Local AET is optional.
 The default AET name is the computer name. Changing the computer name could also
change the AETs. A pop-up window lets you select that the AET also is changed.
Fig. 34: DICOM Local Application Entity Titles / patient match
n Local application entity titles

AET rules & syntax must be observed! ( Rules & Syntax for Application Entity Title
(AET) / Page 370)
Configure the AETs as required:

- HIS /RIS (SCU)
- Study Transfer (SCP + SCU)
The port number of the Study Transfer Provider (SCP) is 104. The port numbers of
 the HIS/RIS and PRINT SCUs are not relevant because they change with each associa‐
tion and are not required for configuration.
- Print (SCU)

05.19
DICOM 7 71
- Select HIS/RIS Local AET

This is a configuration that was brought into syngo by CT for the multi-modality use
case (PET CT).
When defining and entering additional HIS/RIS AE titles here, one of them can be
selected for use in the HIS / RIS User Configuration in the Artis one Configuration
Panel (Options -> Configuration -> Patient Registration). ( Patient Registra‐
tion / Page 336)
Usually there is no need to enter additional AE titles for AX systems!
- Local IPv4 Address
The local address of the DICOM network must be selected here from the drop-down
list. This is required to enable receipt of images.
If this parameter is not set, DICOM communication is coupled to any of the network
adapters (DICOM, AXCS, Netlink). In this case DICOM Send works, but no images
can be received.
n Patient Match
- Enable case Sensitive
If this is selected, patient names will be checked case-sensitively during import.
If importing patients, e.g. JOHN DOE and John Doe from the HIS/RIS work list, there
will be two different patients in the local database of our system.
Always checkmark this check box to enable this function!

This will prevent the same patient (exact identical spelling) from being listed twice for
 two procedures in the scheduler.
If a patient has two procedures scheduled, the patient name is listed in the scheduler
only once with two sub-folders.
- Match Patient Name based on First and Last name

If this configuration is selected, additional components, e.g. (middle, prefix, suffix),
will be ignored for comparison. Default: “not selected”.

05.19
72 7 DICOM
7.1.2 General DICOM Settings

Configure “General DICOM Settings” as required:
1. Use > to advance to this page:
Fig. 35: General DICOM settings
2. Simultaneous DICOM associations:

Range 1.....10. Default: 10
3. maximum PDU size:
Possible values: 4096, 8192, 16384, 28672, 32768, 65536, 131072, 262144,
524288, 528378, 1048756. Default: 528378
4. timeout values
- accepting/rejecting association request: Default: 60 sec.
- association open request: Default: 60 sec.
- association close request: Default: 60 sec.
- accepting a message over network: Default: 60 sec.
- waiting for data between TCP/IP packets: Default: 60 sec.
- response from remote node for storage/query/retrieve: Default: 600 sec.
- accept network connect: Default: 60 sec.

05.19
DICOM 7 73
5. implicit raw data transfer

The "implicit raw data transfer" setting is no longer relevant. The Artis one does not
generate non-image objects.
Default: Checkbox not checked. Do not change the default!
The exam protocol is stored as a DICOM structured report and can be configured here:
( Configure Exam Protocol Transfer / Page 238).
6. Enable Export/Send in Implicit Little Endian syntax
Default: Checkbox not checked

05.19
74 7 DICOM
7.2 Character set

Fig. 36: DICOM default character set
Configure as required.
1. DICOM default character set
The “DICOM default character set” that is used when a new patient is registered is
configured here.
- Select “Latin Alphabet No1” (= ISO_IR 100) from the drop-down list.
These settings should be changed only if unavoidable (e.g. for HIS/RIS/CIS).
Available choices: “Default Repertoire”, “Latin Alphabet No. 1”, “Japanese, Ka‐
takana”, “Unicode” and “Chinese”
- Check the Allow character set extension (= Multiple Character Sets) check box
only for the Japanese character set configuration.

05.19
DICOM 7 75
Only if Sensis is connected to Artis one:
 Make sure that Sensis and Artis one both have the same character set “Latin Alphabet
No1” configured and that the “Allow character set extension” check box is not checked/
marked for both.
Character Set, exceptional settings:

If e.g. the character set for HIS/RIS/CIS does not match the one used in AXIS and this cau‐
 ses problems, first an attempt should be made to change the HIS/RIS/CIS system appro‐
priately. If this is not possible, or is not permitted, or involves too many modalities, the
DICOM default character set in the AXIS can be changed. Following changes, check the
AXIS and the HIS/RIS/CIS network for proper functionality.
2. DICOM Query
- Check the Rearrange Character set check box.
When this check box is enabled, an incorrect character set is corrected.
Factory Default: “Checkbox not checked”
If the Rearrange Character Set check box is checked, multiple character sets can be
used. This is especially useful for the Japanese character set. In this case, a single byte
set is added to the Japanese character set. This single byte is necessary in DICOM to re‐
 place defined ASCII characters / strings (e.g. “M” for male for the patient´s sex). Accord‐
ing to DICOM, a “Single Byte” must always be at the beginning. If a multi-Byte is at the
beginning of the character set, this can be corrected by selecting Rearrange Character
Set.

05.19
76 7 DICOM
7.3 Structured Reports

This is a configuration interface that is provided to allow a certain viewing application to
be assigned to a certain structured report type, e.g. of another vendor.
At the present time, this feature is not utilized; this means it is not used with AX sys‐
tems!
The AxSRViewer is configured as the default for display of the exam protocol. Other SRs
are not supported. The CSE should not change anything here!
Make changes only if requested explicitly by the factory:
Fig. 37: DICOM, Structured Reports

05.19
DICOM 7 77
7.4 Offline Devices

The DICOM archive devices on the local host with archive targets (e.g. CD_RW) are config‐
ured here.
Configure “Offline Devices” as required:
1. Start the Offline Devices configuration.
 The Offline Device screen appears:
Fig. 38: Offline Device Menu
 The system’s available media storage devices are automatically detected by

syngo and shown in the device table with the assigned drive letter.
- With a retrofit or replacement of a drive:
The available media storage devices of the system are automatically detected by
syngo and shown in the device table with the assigned drive letter (e.g. “R:\” for
default“CD/DVD Combo”). See: ( DVD Drive / AXA6-000.841.03)
2. Select by clicking on the particular device that has to be configured.
3. Assign the proper device type:
Due to the limitations of the operating system, the system is able to detect only
“CD/DVD Combo” devices. As a result, these devices are recognized and combo boxes

05.19
78 7 DICOM
for changing the device type are not displayed. All other devices have to be assigned
manually to the proper device type, see the screen shot:
Fig. 39: Offline Devices Type
- CD/DVD Combo
Select for combined CD and DVD burners
- CD-R
Select for CD burners only
- CD/DVD-ROM
Select only for CD and DVD readers without the write capability
- MOD Optical Disk
Select if the device is a MOD. This is not used with the AX Modality!
Please be aware that syngo may not be able to distinguish between CD-ROM and CD-RW.
 Insert a CD to verify that you configured the correct drive letter for the corresponding
drive!
4. Performing the special syngo Device Settings

a) Used by syngo with logical name
Enables the device to be used in syngo. If enabled, an unique logical name has to
be assigned (enter a free text).
b) Export Device (available in Transfer menu)
Defines whether the device is to be used as an export device by syngo.
 Only CD-R and CD/DVD Combo devices can be used as export devices.
c) Archive Device (available in Transfer menu)

This check box is available, depending on the system type (modality). It defines
whether the device is to be used as the archive device.
 Only one CD-R or CD/DVD Combo drive can be defined as the archive device.

05.19
DICOM 7 79
d) Default Device
Defines whether the device is to be used as the default device. Only one device
can be defined per system. The defined device is marked as default in the device
table with an icon in the last column (DefArch).
 CD-R drives cannot be used as the default device.
e) Recording Speed
The recording speed of the selected device can be configured at “half speed” or
“maximum” (full) speed
5. Once the configuration of a CD-RW drives is concluded here under “Offline Devices”,
perform “Utilities > Source Tune CD Burning for the drive/s” in the “Service Home
menu”. Only then can the drive/s be used!
6. If a Sensis is connected to Artis one:
If different character sets are configured in Artis one and Sensis, there will be prob‐
lems when burning the patients registered from Sensis for archiving on CD-R/DVD-R
on Artis one.
- Make sure that the same character set is configured in both the Sensis and Artis
one, e.g. “Latin Alphabet No1”.
- Make sure that the “Allow character set extension” check box is not checked/
marked in both the Sensis and Artis one.
Exception:
Select the Allow character set extension (= Multiple Character Sets) check box
only if the Japanese character set is configured.

05.19
80 7 DICOM
7.5 Network Nodes

Definition of DICOM nodes for storage (send and receive) and Query/Retrieve.
Here, the DICOM transfer destinations (Remote Hosts), e.g. archiving devices that are
connected via the network to the Artis one system are defined and configured. (e.g.
Acom.net, (X-)Leonardo).
The image transfer or Query/Retrieve targets entered can be selected in the transfer/send
to..... menu of the Viewer or Patient Browser.
The configuration is comprised of 2 steps and must be performed completely according
to the sequence and saved.
 If a page is selected, it can take several seconds before the entered network nodes ap‐
pear. Do not make any entries during this time!
Absolutely observe the following remarks:

n Configuration of the Remote Hosts must be performed in cooperation with the hospi‐
tal network administrator!
n The following data are required before starting the Network Nodes configuration:
- Hostname and TCP/IP address of the remote host
- Application Entity Title (AET) and port number of the corresponding DICOM process‐
es (e.g. DICOM storage, query or receive) on the remote host.
- Transfer syntax (JPEG, Explicit Big Indian, ...)
- Which DICOM service is used and in which direction (SCU, SCP)
- The remote systems usually need to be configured as well. It is recommended that
the service engineer from the other vendor be on-site at the same time.
n DICOM printers and the Radiology Information System (RIS) are not configured here!
- Configure Print Devices (hardcopy) under ( Print Devices / Page 93).
- Configure HIS/RIS/CIS under ( HIS/RIS Nodes / Page 116).
7.5.1 TCP/IP and Hostname settings of DICOM Network Nodes


05.19
DICOM 7 81
Fig. 40: DICOM Network Node, Host
 The IP address 192.168.171.131 is used for internal communication between the IVS
and IAS. Do not use this address as the DICOM IP address.
Fig. 41: Host Properties with the new IPV6 enabled
1 2
(1) New TCP/IPV6 IP address (if enabled)

(2) Testing the new TCP/IPV6 IP address

05.19
82 7 DICOM
To enable the new IPV6 IP address range as well as the work-around when performing
 “Test” and when the Host is not alive..... message window appears, see:
( IPv6 / Page 38).
Important Info:
n Even if the customer has no network node available, at least one dummy node must
be configured and saved in this mask.
Enter the name of the network node (e.g. acomserv in the Host Name box. If no net‐

n
work node has been defined yet, this entry will be automatically used as the first de‐
fault node.
n If a transfer target is to be removed, delete only the referring node entries in step
2 (next) mask! (Do not delete it here in the step 1 mask without deleting it in the
step 2 mask first, otherwise the SW must be reloaded!)
Select Host
n Choose one of the existing Network Node hosts offered by the drop-down menu or
select “define new” from the drop-down menu to add a new host to the list.
n If “define new” was selected, the new host must be set up here under “Host Proper‐
ties” and in the next menu page Network Nodes, Step 2.
Host Properties
n Host Name
The previously chosen host name is shown here.
If define new was chosen, enter the host name of the host to be added here and click
on Find to resolve the host name and to obtain its TCP/IP addresss.
Host name rules & syntax must be observed! ( Rules & Syntax for Host Name of
DICOM Remote Node / Page 370)
n TCP/IP address
The TCP/IP address of the previously chosen host is shown here.
If define new was chosen, enter the TCP/IP address of the new host here if the host
name of the new host is unknown or cannot be resolved.
With an TCP/IPV6 system, no TCP/IP address is shown or entered here. Click on Test to
resolve the entered IP address and to obtain the host name.
n TCP/IPV6 address (required only for IPV6 systems)
The TCP/IPV6 address of the previously chosen host is shown here.
If define new was chosen, enter the TCP/IPV6 address of the new host here if the host
With an TCP/IP system, no TCP/IPV6 address shown or entered here. Click on Test to
connected by
n LAN
Always select LAN.

05.19
DICOM 7 83
n RAS
Do not use RAS. RAS (for modem) is not released!
Leaving this screen:
1. If changes have been made on this menu page, click on Save.
Acknowledge the message “...successfully saved” with OK
2. Click on Finish to leave the Network Node configuration here in Step 1 or click on > to
advance to the Network Node configuration Step 2 page.
7.5.2 DICOM Settings for DICOM Network Nodes

Tab. 4 Network Node, several Remote Host settings, examples
Parameters: Port 104 Default node Query (patient root,

Storage study root, patient/
study only)
Implicit Little Indian,
Explicit Little Indian, Retrieve
Explicit Big Indian
JPEG Lossy
JPEG Lossless
Remote Host:
ACOM.net selected first default... not selected
DICOM Converter selected first default... not selected
Sensis selected first default... selected
Use > to advance to page step 2:

05.19
84 7 DICOM
Fig. 42: Network Nodes, Step 2
Configure “DICOM Settings for DICOM Network Nodes” as required:

1. General Nodes Properties General Node Properties (DICOM)
- Logical Name
This is the name which is shown to the user in the Application SW for selecting a
network node.
Logical name rules & syntax must be observed! ( Rules & Syntax for Logical
Name / Page 370) If the “Rules for the Logical Name” are not observed, errors can
occur during Backup/Restore.
- Edit Name
Create or update a logical name for the DICOM network node.
-Host
Select the host name (computer name) of the DICOM network node. To add an en‐
try to the list, see ( TCP/IP and Hostname settings of DICOM Network No‐
des / Page 80).
2. Application Entity Properties
- AE Title
A list is shown of existing AE titles and a define new selection.

05.19
DICOM 7 85
- Edit AE title
With define new selected in AE title, enter the AE title for the new device.
AET rules & syntax must be observed! ( Rules & Syntax for Application Entity
Title (AET) / Page 370)
The Add button is shown only when define new is selected in AE title. When an
existing AE title is selected in AE title, the button is shown as Del (delete) and de‐
letes the selected AE title and the parameters listed below it.
- Port Number
With define new selected in AE title, enter the port number for the DICOM device.
Many systems based on syngo use Port 104.
Use the Verification button to test for basic DICOM connectivity. A C-ECHO is sent
using the Host (TCP/IP address), AE title and Port Number.
- Supports Enhanced Data
Default: Not checked
This check box must remain unchecked. Enhanced XA data is not yet utilized.
- Set modality to CT for XR3D Angio
This check box must remain unchecked. CT for XR3D Angio data is not yet utilized.
- Supports Presentation State
This check box must remain unchecked. Support of Presentation State is not yet
utilized.
- Hide Node
The Hide Node is used when nodes are sending only to the Artis one system, but
should not appear in the UI. This is used so that images are accepted from the re‐
mote node.
3. Selected Internet Protocol
Select if either the old IPv4 or the new IPv6 Internet Protocol is used for this network
node.
4. Supported DICOM services
For a description, see the section: ( Supported DICOM Services / Page 85)
7.5.2.1 Supported DICOM Services

Select the checkboxes for the DICOM services supported by this DICOM node.

05.19
86 7 DICOM
Fig. 43: Supported DICOM services
Storage
When this DICOM service, SCP (Storage Class Provider) is selected, parameters are shown
for configuration.

05.19
DICOM 7 87
n Transfer Syntax
Default: All selected
- Implicit Little Endian
Implicit (without) value representation (string, integer, date, etc.)
Little Endian is a synonym for sending the least significant bit first (byte swap)
This configuration item only effects the Transfer Syntaxes proposed for use in send‐
ing images to the selected DICOM node. It has no effect on image quality.
Examine the DICOM Conformance Statement of the DICOM node for supported
transfer syntaxes.
Implicit Little Endian cannot be deselected.
- Explicit Little Endian:
Explicit (with) value representation (string, integer, date, etc.)
Little Endian is a synonym for sending the least significant bit first (byte swap)
Explicit Little Endian can be deselected.
 Do not deselect Explicit Little Indian when JPEG Lossy is selected.
- Explicit Big Endian:

Explicit (with) value representation (string, integer, date, etc.)
Big Endian is a synonym for sending the most significant bit first (byte swap)
Explicit Big Endian can be deselected.
How to select/deselect transfer syntaxes from the selection box:

Move the mouse pointer onto “Explicit Little Endian” and select/deselect it by simultane‐
 ously pressing the keyboard CTRL key and the left mouse button.
Move the mouse pointer onto “Explicit Big Endian” and select/deselect it by simultane‐
ously pressing the keyboard CTRL key and the left mouse button.
n Compression
Default: All selected
- JPEG Lossy
- JPEG Lossless
The types of compression enabled here can be selected in the User UI, Options “Artis
one Configuration Panel” under the “Transfer” icon. ( Transfer (Artis one - Configu‐
ration Panel) / Page 331)
by the customer to configure the compression type for image data transmission to the
network.
Examine the DICOM Conformance Statement of the DICOM node for supported Com‐
pression types.
Standard compression type is “JPEG Lossless”.
If the Artis one is integrated into a network (e.g. ACOM.net), both JPEG Lossless and
JPEG Lossy are enabled. Reason: “JPEG Lossy” is also used for special applications here

05.19
88 7 DICOM
(e.g. use of the AXIS CD-ROM drive to transfer ultrasound images over the ACOM.net,
etc.).
Archiving/Auto Archiving to the Network (e.g. ACOM.Net):

- “JPEG Lossy” and “JPEG Lossless” are enabled under “Compression”, e.g., they can be se‐
lected in the User UI (Artis one Configuration Panel) under “Transfer” ( Transfer (Artis
one - Configuration Panel) / Page 331)
- To archive or auto archive from AXIS to ACOM.Net, normally “JPEG Lossless” is used.
 - Important: Prior to beginning each image data transfer, the customer must make abso‐
lutely sure that the correct compression mode is selected.
- Important for Auto Archiving: If, for example, after completing a “JPEG Lossy” data
transfer (special case!), a reset to “JPEG Lossless” is not made, all new scenes that are
subsequently made will be archived in the ACOM.Net with a compression that is not
wanted. This can lead to problems.
- To avoid operating errors: Do not enable “JPEG Lossy” unless the customer requires it!
How to select/deselect compression syntaxes from the selection box:

Move the mouse pointer onto “JPEG Lossy” and select/deselect it by simultaneously
 pressing the keyboard CTRL key and the left mouse button.
Move the mouse pointer onto “JPEG Lossless” and select/deselect it by simultaneously
pressing the keyboard CTRL key and the left mouse button.
n Default Node
Default: Not default node
- not default node
- first default node
One node can be tagged as the Default Node. The First Default will be displayed sepa‐
rately in the menu "Transfer Send to ..." (outside the drop-down). It also will be dis‐
played as an icon in the tool bar of the Patient Browser to enable one-click transfer. In
addition, the first Default node will be assigned to the "Send" key on the numeric key‐
board ("+" key on a standard keyboard).
n Preference Node
Do not check for AX systems. There is no function in AX systems.
n Archive Node
By selecting this check box, the status a (=archived) is set in the Browser of the cus‐
tomer UI when sending to this node. By default, the status s (=sent) is set.
n Default Archive
By selecting this check box, the DICOM node is set as the archive device in the cus‐
tomer UI.

05.19
DICOM 7 89
n Graphics in pixel data

Selecting this checkbox, the DICOM overlay is masked (encoded) in the “unused bits”
of the pixel data. Only for uncompressed transfer syntaxes. The DICOM overly is not
encoded in the attribute (60xx,3000) Overlay Data.
It is recommended that the default not be changed. Change only when instructed by
the manufacturer to do so (e.g. for a very special network layout).
n Send using multiple associations (Prefered for Syngo nodes)
Selecting this checkbox, Transfer jobs will be splitted in multiple Dicom Associations.
For AX Multi Frames not recomended.
n RGB to Monochrome
This parameter controls how RGB color images are sent.
Default: No RGB conversion
- No RGB conversion
All images with photometric information (RGB) are sent without color conversion
- Convert RGB Color images
If certain ultrasound-specific DICOM attributes are recognized, but no color data are
present, the image is converted from 3x8 bit RGB to 8-bit gray scale value and cer‐
tain attributes are changed before sending. In addition, all private attributes are re‐
moved.
- Convert Ultrasound Non-Color Data
If certain ultrasound-specific DICOM attributes are recognized, the image is conver‐
ted from 3x8 bit RGB to an 8-bit gray scale value and certain attributes are changed
before sending. In addition, all private attributes are removed.
n uses Storage Commitment (SC)
- select SC node
The parameters are available only if the Supported DICOM services > Storage
Commitment check box is selected (checkmark).
The selected SC node is the Storage Commitment Provider when sending to the DI‐
COM node. This selection corresponds to the “select SC AET” parameter.
Default: current node
- current node
- <previously configured SC DICOM node>
- not used
The SC DICOM node is not used.

05.19
90 7 DICOM
- select SC AET
The AET associated with the node selected in the “select SC node” parameter is se‐
lected here.
Examine the DICOM Conformance Statement of the DICOM node for the supported
DICOM Storage Commitment
Default: current aet
- current aet
- <previously configured SC AET>
- not used
SC AET is not used.
- SC Result in same association
By selecting this check box, the Storage Commitment association stays open until a
Storage Commitment N-EVENT-REPORT is received from the Storage Commitment
provider or the “SC Result Timeout” is exceeded.
It should stay unchecked unless the engineer from PACS requests something else
(most vendors do this in a separate association)
- SC results timeout
This is the maximum time the Storage Commitment will wait for a response. If no
response is received within the configured time, the job is set to the failed status.
Default: 1 [h] 0 [min]
Examine the DICOM Conformance Statement of the DICOM node for supported DI‐
COM Storage Commitment
Value Ranges: 0 - 168 [h] and 0 - 59 [min]

05.19
DICOM 7 91
n Conversions
Convert Structured Reports to Secondary Capture
Selecting this checkbox, DICOM Structured Reports are converted to DICOM Secondary
Capture when sending to this DICOM node.
Examine the DICOM Conformance Statement of the DICOM node for support of DI‐
COM Structured Reports and DICOM Secondary Capture.
This configuration has no affect on the Dose SR (Exam Protocol). Conversion needs to be

configured in Exam Protocol Transfer Settings.
Structured Reports from Quant will be converted to Secondary Capture, but are not as
viewable images.
Storage Commitment
Selecting this DICOM service enables the Storage Commitment parameters under the DI‐
COM Storage service selection (select SC node, select SC AET, SC Results in same asso‐
ciation, and SC results timeout)
Query
Selecting this checkbox, the DICOM Query Model is shown for configuration. The AET will
be a DICOM Query Provider. The logical name is shown in the Customer UI for “Patient -
Search”
Artis one DICOM Conformance Statement recommends use of the Study Root model
when supported by the DICOM node.
Examine the DICOM Conformance Statement of the DICOM node for supported DICOM
Query Models
n provides DICOM Query Model
Default: patient root
Select: study root.
- patient root
Problem: With the first request, no elements in the study level can be requested.
- study root
Select it as long as there are no other requests/instructions from the IT department
of the hospital.
Currently, all PACS systems support study root.
- patient/study only

05.19
92 7 DICOM
n Default Node
The "Default Node“ is selected when the Q/R UI (Patient Search) is opened. (Q/R =
Query/Retrieve)
n Spanning Node
“Spanning Node“ means that Query (C-Find) and Import (C-Move) are performed by
different DICOM nodes. The DICOM target for the C-Move is extracted from the an‐
swers of the C-Find.
Retrieve
Selecting this DICOM service automatically selects the Query DICOM service.
Configure the correct DICOM Query Model.
Leaving this Screen

2. Click on Finish to leave Network Node configuration here in Step 2 or click on < to go
back to the Network Node configuration Step 1 page.

05.19
DICOM 7 93
7.6 Print Devices

DICOM Print Device
A “DICOM Print Device” is a hardcopy camera (also called DICOM camera or DICOM print‐
er) that supports DICOM Basic Print. The expression “DICOM camera” is used in this docu‐
ment.
Non-DICOM Cameras/Printers
- A Postscript Paper Printer is not a DICOM printer.
- A hardcopy camera connected by cable using the SPDI/SPCI standard, is not a DICOM
camera. syngo, as well as the Artis one hardware, do not support SPDI/SPCI.
The following must be observed:
n Configuration of the hardcopy must be performed in cooperation with a technician
from the camera manufacturer as well as with the hospital network administrator!
n The following data are needed before starting the Print Devices configuration:
- Hostname and TCP/IP address of the remote hardcopy device.
- AET and port number of DICOM print service on the remote host.
- Hardcopy manufacturer type, desired LUT.
n Detailed information about the released hardcopy cameras, etc. can be found in:
( Hardcopy Camera Information, VA10 SW / AXA6-000.814.03)
n Configuration of the Lookup Tables (LUTs) absolutely must be checked. After con‐
figuring the hardcopy, it must be ensured that the correct LUTs are configured. ( LUT
Files / Page 105)
n Regardless of whether the DICOM Print Option is configured, the Filming Tabcard ap‐
pears only after a printer has been configured.
n The configuration is comprised of 3 steps and must be performed completely accord‐
ing to the sequence step 1, step 2, step 3 and saved.

05.19
94 7 DICOM
7.6.1 TCP/IP and Host Name Settings of DICOM Print Device (Camera) Nodes
Fig. 44: DICOM Print Devices, Host

05.19
DICOM 7 95
1 2

( IPv6 / Page 38).
Important Info:
 n If a Print Device target is to be removed, follow these instructions: ( Deleting a DI‐
COM Print Device / Page 101)
Select Host
n Choose one of the existing Print Devices hosts offered by the drop-down menu or se‐
lect “define new” from the drop-down menu to add a new host to the list.
ties” and in the next menu page Print Devices, Step 2.
Host Properties
n Host Name

05.19
96 7 DICOM
n TCP/IP address
connected by
n LAN
Always select LAN.
n RAS
2. Click on Finish to leave Print Devices configuration here in Step 1 or click on > to ad‐
vance to the Print Devices configuration Step 2 page.
7.6.2 DICOM Settings for DICOM Print Devices (Camera) Nodes


05.19
DICOM 7 97
Fig. 46: DICOM Print Devices menu, step 2
General Node Properties

n Logical Name
This is the name which is shown to the user in the Application SW to select a DICOM
Print Node.
It is used only as a link to the next menu (menu step 3). Select the logical name for
the DICOM camera.
n Edit Name
Create or update a logical name for the DICOM Print Node.
n Host
Select the host name (computer name) of the DICOM Print Node. To add an entry to
the list, see ( TCP/IP and Host Name Settings of DICOM Print Device (Camera) No‐
des / Page 94).
Application Entity Properties
n AE Title
The AETs which are already configured are shown in this pull-down menu. Select the
Application Entity Title for the DICOM camera or select define new to add a new one
under “edit AE Title”.

05.19
98 7 DICOM
n Edit AE Title
Edit an already existing Application Entity Title of the DICOM camera (provided by the
local camera service).
AET rules & syntax must be observed! ( Rules & Syntax for Application Entity Title
(AET) / Page 370)
The Add button is shown only when define new is selected in AE title. When an ex‐
isting AE title is selected in AE title, the button is shown as Del (delete) and deletes
the selected AE title and the parameters listed below it.
n Port Number
Use the Verification button to test for basic DICOM connectivity. A C-ECHO is sent us‐
ing the Host (TCP/IP address), AE title and Port Number.
Selected Internet Protocol
n Select if either the old IPv4 or the new IPv6 Internet Protocol is used for this DICOM
Print Node.
Supported DICOM Services
n Print
Place a checkmark in the check box to enable “Print”.
2. Click on Finish to leave DICOM Print Devices configuration here in Step 2 or click on >
to advance to the DICOM Print Devices configuration Step 3 page.
7.6.3 Camera Parameter Settings for DICOM Print Devices


05.19
DICOM 7 99
Fig. 47: DICOM Print Devices menu, step 3
Select HC device
n Either select the name of an existing HC device or select “define new” to add a new
one to the list.
HC Device
n Either edit the name of an existing HC device which is shown or “define new” was se‐
lected and a new name can be typed in the blank field.
n Default Camera
Mark the check box if this camera node is to be the default one shown to the user
with shortcut keyboard key. Only one camera can be the default.
General Settings
n Type
Always select DICOM printer. SPCI printer is not used with Artis one systems.
n Class
Select the DICOM Printer Model to be used from the drop-down ist.
n DICOM Node
Select one of the DICOM Print Node/s which are setup on the step 1 page.
n Location
If desired, type in the location of the Hardcopy, e.g. Department, Floor, Room, etc..
n Comment
If desired, type in some additional comment regarding this Hardcopy. Default: No
Comment

05.19
100 7 DICOM
Filming Properties
n Hold printed filmjobs
Range: 0.....10. Default: 10
n min Density [0.1]
Set the minimum density value for the film used. Default: 20 (= Density 2.0).
n Pixel Size [1/1000]: Do not change, unless otherwise noted. Default: 84.67 X 84.67
n Film Sheet Formats Portrait
Do not change, unless otherwise noted.
- Film Sheet Formats Portrait
Select one of the existing formats or “define new” to add a new format to the drop-
down list. Use “Add” to add a format to the drop-down list.
- Film Sheet Format
Edit an existing format or type in a new one.
- Number of Pixel [col.s, rows]
Edit the existing number of pixels columns and pixel rows or type in new ones.
n Film Sheet Formats Landscape
- Film Sheet Formats Landscape
Select one of the existing formats or “define new” to add a new format to the drop-
down list. Use “Add” to add a format to the drop-down list.
- Film Sheet Format
Edit an existing format or type in a new one.
- Number of Pixel [col.s, rows]
Edit the existing number of pixels columns and pixel rows or type in new ones.
n Medium type.
Enter the type of film used.
Choices: blue film, clear film, paper and mammo blue film. Default: blue film
n Film destination
Enter the destination to which the film has to be transported after exposure.
Choices: magazine and processor. Default: processor
n color appearance
Choices: Color 24 bit and higher, Grayscale 8 bit and higher, and Grayscale 12 bit
and higher. Default: Grayscale 8 bit.
n background
The background of the film outside the printed image can be chosen.
Choices: black and white. Default: black.

05.19
DICOM 7 101
n Transformation:
Choices: replicate, bilinear, cubic and no magnification. Default: no magnification
(it leaves the image as is).
2. Click on Finish to leave Print Devices configuration here in Step 3 or click on < to go
back to the Print Devices configuration Step 2 or Step 1 page.
7.6.4 Deleting a DICOM Print Device

Removal of an existing DICOM Print Device:
1. Delete the removed DICOM camera from the configuration settings:
Click on < to go back in the steps.
a) Start the print device setup deletion with the menu step 3.
b) Continue the print device setup deletion with the menu step 2.
c) Finally finish the print device setup deletion with the menu step 1.
d) Click on “Home” to leave the Configuration.
e) Reboot the system to make the changes valid.
If the deletion is performed in the incorrect sequence, the error message "Option
value warning: Invalid node could not be found" will be displayed. In
this case, it may be necessary to reload the SW (e.g. there are problems with backup /
restore).
Changing Parameters of an existing DICOM Print Device:
1. Delete the concerned already existing DICOM camera from the configuration set‐
tings:
Click on < to go back in the steps.
restore).
2. Enter the previously deleted DICOM camera again in the configuration settings:
Click on > to go forward in the steps.
a) Start the print device setup with menu step 1
b) Continue the print device setup with menu step 2
c) Finally finish the print device setup with menu step 3

05.19
102 7 DICOM


05.19
DICOM 7 103
7.7 HC Overview
7.7.1 Overview of the HC Settings

The HC Overview (Hardcopy Overview) menu displays the settings made previously under
Print Devices. ( Print Devices / Page 93) Usually there is no need for the field service
engineer to use this menu to change the settings, since the settings and tests can also be
performed in the “print device” menu. However, this screen provides a quick and easy
way to run DICOM Tests if performing DICOM troubleshooting.
Fig. 48: DICOM HC Overview menu
These menu items were described previously under DICOM Print Devices, page Step 3.
( Camera Parameter Settings for DICOM Print Devices / Page 98)
Select logical name
n Select one of the existing logical camera devices from the drop-down list.
Following menu items can be changed here:
n Name (= logical name of a camera already configured)
n Hold printed filmjobs ( = print job queue size, max.: 10)
n Default Camera
Checkmark the check box to make the selected camera the Default Camera.
Attention: Only one of the cameras can be the Default Camera!

05.19
104 7 DICOM
The following tests can be performed here for troubleshooting:

n “Network Access” Test of the camera host.
n “DICOM access” Test for checking the DICOM print service application entity access.
This test may fail if the tested camera allows only one association at a time.
2. Click on Finish to leave the HC Overview configuration.

05.19
DICOM 7 105
7.8 LUT Files

This menu allows importing, removing, and selecting LUT files for DICOM Basic Print.
General LUT File Information:
n The image data from the modality to the DICOM camera are converted / corrected by
the LUTs, at least once in the modality and once in the DICOM camera; the LUT must
be set on both sides.
n The LUT setting will be performed:
- For the modality Artis one: in this menu with different options
- For the DICOM camera: with a different mechanism, i.e.
- by LUT number or LUT name in the keypad or menu mode
- by a modality-specific file or default configuration file in the menu mode
n The LUT selection depends on:
- The modality Artis one: for each image per film sheet on the image type
- The DICOM camera: for each film sheet on a different mechanism, i.e.
- modality-independent (fixed LUT)
- depending on modality by the calling AET
- depending on the required port number
n Notes ( ):
Configuration of the LUT absolutely must be checked following the configuration of the
hardcopy ( Print Devices / Page 93). It must be ensured that the correct LUTs are config‐
 ured.
Configuration of the LUT files must be performed in cooperation with a technician from
the camera manufacturer!
The LUT settings (on both sides) and the HCC adjustment must be verified by a density
 measurement. For details, refer to the Installation and Startup of the hardcopy cameras.
( Hardcopy Camera Information, VA10 SW / AXA6-000.814.03)
 Only standard LUTs are implemented. No tool (e.g. LUT editor) is available for modifying
LUTs.
Additional LUTs are currently not required / not available. Therefore the Import/Remove
LUT menu can be skipped over.
 If additional LUT files are available, these files may be selected on the source drive and
copied to the corresponding LUT directories on the local system. Unnecessary LUT files
may be removed from LUT directories on the local system.

05.19
106 7 DICOM
 All screen shots related to LUT files show the syngo default setting. Modifications may
be required, they are part of the specific section.
7.8.1 Import/Remove LUT
Additional LUTs are currently not required / not available. Therefore the Import/Remove
LUT menu can be skipped over.
 If additional LUT files are available, these files may be selected on the source drive and
copied to the corresponding LUT directories on the local system. Unnecessary LUT files
may be removed from LUT directories on the local system.
1. Start the configuration. ( Starting/Closing the Configuration in Local Service

/ Page 355)
2. Procedure for making Changes: ( Doing changes in syngo SW Modules / Page 361)
3. Click on Configuration > DICOM LUTFiles.
Fig. 49: DICOM LUT Files menu, Step 1 (Import/Remove LUT)
4. Use Import LUT and/or Remove LUT as desired if some change have to be made here.

05.19
DICOM 7 107
6. Click on “Finish” to discontinue and exit this configuraton or click on “>“ in the “Action
Bar” to advance to the the menu of the page Step 2.
7.8.2 LUT Files settings

Click on > in the “Action Bar” to advance to the menu of the page Step 2.
 The menu for LUT File setting Correction LUT appears:

05.19
108 7 DICOM
Fig. 50: DICOM LUT Files menu, 2nd page (LUT file setting, correction LUT)

05.19
DICOM 7 109
n Notes ( ):
Without changes, the menu for LUT File Setting shows the syngo default for the Correc‐
tion LUT (setting not recommended).
 With the Correction LUT, the image impression on the printout is slightly different /
brighter than on the GSDF monitor (does not conform to DICOM Part 14).
With the Presentation LUT, the image impression on the printout and on the monitor
should be the same using the released settings and HCC data.
With the Presentation LUT / Barten Cameras setting, the modality uses the Presentation
 SOP class with the IDENTITY attribute, which must be supported by each connected cam‐
era.
Each change of the modality LUT method may require additional printer settings. A print‐
 er setting for the use of the Presentation LUT may overrule / reset other printer LUT set‐
tings for this modality.
For more details about dependencies, restrictions and settings, refer to Installation and
 Startup of the hardcopy cameras. ( Hardcopy Camera Information, VA10
SW / AXA6-000.814.03)
1. Select Presentation LUT ( Presentation LUT (= recommended) / Page 109) or Correc‐

tion LUT ( Correction LUT (= not recommended) / Page 112) and make the setting
changes as required.
Remarks:
- Observe all the Hints!
- With Presentation LUT selected:
With both sub-settings for the Presentation LUT, an additional image type LUT set‐
ting is neither required nor available ("nothing selected")
- With Correction LUT selected:
For the choice of the Correction LUT, the HCC LUT behavior of all connected HCCs
should be linear cameras (=LINEAR LUT) and the image type LUT settings are re‐
quired.
3. Click on Finish to leave LUT configuration here in Step 2 or click on < to go back to the
LUT configuration Step 1 page.
7.8.2.1 Presentation LUT (= recommended)

With the choice of Presentation LUT, the HCC LUT behavior of all connected cameras re‐
garding GSDF (Gray Scale Standard Display Function) / Presentation LUT should be
known:

05.19
110 7 DICOM
HCC LUT behavior with Presentation LUT selected

n All connected cameras are treated as either/or:
a) Linear Cameras
( = at least one HCC does not support / is not released for GSDF/Presentation LUT)
The GSDF will be performed in the modality instead in the DICOM camera. The image
data will be corrected by an internal modality Presentation LUT.
Each DICOM camera has to be set to LINEAR LUT.
b) Barten Cameras
(= all HCCs support GSDF / Presentation LUT as specified / released)
The GSDF will be performed in the DICOM camera. The image data will be corrected by
an internal camera Presentation LUT.
Each DICOM camera has to be set to GSDF
Click on > in the “Action Bar” to advance to the menu of the page Step 2.
 The menu for LUT File Setting (Default: Correction LUT) appears.
1. Change the radio button in the menu so that the Presentation LUT is checked.
 The Presentation LUT menu page appears:
Fig. 51: DICOM LUT Files menu, 2nd page (LUT file setting, presentation LUT)
2. Select either Linear cameras or Barten cameras, as required.

05.19
DICOM 7 111
3. Show only configurable image types

- Check box checked (= default):
The table shows only the “bold” marked “Image Type” settings in the “Standard
Presentation LUT Settings” table below.
- Check box not checked:
The screen shows all “Image Type” settings in the “Standard Presentation LUT
Settings” table below.
4. Verify the LUT and Density settings in the “Standard Presentation LUT Settings” ta‐
ble below.
Do not change them unless otherwise noted!
5. Interpolation for Printing
Make changes as required.
- Mode
Choices: Replicate, Bilinear (recommended) or Cubic
- Smoothing Type (concerns cubic modes only)
Choices: 0, 2, 3, 4. The smoothing type factor can be selected for the "cubic" mode
interpolation algorithm only.
Standard Presentation LUT Settings:
Tab. 5 Standard Presentation LUT Settings
Image Type LUT Max. Density

CRImage Nothing selected 3.00
CTImage Nothing selected 2.80
DXImage Nothing selected 3.00
USMultiFrameImage Nothing selected 2.40
MRImage Nothing selected 3.00
USImage Nothing selected 2.40
SCImage Nothing selected 3.00
SAOverlay Nothing selected 3.00
SACurve Nothing selected 3.00
XAImage Nothing selected 3.00
XRFImage Nothing selected 3.00
XABiPlaneImage Nothing selected 3.00
NMImage Nothing selected 3.00
DXMGImage Nothing selected 3.00
PetImage Nothing selected 3.00

05.19
112 7 DICOM
Overall maximum density 3.00
“LUT” / Nothing selected: Default setting if LUT is optional.
 The image data are not corrected, they stay unchanged (same effect as the Linear LUT
setting).

n If changes have been made on this menu page, click on Save.
n Click on Finish to leave Import/Export configuration here in Step 1 or click on > to ad‐
vance to the Import/Export configuration Step 2 page.
7.8.2.2 Correction LUT (= not recommended)
1. Click on > in the “Action Bar” to advance to the menu of the page Step 2.
 The menu for LUT File setting Correction LUT appears:

05.19
DICOM 7 113
Fig. 52: DICOM LUT Files menu, 2nd page (LUT file setting, correction LUT)
2. Show only configurable image types

- Check box checked (= default):
The table shows only the “bold” marked “Image Type” settings in the “Standard
Correction LUT Settings” table below.

05.19
114 7 DICOM
- Check box not checked:

The screen shows all “Image Type” settings in the “Standard Correction LUT Set‐
tings” table below.
3. Verify the LUT and Density settings in the “Standard Correction LUT Settings” table
below.
Do not change them unless otherwise noted!
4. Make changes for Interpolation for printing:
Make changes as required.
- Mode
Choices: Replicate, Bilinear (recommended) or Cubic
- Smoothing Type (concerns cubic modes only)
Choices: 0, 2, 3, 4. The smoothing type factor can be selected for the "cubic" mode
interpolation algorithm only.
Standard Correction LUT Settings:
Tab. 6 Standard Correction LUT Settings

CRImage cr 3.00
CTImage CTLUT 2.80
DXImage Linear 3.00
USMultiFrameImage USMultiFrameImage 2.40
MRImage MR1 3.00
USImage us 2.40
SCImage sc 3.00
SAOverlay SAOverlay 3.00
SACurve SACurve 3.00
XAImage xa 3.00
XRFImage xrf 3.00
XABiPlaneImage xabipl 3.00
NMImage NM 3.00
DXMGImage Linear 3.00
PetImage Linear 3.00
Overall maximum density: 3.00

05.19
DICOM 7 115
 Only the bold marked settings are relevant for this modality.
“LUT” / Linear: The image data will be corrected with a linear LUT, this means they stay
unchanged.
 This LUT setting can be used for the bold marked image types in special cases, e.g. test‐
ing. For details, refer to the Installation and Startup of the hardcopy cameras. ( Hard‐
copy Camera Information, VA10 SW / AXA6-000.814.03)

n If changes have been made on this menu page, click on Save.
n Click on Finish to leave Import/Export configuration here in Step 1 or click on > to ad‐
vance to the Import/Export configuration Step 2 page.

05.19
116 7 DICOM
7.9 HIS/RIS Nodes

Configuration of a Hospital Information System (HIS) or Radiology Information System
(RIS) that supports, e.g. DICOM Basic Worklist.
7.9.1 TCP/IP and Hostname settings of HIS/RIS nodes

Fig. 53: DICOM HIS / RIS nodes, Host

05.19
DICOM 7 117
1 2

The TCP/IPv6 address parameter field appears only if the ipv6 address range is configured
under: ( IPv6 / Page 38)
( IPv6 / Page 38).
Select Host
n Choose one of the existing DICOM HIS/RIS hosts offered by the drop-down menu or
select “define new” from the drop-down menu to add a new host to the list.
ties” and in the next menu page DICOM HIS/RIS Nodes, Step 2.
Host Properties
n Host Name

05.19
118 7 DICOM
n TCP/IP address
connected by
n LAN
Always select LAN.
n RAS
2. Click on Finish to leave HIS/RIS Node configuration here in Step 1 or click on > to ad‐
vance to the DICOM HIS/RIS Node configuration Step 2 page.
7.9.2 DICOM settings for HIS/RIS Nodes

Use > to advance to page Step 2:

05.19
DICOM 7 119
Fig. 55: DICOM HIS/RIS nodes, Step 2
It is possible to configure multiple work lists and MPPS nodes. The active one can be se‐

lected by the user in the user configuration (HIS/RIS Pat. Reg.).
This is for hospitals that need to pull the work list from different RIS systems, e.g. one for
Card and one for Angio.
Configure “DICOM settings for HIS/RIS Nodes” as required:

1. General Nodes Properties
- Logical Name
This is the name which is shown to the user in the Application SW for selecting a
network node.
- Edit Name
Create or update a logical name for the DICOM HIS/RIS Node.
- Host
Select the host name (computer name) of the DICOM HIS/RIS Node. To add an en‐
try to the list, see ( TCP/IP and Hostname settings of HIS/RIS nodes / Page 116).

05.19
120 7 DICOM
2. Application Entity Properties

- AE Title
A list is shown of existing AE titles and a define new selection.
Select the Application Entity Title for the DICOM camera or define a new one in the
“edit AE Title” box.
- Edit AE title
AET rules & syntax must be observed! ( Rules & Syntax for Application Entity
Title (AET) / Page 370)
The Add button is shown only when define new is selected in AE title. When an
existing AE title is selected in AE title, the button is shown as Del (delete) and de‐
letes the selected AE title and the parameters listed below it.
- Port Number
Use the Verification button to test for basic DICOM connectivity. A C-ECHO is sent
using the Host (TCP/IP address), AE title and Port Number.
3. Selected Internet Protocol
Select if either the old IPv4 or the new IPv6 Internet Protocol is used for this network
node.
4. Supported DICOM Services
Basic Worklist
Basic Worklist is the DICOM Service Modality Worklist and is used to retrieve patient
and study information from the Information System (e.g. RIS). It should be enabled!
- Query Waiting Time
Time to wait for the first response from the RIS system. Typically, RIS systems
make a database query and send the first response after all responses are availa‐
ble. For slow RIS systems, it may be possible that a merge read timeout occurs and
the value for Query Waiting Time must be increased.
- Max. Query Match Number
Maximum number of responses accepted. When more responses are received, a C-
CANCEL-FIND-RQ is sent to the RIS.
- Query Interval
Minutes between two automatic work list queries (broad query).
This defines only the interval.
 It is configured in the user settings (Options -> Configuration ->Patient Registration -

> HIS/RIS) whether or not automatic (background) query is performed.
- Automatic removal of canceled/rescheduled Requests

If checked: Outdated work list entries are automatically deleted when a new work
list is received. This also deletes patients already examined (status ARR) from the
scheduler.

05.19
DICOM 7 121
- Active Node
Checked node is used as a work list provider when multiple providers are config‐
ured. Active nodes can be configured in user settings (Options -> Configuration -
>Patient Registration -> HIS/RIS).
n Performed Procedure Step
Prior to and after patient acquisition, information data is sent to the Information Sys‐
tem (e.g. RIS) by the DICOM Service “Modality Performed Procedure Step”. Enable
this checkbox if the selected information system is the destination for this DICOM
service.
- Default Catalog Name
The configured values will be set in MPPS together with codes entered manually in
MPPS UI (DICOM Coding Scheme Designator and Coding Scheme Version). Typical‐
ly, changing defaults is not needed because it is too cumbersome to enter codes in
MPPS UI.
- Default Catalog Version
The configured values will be set in MPPS together with codes entered manually in
MPPS UI (DICOM Coding Scheme Designator and Coding Scheme Version). Typical‐
ly, changing defaults is not needed because it is too cumbersome to enter codes in
MPPS UI.
-Active Node
Checked node is used as a work list provider when multiple providers are config‐
ured. Active nodes can be configured in user settings (Options -> Configuration -
>Patient Registration -> HIS/RIS).
2. Click on Finish to leave HIS/RIS Node configuration here in Step 2 or click on < to go
back to the HIS/RIS Node configuration Step 1 page.

05.19
122 7 DICOM
7.10 HIS/RIS Setup with Worklist settings and MPPS

All configurations here need to be done step by step in sequence:
1. Make sure that only the XA modality is configured under Configuration > Local Host
> Modality. ( Modality / Page 46)
 It is also possible to configure additional modalities, e.g. RF on Artis MP systems. These

modalities can then be selected in the user configuration (Pat. Reg. -> HIS/RIS)
2. Load the required HIS_RIS_DICOM, GET_WORKLIST and MPPS_SUPPORT SW licenses

under Configuration > Service Licensing.
3. Configure the DICOM HIS/RIS option under Configuration > System Options. ( Sys‐
tem Options / Page 24)
4. Configure the data under Configuration > Artis One Components Imaging System >
SCP Configuration. ( SCP Configuration / Page 235)
This configuration is needed only when Artis one acts as a work list SCP. This is inde‐
pendent from the SCU Worklist.
 See (reference SCP config.) when the Artis one is to be configured as Worklist SCP to pro‐
vide patient demographics to third party systems.
5. Configure AETs under Configuration > DICOM Local AETs. ( Local AETs / Page 70)
6. Configure the HIS/RIS nodes under Configuration > DICOM HIS/RIS Nodes. ( HIS/RIS
Nodes / Page 116)
7. Configure under Configuration > Applications Pat. Registration. ( Pat. Registra‐
tion / Page 314)
8. Configure MPPS under Configuration > Applications MPPS ( MPPS (Modality Per‐
formed Procedure Steps) / Page 321)
9. Configure Worklist under Configuration > Applications Worklist Results. ( Worklist
Results / Page 323)
10. Configure parameters under Customer UI Options > Artis one Configuration Panel >
Patient Registration. ( Patient Registration / Page 336)

05.19
Import/Export 8 123
8.1 Directories
The location of the Import/Export directories for importing and exporting DICOM images
from/to the file system are specified here.
8.1.1 TCP/IP and Hostname settings of Import/Export Remote Host Nodes

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Import/Export Directories.
Fig. 56: Import/Export Directories, Step 1, Remote Host

05.19
124 8 Import/Export
1 2

( IPv6 / Page 38).
3. Select Host
- Choose one of the existing Import/Export Remote hosts offered by the drop-down
menu or select “define new” from the drop-down menu to add a new host to the
list.
- If “define new” was selected, the new Host must be setup here under “Host Prop‐
erties” and in the next menu page Import/Export, Step 2.
4. Host Properties
- Host Name
If define new was chosen, enter the host name of the host to be added here and
click on Find to resolve the host name and to obtain its TCP/IP addresss.
Host name rules & syntax must be observed! ( Rules & Syntax for Host Name
of DICOM Remote Node / Page 370)

05.19
Import/Export 8 125
- TCP/IP address
If define new was chosen, enter the TCP/IP address of the new host here if the
host name of the new host is unknown or cannot be resolved.
With an TCP/IPV6 system, no TCP/IP address is shown or entered here. Click on Test
to resolve the entered IP address and to obtain the host name.
- TCP/IPV6 address (required only for IPV6 systems)
If define new was chosen, enter the TCP/IPV6 address of the new host here if the
host name of the new host is unknown or cannot be resolved.
With an TCP/IP system, no TCP/IPV6 address shown or entered here. Click on Test
to resolve the entered IP address and to obtain the host name.
5. connected by
- LAN
Always select LAN.
- RAS
6. Leaving this screen:
- If changes have been made on this menu page, click on Save.
- Click on Finish to leave Import/Export configuration here in Step 1 or click on > to
advance to the Import/Export configuration Step 2 page. ( Definition of Image
Import/Export Directories / Page 125)
8.1.2 Definition of Image Import/Export Directories

Here it is defined whether the import/export directory is connected locally or through the
network.
1. Use the > button to advance to this page:


05.19
126 8 Import/Export
Fig. 58: Import/ Export Directories
2. Select logical HD device

Select either the name of an existing logical HD device or select “define new” to add a
new one to the list.
3. Logical Name
Update the logical name of an existing logical HD device for the Import/Export Local or
Remote System or if “define new” was selected, enter a new name.
This is the name which is shown to the user in the Application SW to select an Import/
Export target.
4. Browser Support
Default: not checked.
5. Select either the Local system button or Remote system and follow the correspond‐
ing software dialog.
6. The Local devices that already exist and are used by the system are listed in this table:
( Tab. 7 Page 127)
 Do not change or remove the existing entries (e.g. rdiag, quant, service)!

05.19
Import/Export 8 127
Tab. 7 Import/Export existing Local Paths on Drive C:\
Logical Name Path Paths

LOCAL C:\temp ..
..
..
..
..
..
Cookies
DMDELETEDOBJS
History
hsperfdata_Administrator
hsperfdata_meduser
input
IXP000.TMP
log
nortmp
output
report
S2S_debug
Temporary Internet Files
XMLadaption
_ISTMP0.DIR
~OemLog
CDR_OFFLINE C:\AXIOM\temp\CDR_OFFLINE ..
TestImages C:\ServiceImages\TestImages ..
ExportToService C:\ServiceImages\ExportToService ..
RL
UDOM
CopyToWinNie C:\ServiceImages\CopyToWinNie ..
ImageGallery C:\ImageGallery ..
8. Acknowledge the message “...successfully saved” with OK
9. Select Finish in the “Action Bar”.

05.19
128 9 System Mgmt. (System Management)
The Configuration > SystemMgmt Master or Configuration > SystemMgmt Agent Con‐
trols configuration items appear only if the System Management is selected in the List
of System Options ( Fig. 7 Page 25).
For details on how to configure it, see ( System Management (SRS) Configura‐
tion / AXA6-SRS.843.01) and ( SRS beginning with System SW
VA10x / AXA6-SRS.843.01).
LSS (Local System Server (includes MNP)) will be installed (only installed -> not regis‐
 tered) with the Artis one IVS SW (System Management functions -> only if the Installed
check box is checked and the status is -> partly running)

If there are any questions or problems with the Siemens Remote Services, contact the
SRS Help Desk. ( SRS Help Desk / Page 371)

05.19
Artis one system (1), System Config 10 129
Procedure for making changes in the system configuration:

( Doing changes under Artis One System/Components / Page 358)
Only components or options that are installed/present in the system may be configured!
 If an option is configured without a valid license key, it is not possible to save the config‐
uration!
 The “Configuration of SYSTEM” screen appears:

Fig. 59: Artis one system configuration

05.19
130 10 Artis one system (1), System Config
10.1 System Data

uration!
Fig. 60: Artis one system data
10.1.1 Collimator long Distance Top

Configure according to the items in the shipment. Default: No

Used only for Japan and USA!
Observe country-specific regulations.
Yes A long cone is installed on the radiation exit area of the collimator. Because of this,
the minimum possible distance from the skin surface of the patient to the X-ray
tube is extended. This is used to limit the patient “Reference Air Kerma”.
The collision calculator takes the long cone into consideration accordingly regard‐
ing the C-Arm and system movements.
No The short cone (standard) is installed on the collimator.
10.1.2 User Location Interface I

An ULI board must be always connected to the RTC ULI I connector socket and configured.

05.19
Yes Yes is fixed configured and cannot be changed. An ULI I board is always installed.
Selection of the EHC, SCM, CCM and TCM control modules is enabled. Default: Yes
10.1.3 User Location Interface III

IWO = Injector Wall Outlet
HSW = Handswitch
It is connected to the “RTC.ULI III” connector.
No A ULI III board is not installed.

No optional IWO and/or extra HSW + Emergency STOP switch are available. De‐
fault: No
Yes An IWO is installed and connected to the ULI III board.
ULI III can be physically installed in the exam or control room.
If the customer wishes to use an optional extra HSW + Emergency STOP switch in
the control room, ULI III and IWO must be installed in the control room.
The optional HSW + Emergency STOP switch are connected to the IWO in the con‐
trol room.
10.1.4 Reference Air Kerma Multi-Threshold Alert

This is also called “CAREguard”.
The CSE should contact the customer to decide whether this feature is to be configured.
Increasingly, FDA is demanding a reduction in the accumulated reference air kerma and
this feature will warn the user if he has exceeded a configurable threshold.
Enable this function only if the customer explicitly requests it and/or any country-specific
regulations require it.
Enabled If a configured reference air kerma threshold (see: ( Reference Air Kerma
Multi-Threshold Alert / Page 176)) is reached, the customer is alerted by a
warning message text on the EHC and an audible warning sound after the ra‐
diation has stopped.
The alerting audible sound can be enabled/disabled according to the custom‐
er’s wish. See: ( Audible warnings / Page 284)
Disabled No multi-threshold alert function is available with the audible warning signal
(beeper). Default: Disabled
10.1.5 Multimodality Viewing

VIDCAP OPTION = Video Capture Option

05.19
Yes Multimodality Viewing is enabled.

See also: ( External Video Sources / AXA6-000.815.03)
n Configure the inputs and layouts used in the User Application as explained in
the Operator Manual under “Options > Configuration > Display Layout Con‐
figurator”.
n Select the connected video sources one by one to check if they are displayed
properly.
n It is possible that after the user changes the Video Capture Layout under “Op‐
tions > Configuration > Display Layout Configurator”, the captured images
look different from the original images.
Remedy: If necessary, configure the “Video Capture” config item under “Con‐
figuration > Artis One Components Image System”. ( Video Cap‐
ture / Page 239)
No Default: No
10.1.6 MCI Component PN

Fig. 61: MCI component PN
This configuration item appears only beginning with the Artis one VA10D SW.
Two different motor models are used on the stand base. And two different encoder mod‐
els are used on the table.
The parameter must be set or checked to match the motor and encoder type before the
 MCI download and update.

If the incorrect parameter is selected, the whole system will be unable to move.

05.19
Fig. 62: HDD motor 07074727 Fig. 63: Georgii-Kobold motor, 07076268
Fig. 64: Siemens Encoder Connector - RJ45 Fig. 65: HEIDENHAIN Encoder Connector - M12
Tab. 8 MCI component PN
Parameters Stand base motor Table encoders Remarks

HDD: 07074727, SIE: HDD SIEMENS Stand serial numbers
10549328 ≤ 3021
HDD: 07074727, HEI: HDD HEIDENHAIN Stand serial numbers
10963878 ≤ 3021
KSY: 07076268, SIE: Georgii-Kobold SIEMENS Stand SN ≥ 3022
10549328
KSY: 07076268, HEI: Georgii-Kobold HEIDENHAIN Stand SN ≥ 3022
10963878

05.19
If the HDD motor is upgraded to a Georgii-Kobold motor on a stand with a serial num‐
 ber ≤ 3021, then select KSY:07076268 instead.

The release of the HEIDENHAIN encoder is planned for July, 2019.
10.1.7 Language Setting

The language of the EHC and DDIS XP menus is selected here. Default: English
English Spanish German French Japanese Chinese
After changing the language, the change must be saved in the components. To do this,
select AutoConf in the Configuration Check command bar.
It is absolutely necessary here to configure the same language which is configured by

the customer as the menu language for the syngo user interface (Text Monitor/Display)
 in the User UI under Options > Configuration > Regional and Language Options.
( Language Setting for the Syngo Display (Text Monitor/Display) / Page 339)
See also the Operator Manual.
10.1.8 Regulating Government

The country-specific restrictions/regulations set (“Legal Dose Limitations”) that will be ap‐
plied in the system are selected here. Default: Standard
Adaptations regarding country-specific legal regulations are made at this point.

These country-specific data absolutely must be configured correctly!
If the country selection was changed from Standard to Australia/Brazil/Canada/

 Japan/New Zealand, proceed as follows:
1. Switch the system OFF/ON to make the change of country valid!
2. Perform a SID Tracking test under “Local Service > Quality Assurance > New > Par‐
tial”. Lock the partial IQAP, see ( Quality Assurance / AXA6-000.820.01).
3. Perform the Indirect SID Tracking test in the Handover/Maintenance IQAP.
Tab. 9 Government Regulations, Country Selections
Choices Applies for country:

Standard USA (DHHS) and all countries except the ones listed separately in
this table.
Austria Austria only
Australia Australia only

05.19
Choices Applies for country:

Germany Germany only
Japan Japan only
New Zealand New Zealand only
Canada Canada only
Switzerland Switzerland only
Brazil Brazil only
Other Countries DO NOT SELECT!!!; ALL LIMIT VALUES WILL BE OVERWRITTEN!
Select this parameter only if explicitly instructed by the factory to
do so!!!
Used by the factory for:
Special system setups (e.g. customers’ wishes, IQ specialist tests / spe‐
cial IQ settings, etc.)
If this parameter is selected, the “Legal Dose Limitations” configura‐
tion item will also be available in the “System Configuration” under
“Select Group To Configure”. The legal dose limitations can be set up
manually with the parameters in this configuration item.
10.1.9 Reference Air Kerma display during X-ray Pause

For USA and all IEC countries:
The Reference Air Kerma must be configured according to “FDA / IEC Regulations”
Reference The current reference air kerma rate is displayed during X-ray in mGy/min.
Air Kerma The accumulated reference air kerma is displayed in mGy during X-ray pau‐
ses. Default: Reference Air Kerma
Relative The accumulated reference air kerma is displayed in %, depending on the
Air Kerma value selected under the "Reference Air Kerma Base for Display" configu‐
ration item ( Reference Air Kerma Base for Display / Page 135).
10.1.10 Reference Air Kerma Base for Display

This configuration item appears only if the configuration item "Reference Air Kerma dis‐
play during X-ray Pause" is configured to “Relative Air Kerma”. Default: 2.0 Gy
1.0 Gy, 1.5 Gy, 2.0 Gy, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 4.5, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0, 9.0, 10.0 and 15.0 Gy
can be selected.

05.19
This selection defines the max. value (100%) which is used to calculate the displayed
"reference air kerma".
10.1.11 CARE Monitor Threshold (mGy)[0,99999]

The maximum value for the medically acceptable skin entrance dose in one skin square is
set here. Default: 1000 (=1 Gy).
Example:
The maximum value for the medically acceptable skin entrance dose in one skin square
has been set here to 2 Gy.
When the maximum value is reached, the intensity of the bar changes and transgression
of the value is indicated, e.g. > 2.0 Gy is displayed.
If possible, the customer should now change the C-Arm angulation to avoid adverse skin
effects.
Fig. 66: Dose display after the threshold has been reached
10.1.12 HIPAA configured

The yes/no setting is only displayed here and is performed under “Security”.
Yes This option is active. Default: No. For the retrofit, see: ( syngo Security Op‐
tion / AXA6-000.814.02)
If HIPAA was accidentally enabled under “Security”:
 The only way to disable HIPAA is to reload the software and use a syngo system and con‐
figuration backup created before HIPAA was enabled.
10.1.13 Table Object Distance [0,40]

Enter a value! If one of the Quantification modules, QCA, QVA or LVA is configured, the
table-object distance can be entered here in a range from 0 cm to 40 cm. If none of these
modules is configured, the default: 15 cm is displayed.

05.19
Cushion/Mattress Type Default value

Table cushion, Card, thick (thickness 7 cm) 15
Table cushion, Card, thin (thickness 4 cm) 13
 Changes made here affect the calculations in the QCA, QVA and LVA options.
10.1.14 Table Object Distance for CARD Profile [0,40]

This point appears only if Card Profile is configured.
Enter a value! If the Card Acquisition module and one of the Quantification modules
QCA, QVA or LVA is configured, the table-object distance can be entered here in a range
from 0 cm to 40 cm. If none of these modules is configured, the default value is dis‐
played.
Cushion/Mattress Default value

Table cushion, Card, thick (thickness 7 cm) 18
Table cushion, Card, thin (thickness 4 cm)
16
(For Card tabletop)
 Changes made here affect the calculations in the QCA, QVA and LVA options.

05.19
10.2 System Options

uration!
Fig. 67: Artis one System Options
10.2.1 Carto System

For required adjustments, see: ( Configuration / Adjustment / AXA4-BWI.815.02). De‐
fault: No
C3 Carto C3 (Biosense Webster) is configured.

No Carto (Biosense Webster) is not configured.
10.2.2 Virus Protection

Office Scan NT Real-time Scan can be started/stopped here. For more info, see: ( Installa‐
tion with VD10 and higher Versions / AX00-SVP.814.01)
Yes The Virus Protection Service is set to start type “Automatic”.

No The Virus Protection Service is set to start type “Disabled”. Default: No
10.2.3 ECG-System
None An ECG system is not connected. Default: None

05.19
Sensis (key) License Key: NEWCOR_IF

An AXIOM Sensis (=Newcor) ECG system is connected.
( Sensis / Sensis Lite / AXA6-000.815.03)
OEM EP System An OEM EP system ECG is connected. ( Non-Siemens Measuring
Stations with Artis System / AXA6-000.815.03)
10.2.4 Sensis Type

This point appears only if “Sensis” was configured as the ECG system.
basic (key) Without Sensis remote control from EHC. Default: basic (key). No
Physio tab card appears on the EHC. An additional license to the Sensis
license already installed is not required.
enhanced (key) With Sensis remote control from EHC. The Physio tab card appears on
the EHC. An additional license to the Sensis license already installed is
not required.
It also must be configured how many remote monitors are installed in
the examination room. ( Sensis related configuration
items / Page 251)
10.2.5 ECG Data Transfer
always Received ECG data are always accepted. Default: always

if stable Received ECG data are accepted only if the ECG signal and QRS are stable.

05.19
10.3 License Options

uration!

05.19
Fig. 68: Artis one License Options

05.19
10.3.1 Storage Extension 3 (key) and Storage Extension 4 (key)

License Keys: STORAGE_EXT_3 ; STORAGE_EXT_4
The “Storage Extension 4 (key)” configuration module will be displayed only if the “Stor‐
age Extension 3 (key)” module was set to yes.
If the new license.dat file which includes the additional Storage Option/s is copied to the
system under Service and Licensing, the config check will automatically be started and
executed.

Click on autoconfig to remove discrepancies. The formating of the Image System Solid
State Disk will be started automatically and must be confirmed to be executed.
WARNING: All Patient Images will be erased/lost.
See details under: ( Downloading the License File / AXA6-000.815.03)( Storage Op‐
tion 3/4 / AXA6-000.815.03)
No The corresponding optional expansion module is not active. If none of the max.
of two memory expansions is configured, only the standard basic memory ca‐
pacity (25,000 images) is available. Default for both memory expansions: No
Yes The corresponding optional expansion module is active (built-in). With these
modules, the memory capacity of the image system is expanded in a max. of
two steps, building one on the other.
Tab. 10 Storage Extensions for AXIS Smart
Storage Module License (Key) Number of images available1

required ?
Basic Storage No (Standard) 25,000 1k images or 100,000 512 images
Storage Extension 3 Yes (Optional) 50,000 1k images or 200,000 512 images
Storage Extension 4 Yes (Optional) 100,000 1k images or 400,000 512 images
1. There is always one 512 GB Solid State Disk (SSD) installed
10.3.2 Scene Recorder

License Key: SCENEREC
Yes The Scene Recording option is enabled. Default: No

Prerequisite: The AXIS Smart Vid/Rec Option, Part No. 109 07 872, is con‐
nected. See: ( DVD Video Recording / AXA6-000.815.03)

05.19
10.3.3 DR Acquisition Module (key)

License Key: DR
Yes This module (option key) is active. DR Examination Sets can now be selected.
Default: No.
10.3.4 DSA Acquisition Module (key)

License Key: DSA_ACQ
Yes This module (option key) is active. DSA Examination Sets can now be selected. De‐
fault: No.
10.3.5 High Speed 30 fps Module (key)

License Key: HIGH_SPEED_ACQ
Yes This module (option key) is active. It permits scenes of up to 30 f/s to be saved in
the 1k matrix. Default: No. This option is mandatory for CARD and for 1024 Acq
with > 7.5 f/s in all exposure modes.
10.3.6 Card Acquisition Module (key)

License Key: CARD_ACQ
Yes This module (option key) is active. Card Examination Sets (1k matrix) can now be
selected at the EHC. Default: No.
The 1k matrix at 10, 15, 30 f/s is possible only with the High Speed 30 fps Module
(key).
10.3.7 CLEARstent (key)

License Key: IC_STENT
Yes This module (option key) is active. The CLEARstent SW can now be used. Default:
No
The “IQ: CLEARstent” configuration item will appear in the System Config under
“Select Group To Configure”. ( IQ: CLEARstent / Page 168)

05.19
If CLEARstent is used, make sure that the “Image Comment 1” and “Image Comment
2“ parameters under “Configuration > Artis One Components Image System > Overlay
Text for Reference Display” are enabled for the Reference display in the Overlay Text
 screen. The reason for this is that the “Preliminary Results“ image TEXT is displayed on
the Reference display while the CLEARstent computation is in progress, i.e., while a pre‐
liminary result of a CLEARstent Reference image is being displayed. ( Overlay Text for
Reference Display / Page 226)
10.3.8 CLEARstent Live (key)

License Key: CLEAR_STENT_LIVE
Yes This module (option key) is active. The CLEARstent Live SW can now be used. De‐
fault: No
The “IQ: CLEARstent Live” configuration item will appear in the System Config
under “Select Group To Configure”. ( IQ: CLEARstent Live / Page 168)
If CLEARstent Live is used, make sure that the “Image Comment 1” and “Image Comment
2“ parameters under “Configuration > Artis One Components Image System > Overlay
Text for Reference Display” are enabled for the Reference display in the Overlay Text
 screen. The reason for this is that the “Preliminary Results“ image TEXT is displayed on
the Reference display while the CLEARstent Live computation is in progress, i.e., while a
preliminary result of a CLEARstent Live Reference image is being displayed. ( Overlay
Text for Reference Display / Page 226)
10.3.9 Perivision (key)

License Key: PERIVISION
Prerequisites: The DSA Acquisition Module (key) option is configured.
Yes This module (option key) is active. Default: No. Perivision Examination Sets can
now be selected (Auto Sew, Edit Sew, PeriMap, Minimize, Long Leg document).
10.3.10 DR Stepping (key)

License Key: DR_STEPPING
Prerequisites: The DR Acquisition Module (key) option is installed.
Yes This module (option key) is active. DR Stepping Examination Sets can now be selec‐
ted at the EHC. Default: No

05.19
10.3.11 3D Acquisition (key)

License Key: 3D_ACqu_Artis
Yes This module (option key) is active. 3D Acquisition Examination sets can now be se‐
lected at the EHC. Default: No
10.3.12 3D HeartSweep Acquisition (key)

License Key: 3D_COROSCAN
Yes This module (option key) is active. 3D Heartsweep Examination sets can now be
selected at the EHC. Default: No
10.3.13 Fluoro Loop Module (key)

License Key: FLUORO_LOOP
Yes This module (option key) is active. Storage of fluoroscopy scenes (up to 512 im‐
ages) is now possible. Default: No
10.3.14 Automap Module (key)

License Key: AUTOMAP
Yes This module (option key) is active. Default: No

There are 2 functions:
1. The unit can be moved into the position in which the reference image was
made (using the data saved with the image). See the Operator Manual!
2. Automap looks for and displays a reference image for a currently set unit posi‐
tion that is as close as possible to a setting from a patient scene. See the Opera‐
tor Manual!
10.3.15 Quant QCA (key)

License Key: QUANT_QCA
Yes This module (option key) is active. Quantitative Coronary Arteriography analysis is
enabled. Default: No.
10.3.16 Quant QCA2D with bifurcation (key)

License Key: ARTIS_QUANT_QCA2D_BIFURC

05.19
Yes This module (option key) is active. Quantitative Coronary Arteriography with bifur‐
cation analysis is enabled. Default: No.
10.3.17 Quant QCA3D (key)

License Key: QUANT_QCA3D_STORE3DMODEL
Yes This module (option key) is active. Quantitative Coronary Arteriography analysis
with the 3 dimensional projection model is enabled. Default: No.
10.3.18 Quant QVA (key)

License Key: QUANT_QVA
Yes This module (option key) is active. Vessel Analysis is enabled. Default: No.
10.3.19 Left Ventricle Analysis (key)

License Key: LVA
Yes This module (option key) is active. Left Ventricle Analysis is enabled. Default: No.
10.3.20 CD-R Archive Module (key)

License Key: CDR_ARCHIVE
Yes This module (option key) is active. Default: No Local archiving on CD-R in the DI‐
COM standard is enabled. ( Offline Devices / Page 77)
10.3.21 MPPS(key)
License Key: MPPS_SUPPORT
Yes The DICOM Service MPPS is active. Default: No. See also: ( MPPS (Modality Per‐
formed Procedure Steps) / Page 321)
10.3.22 ECG-Recording Module (key)

License Key: ECG_RECORDING
Requirements:
n One of the ECG-System options is configured. ( ECG-System / Page 138)

05.19
n An option key must be present and installed for the AXIOM Sensis (= Newcor) ECG sys‐
tem. ( Licensing / Page 60)
n The required hardware must be installed and the ECG system must be connected to
the Artis one, see: ( ECG Connection / AXA6-000.815.03).
The HW, the option key and the Installation Instructions are part of the ECG option kit.
Yes This module is present. Default: No This module digitalizes the ECG data (curve)
during fluoroscopy and exposure and gets the image system ready for display.
10.3.23 ECG-Gated Fluoro Module (key)

License Key: ECG_GATED_FLUORO
Requirements:
n One of the ECG-System options is configured. ( ECG-System / Page 138)
n An option key must be present and installed for AXIOM Sensis (= Newcor). ( Licens‐
ing / Page 60)
n The required hardware must be installed and the ECG system must be connected to
the Artis one, see: ( ECG Connection / AXA6-000.815.03).
The HW, the option key and the Installation Instructions are part of the ECG option kit.
Yes This module (option key) is active. Default: No

It synchronizes the fluoro frame rate (triggering of radiation of the fluoro pulse)
with the R-peak of the ECG signal.
10.3.24 Generator Limitation 800mA (key)
This configuration step is only for systems sold and used in China.
Customers in China who are installing X-ray systems with an X-ray tube current higher
 than 800 mA must have additional approval/permission from the authorities to do so.
This license has been introduced to sell systems to customers in China who do not want
to apply for the additional approval/permission to install this system..
License Key: GENERATOR_LIMITATION_800_MA
Yes The generator is limited not to exceed 800 mA tube output current.
Default: No
10.3.25 KV - MS Exposure Point [1,4]
 Make changes here only if instructed to do so by the IQ specialist of the factory.

05.19
This config item is used to optimize image quality.

Here, the number of exposure points for the parameter in the OPG can be set (pulse time
will be x exposure points extended) before a kV plateau is left
(influences the behavior of the Angiomatic regulation).
Range: 1....4
Default: 3

05.19
10.4 Select Group To Configure items Configuration

uration!
Fig. 69: Select Group to Configure
10.4.1 Footswitch/Handswitch

05.19
Fig. 70: Footswitch / Handswitch for Artis one
The “Footswitch Pedals” as well as the “Hand-switch-Acquisition button” can be as‐

signed in this template with first and second functions.
When the footswitch pedal is pressed, both the first and second functions configured for
this pedal are performed simultaneously by the system. ( Footswitch Pedal Configura‐
tions / Page 151)
When the hand switch button is pressed, both the first and second functions configured
for the button are performed simultaneously by the system. ( Handswitch Acquisition
button, 2nd function assignment / Page 158)
If the customer is using “Alternative Acquisition ( = Low Dose Acquisition)” Organ
Programs (OGPs):
n Mark the footswitch pedal that triggers the “Alternative Acquisition” radiation with the
label shown below ( Alternative Acquisition ( = Low Dose Acquisition) / Page 155)
 CAUTION
Footpedal not recognized as acquisition release pedal.
Unnecessary dose.
 Label the footpedal configured for low dose acquisition as acquisition ped‐
al.
hm_serv_LabelLowDoseAcqPedal
Fig. 71: Alternative acquisition ( = low-dose acquisition) footswitch pedal label
The labels are shipped with the system and are kept in the blue system binder.

05.19
10.4.1.1 Footswitch Types and fixed Pedal Allocations
Tab. 11 Pedal Allocations of the 4-pedal Footswitch
Monoplane Footswitch for Artis with Pedal Num‐

bering (allocations) 1....4:
Fig. 72: 4-pedal footswitch
Tab. 12 Pedals with fixed Allocations and fixed first Functions
Pedal Fixed allocation First function Comment

1 1st Function of Pedal 1 Start Fluoro. This cannot and may
not be changed!
21 1st Function of Pedal 2 Start Acquisition. This cannot and may
not be changed!
1. Do not configure any other pedal as the default pedal for Acquisition!
10.4.1.2 Footswitch Pedal Configurations

First and second functions are assigned here to the footswitch pedals. When the pedal is
pressed, all first and second functions configured for this pedal are performed simultane‐
ously by the system.

05.19
Tab. 13 4-pedal Footswitch: Standard pedal allocations for first functions
Pedal 4-pedal footswitch

11 Fluoro
22 ACQ
33 Table brake ON/OFF4 or the table brake is pressed/released5
or
3 Handsfree Programmed Movement
4 Room Light control
or
4 Alternative Acquisition
1. This pedal allocation is permanently defined and may not be changed!

2. This pedal allocation is permanently defined and may not be changed!
3. The “Table Brake” function is possible only with the footswitch in the examination room. There are additional configura‐
tions under the “Artis one omponents” Stand configuration: “Manual Table Top panning without pressing TCM” and
“Manual Table Top panning, ignore collision calculator”( General Parameters / Page 264)
4. The tabletop brake is switched permanently ON / permanently OFF every time the pedal is pressed and released (=toggle
mode)
5. The tabletop brake is switched OFF only while the pedal is pressed.
CAUTION: X-ray radiation is applied without diagnostic use.
 If the default allocation of the exposure footswitch pedal is changed, radiation can be
triggered without the intended start and injection from the injector.
Do not configure any other pedal as the default pedal for acquisition!

05.19
The following toggle secondary functions cannot be configured for a pedal that triggers
radiation (e.g. Fluoro/Roadmap, Alternative Acq or ACQ):
Room Light Toggle ON/OFF
Table Brake ON/OFF
AUX1 Toggle ON/OFF
 AUX2 Toggle ON/OFF

AUX3 Toggle ON/OFF
Handsfree Programmed Movement
X-ray radiation could be applied without diagnostic use
Do not allocate the second function of a radiation triggering pedal with one of the above
mentioned (toggle) functions.
n The following footswitch functions can be allocated to the particular pedals:
 CAUTION
Unnecessary dose.
 Label the footpedal configured for low dose acquisition as acquisition pedal.
Tab. 14 Functionality of the footswitch functions that can be allocated to the pedals
Function Name Functionality

Fluoro Fluoro is switched on only while the pedal is pressed.
Acquisition Pressing the pedal starts acquisition as selected. If the pedal is re‐
leased, acquisition is switched off again.
Alternative Acquisition Pressing the pedal starts acquisition with a shadow OGP associated
with the currently selected Fluoro triplet. In the OGP Editor, it is shown
to the left of the Fluoro triplet. Any Card, DR, DSA not part of the Ex‐
amset can be put here. Special modes (e.g. DYNA, 3D, Peri, and so on)
do not work. Also referred to as Alternative OGP See also: ( Alterna‐
tive Acquisition ( = Low Dose Acquisition) / Page 155)

05.19

Roadmap Reset/On/Off 1st Function: If the pedal is pressed for less than a defined time,
Roadmap is set to Phase 1 in both planes. (= Roadmap Reset)
2nd Function: If the pedal is pressed more than a defined time, there
is a switch from Roadmap to Fluoro (toggle) (= Roadmap On/Off). As
a default, the time is configured to 2 sec. and can be changed under
Configuration > Artis One System System Config > Roadmap on/off
footswitch. ( Time to toggle Roadmap/Fluoro (sec) / Page 158)
Roadmap Pressing the pedal starts Roadmap.
Roadmap Reset When the pedal is pressed, Roadmap is reset and the Roadmap proce‐
dure starts from the beginning.
Roomlight Toggle ON/OFF1 Toggle Function:
By pressing/releasing the pedal, the room light is switched on per‐
manently. By pressing/releasing the pedal again, the room light is
switched off permanently.
Roomlight press/release While the pedal is pressed, the room light is switched off. If the ped‐
al is released, the room light is switched on again.
Table Brake ON/OFF2 Toggle Function:
By pressing/releasing the pedal, the tabletop brakes are permanent‐
ly released. By pressing/releasing the pedal again, the tabletop
brakes are again permanently applied.
Table break press/release While the pedal is pressed, the tabletop brakes are released. If the
pedal is released, the tabletop brakes are again applied/activated.
Aux 1 Toggle ON/OFF3 Toggle Function:
By pressing/releasing the pedal, Aux 1 is switched ON permanently.
By pressing/releasing the pedal again, Aux 1 is switched OFF perma‐
nently.
Aux 1 press/release Aux 1 is switched on only while the pedal is pressed. If the pedal is
released, Aux 1 is again switched off.
nently.
nently.

05.19

Handsfree Programmed When controlling programmed unit positions as well as Automap, in
Movement6 addition to the joystick on the SCM, a footswitch pedal can be used
optionally to activate the movements.
To do this, select the programmed unit position at the SCM and then
instead of the SCM joystick, press the particular configured pedal on
the footswitch. Pressing the pedal starts and no longer pressing the
pedal stops the movement.
This function may be allocated only once, either as the first or as a
second function.
Default:
Handsfree Programmed Movement is configured on the same pedal
as a second function where Table Brake press/release (release table
brakes) is configured as a first function. This is normally pedal 3 with a
4-pedal footswitch.
Important Info:
1. This function cannot be allocated to a pedal as a second function
for which Fluoro/Roadmap, Alternative Acq, ACQ or Handsfree
Programmed Movement is configured as the first function.
2. The speed of the movement can be configured separately for sys‐
tem and user positions. ( Preprogramming timeouts/parame‐
ters / Page 272)
3. Handsfree movement Config check is available under: Configu‐
ration > Test Tools > Stand&Table Tests. The former (old) name
of this test is: “Footswitch-Test”.
1. Do not allocate the second function of a pedal that triggers radiation with a “Toggle” function.
6. Do not allocate the second function of a pedal that triggers radiation with the “Handsfree Programmed Movement” func‐
tion.
10.4.1.3 Alternative Acquisition ( = Low Dose Acquisition)

n "Alternative Acquisition" and "Low Dose Acquisition" are the same functions.
- Alternative Acquisition
This term is used In the service documentation for the footswitch configuration.
-Low Dose Acquisition
This term is used In the Operating Manual and Application/IQ Group.
Normally there is a fluoro program available for Fluoroscopy. But with heavier patients,
the reference air kerma limitation limits the dose and the IQ is no longer optimum (image
too dark and not enough contrast).

05.19
The Low Dose Acquisition can be used as substitute for fluoroscopy for heavier patients
to improve the IQ.
A low dose acquisition program (e.g. Card at 80 nGy) is available as an alternative to a
fluoro program (in addition to a normal acquisition program) where the reference air ker‐
ma limitation limits the dose so that improved IQ is obtained for heavier patients. This ac‐
quisition program is started with a separate footswitch pedal (pedal 4 on the upper lev‐
el) without selecting it separately, because it is part of the organ program already selec‐
ted (OGP/Exam Set).
This function is available for every Organ Program/Exam Set (e.g. DR, DSA, Card, etc.).
except for special modes such as 3D or PERI Exam Sets.
With this alternative ACQ programmed footswitch pedal, e.g. a DR single shot can be trig‐
gered and it is also possible to trigger it with the normal exposure footswitch pedal 2, Acq
series.
 CAUTION
Unnecessary dose.
 Label the footpedal configured for low dose acquisition as acquisition pedal.
Alternative ACQ OGP
n It is a special-purpose OGP with quick access by means of the footswitch.
n It can only be activated using the footswitch (special configuration. required).
n It is a shadow OGP, which is distributed with selection of the exam set.
n It has a quick activation time.
n The alternative ACQ OGP functionality is not an option and therefore no license key is
required.
n The feature is enabled after the footswitch is configured appropriately (Service/System
Configuration./Footswitch).
n For safety reasons, the lower footswitch pedals cannot be used.
n Place any Card, DR, DSA that is not part of the exam set next to the FL Triplet. Special
modes (e.g. DYNA, 3D, Peri, etc.) will not work.

05.19
n It is possible to configure the “complete flag” handling separately for alternative OGP
images under Service/Imaging System/Transfer. Only images with the “complete flag”
will be sent with the auto transfer to PACS.
n Due to HW reasons, automatic injector release with an alternative OGP is not possible.
Fig. 77: OGP program with alternative acquisition, VC20

05.19
10.4.1.4 Time to toggle Roadmap/Fluoro (sec)
Range: 1, 10
Default: 2 (= 2 sec.) for the Card system configuration, all other system types 1 (= 1 sec.)
See also: Footswitch pedal allocation and function configuration ( Footswitch/Hand‐
switch / Page 149) of the Roadmap Reset/On/Off parameter
1st Function: If the Roadmap/Fluoro pedal on the footswitch was pressed for less than
the time specified here, Roadmap is set to Phase 1 in both planes. (= Roadmap Reset)
2nd Function: If the Roadmap/Fluoro pedal on the footswitch was pressed for longer
than the time specified here. There is a switch from Roadmap to Fluoro (toggle).
10.4.1.5 Handswitch Acquisition button, 2nd function assignment

The configuration procedure is equivalent to the footswitch pedal configuration proce‐
dure.
When pressing the hand switch, the configured second functions are performed by the
system simultaneously with the first function specified by the system.
Fig. 79: Hand switch acquisition button, 2nd function
10.4.1.6 Reconfiguring the Footswitch / Hand Switch, General Procedure

Example:
1. Start the Artis One System System Config ( Starting/Closing the Configuration in
Local Service / Page 355)
2. Select (highlight) the Footswitch /Handswitch configuration item in the “Select
Group To Configure” selection window.

05.19
3. Click on Config in the “Action Bar”.

 The configuration of the Footswitch /Handswitch starts.
4. Make the desired changes and then confirm with OK. If Cancel is selected, the
changes will be lost.
5. Select Save to save the changes.
6. Select Exit and Next to exit the “System Configuration”.
 The “Config Check” starts automatically and signals a number of errors that cor‐
responds to the number of changes that was made.
7. Select AutoConf in the “Action Bar” of the “Config Check” menu.
 The modified values are automatically loaded to the affected components.
When this is done, a conflict may no longer be displayed.
8. Select Next in the “Action Bar” again to exit the “Config Check”.
 The “Version Check” starts automatically and should not show an error.
9. Select Exit in the “Action Bar” of the “Version Check” menu and then click on Next.
10. Select Home to exit the Configuration menu. Then end the service session.
11. Switch the system OFF and back ON again to accept the changes!
10.4.1.7 Configuring Room Light Control with the Footswitch / Hand switch
Also refer to: ( Room Light Control (per the Customer's Request) / AXA6-000.815.03)
Example:
1. Start the Artis One System System Config ( Starting/Closing the Configuration in
Local Service / Page 355)
2. Select (highlight) the Footswitch / Handswitch configuration item in the “Select
Group To Configure” selection window.
3. Click on Config in the “Action Bar”.
 Configuration of the Footswitch / Handswitch starts.
4. With the 4-pedal footswitch, configure as follows:
- 2nd Function of Pedal 1: Roomlight press/release only. (Light OFF with Fluoro)
- 2nd Function of Pedal 2: Roomlight press/release only. (Light OFF with ACQ)
- Pedal 4 without Alternative Acq.:
1st and 2nd functions: Roomlight press/release or Roomlight ON/OFF
Pedal 4 with Alternative Acq.:
1st function: Alternative Acq
2nd function: Roomlight press/release only.
For the hand switch, configure as follows:
- 2nd function of the handswitch Acquisition button: Roomlight press/release
Then confirm the changes with OK to exit the Footswitch / Handswitch configuration.
If Cancel is selected, the changes will be lost.
5. Select Save in the “Action Bar” to save the changes.

05.19
6. Select Exit and then Next in the “Action Bar” to exit the “System Configuration”.
8. Select Next in the “Action Bar” again to exit the “Config Check”.
10.4.1.8 Configuring Release of the Tabletop Brakes with the Footswitch

Example:
/ Page 355)
2. Starting the Artis one Stand Component Configuration:
Click on Configuration > Artis One Components Stand.
3. Select (highlight) General Parameters configuration item in the “Select Group To
Configure” selection window and then click on Config in the “Action Bar” to start this
configuration.
4. Configure the Manual Table Top panning without pressing TCM configuration item
to No for the press/release function, or to Yes for the on/off function (toggle mode)
and then click on “OK” in the “Action Bar” to accept the change. ( General Parame‐
ters / Page 264)
Important: The function (mode) selected here absolutely must then also be config‐
ured for the corresponding footswitch pedal!
5. Click on Save and then Exit in the “Action Bar” to return to the configuration main
menu.
6. Starting the Artis one System Configuration:
Click on Configuration > Artis One System System config.
 The “System Configuration” menu is displayed.
7. Select (highlight) the Footswitch /Handswitch configuration item in the “Select
Group To Configure” selection window.and then click on Config in the “Action Bar” to
start this configuration.
8. Make the necessary changes with the 4-pedal footswitch:
- 1st and 2nd functions of Pedal 3: Table Brake ON/OFF
Then confirm the changes with OK in the “Action Bar” to exit the Footswitch / Hand‐
switch configuration. If Cancel is selected, the changes will be lost.
9. Select Save in the “Action Bar” to save the changes.

05.19
10. Select Exit and then Next in the “Action Bar” to exit the “System Configuration”.
12. Select Next again to exit the “Config Check”.
10.4.2 IQ: Parameters for angiomatic (ang)

Configure as desired.
Fig. 80: IQ: Parameters for Angiomatic (ang)
n SID Tracking
 Observe country-specific regulations!
Yes Configure in countries with SID regulations. Default: Yes
n High Contrast Beeper
Observe country-specific regulations!
 The setting must be changed to “Permanent On” for systems in the USA (DHHS Regula‐
tions)!
Permanent On The beeper is always switched on for high-contrast fluoro.

Beep if Skindose > The beeper is switched on only if a reference air kerma of 10 R/
10R/min min. is exceeded. This is the default.

05.19
n Default water value

Value range: 5.....440 mm. Default: 200 mm (= 20 cm water)
This parameter is used to set the default value for the patient dose estimate.
A new water value will always be determined using a patient model when the C-Arm
position is changed.
n High Contrast Fluoro in RM Phase 1,2
enabled In Road Map Phase 1 and Phase 2, “High Contrast Fluoro” is used to improve
the Image Quality. Default: disabled
n Tube voltage for High Contrast [50000,125000]

Enter the tube voltage threshold that must be reached to switch from normal Fluoro
to High Contrast Fluoro here. Default: 90,000 (= 90 kV). Set to: 80000
10.4.3 IQ: Parameters for Preprocessing (ACU)
 Change the values only on instructions from the factory (e.g. UIs, Speed Infos, etc.).
The “Noise Reduction” can be adjusted individually here, which influences image quality.
Fig. 81: Parameters for Pre-processing (ACU)
All parameters, except “kfact during movement” which is applied when moving the tab‐
letop, are not used and have no effect at all if they are changed.
Tab. 15 Preprocessing (ACU))
Parameter name Range Default Remarks

Setting
AGC Max Gain 1,1024 512 n.a.
kfact during movement 125,400 160 This has an effect only for the fixed K-fac‐
tor. See also: ( IQ: Multi scale motion de‐
tector (MSMD) / Page 163)

05.19
10.4.4 IQ: Universal Dominant
Fig. 82: IQ: Universal Dominant
n Universal Dominant Dynamik Glow

Value range: 0....65,535. Default: 2600
Dynamic Glow.........
General Properties of Universal Dose Measuring Field (DMF)
n Advantages:
- No need to position the object of interest in the center.
- Chance of underexposed areas is significantly reduced (interesting for Peri, Card (di‐
aphragm, spine), Angio (Roadmap with large high dynamic areas))
- Chance of overexposed areas (“Burn out”) is reduced
n Disadvantages:
- Automatic control limits the influence of the user; this may change user's workflow
- Brightness changes using universal DMFs are faster than with fixed DMFs
- Universal DMF does not help for maxed out
- Possible different brightness in the A Plane for some projections (Carotis)
- Pay attention to DMF setting when doing dose measurements
10.4.5 IQ: INoise

These parameters are only for display. Nothing can be changed here.
10.4.6 IQ: Multi scale motion detector (MSMD)

Many parameters are only for the display and nothing can be changed there.
For the parameters which can be changed:

05.19
10.4.7 IQ: Eve2

These parameters are only for display. Nothing can be changed here.
Eve auto 1 ....... auto 8 functions:

n eve auto 1: Dedicated EVE parameter set for Roadmap and DSA
 n
n
eve auto 2...6: The higher the “auto” number, the higher the edge smoothing effect
eve auto 7: Do not use! Might be used in the future.
n eve auto 8: For “CTO” and HDR flavor.
10.4.8 IQ: Harmonisation (DDO)
Harm Background can be adjusted individually here, which influences image quality.
Fig. 83: IQ: Harmonization (DDO)
10.4.9 IQ: Edge Enhancement
Edge Enhancement, which influences image quality, can be adjusted individually here .

05.19
Fig. 84: IQ: Edge Enhancement
 If it is intended to display the image on a color monitor after downsizing has been com‐
pleted, then the Downsizing Gain parameter must be set to 1.5
Tab. 16 Imaging System Edge Enhancement
Parameter name Range Default Setting

Auto Edge Enhance for Dose Reduction Enable enabled /disabled enabled
Auto Edge Enhance for Dose Reduction Gain 0.0 to 2.0 1.0
EE gain factor for downsizing 1.0 to 2.0 1.5
Apative EE Fluoro Sensitivity [0,20000] 0,20000 20000
EE 100 percent gain [4,12] 4,12 6
Apative EE Fluoro Exponent 0.2 to 2.0 0.3
Apative EE RM Sensitivity [0,20000] 0,20000 20000
Apative EE RM Exponent 0.2 to 2.0 0.3
Apative EE CARD Sensitivity [0,20000] 0,20000 10000
Apative EE CARD Exponent 0.2 to 2.0 0.3

05.19
Parameter name Range Default Setting

Apative EE Native Sensitivity [0,20000] 0,20000 1250 or 2501
Apative EE Native Exponent 0.2 to 2.0 0.3
Apative EE SUB Sensitivity [0,20000] 0,20000 2000
Apative EE SUB Exponent 0.2 to 2.0 0.5
1. If customer uses predominantly DR for "Skeleton" (Bone), set value to "250"
10.4.10 IQ: Auto and Sigmoid Window
“Auto Window” can be adjusted individually here, which influences image quality.
Tab. 17 Imaging System Auto and Sigmoid Window

Setting
Auto Window Width Xnarrow 1,2048 100 n.a.
Auto Window Center Xnarrow 1,2048 10 n.a.
Auto Window Width Narrow 1,2048 200 n.a.
Auto Window Center Narrow 1,2048 10 n.a.
Auto Window Width Normal 1,2048 400 n.a.
Auto Window Center Normal 1,2048 300 n.a.
Auto Window Width Wide 1,2048 500 n.a.
Auto Window Center Wide 1,2048 500 n.a.
Auto Window Width Xwide 1,4095 2000 n.a.
Auto Window Center Xwide 1,2048 1000 or n.a.
20001
Response speed of Auto Window 1,64 3 n.a.
Threshold exclude low GV 0,16384 100 n.a.
Threshold exclude high GV 0,16384 3500 n.a.
Threshold value for histogram 0,50000 50 n.a.
area size to define LLhistogram
(Unit is 10e-5)

05.19

Setting
Threshold value for histogram 0,50000 50 n.a.
area size to define ULhistogram
(Unit is 10e-5)
Adjust calculated center value -4095, 0 Adaptation of the image
4095 brightness with use of “Au‐
towindow”
Adjust calculated width value 0.5 to 1.2 n.a.
1.5
1. If the customer uses DR predominantly for "Skeleton", set the value to "2000"
10.4.11 IQ: Auto Pixel Shift (APS)
The Imaging System Display, which influences image quality, can be adjusted here indi‐
vidually.
Tab. 18 Imaging System Display

Setting
Auto Pixel Shift for RM enabled / Enabled This function is now imple‐
disabled mented in the organ pro‐
gram.
Auto Pixel Shift Sensitivity for RM 1,50 25 This parameter no longer
has any effect.
Auto Pixel Shift Sensitivity for DSA 1,50 25 This parameter no longer
has any effect.
Auto Pixel Shift Maximum Radius 1,32 5 n.a.
Auto Pixel Shift Maximum Thresh‐ 0,100 100 n.a.
old
Auto Pixel Shift Maximum Thresh‐ 0,100 35 n.a.
old (DSA Review)
Auto Pixel Shift Detect Bad Condi‐ enabled / Enabled n.a.
tion disabled
Auto Pixel Shift K - Factor Default 10,80 30 n.a.
Value

05.19

Setting
Auto Pixel Shift K Factor for Bad 10,80 60 not effective.
Condition
Auto Pixel Shift Maximally Allowed 1,640 15 n.a.
Shift from Image to Image
10.4.12 IQ: CLEARstent

This configuration item appears only if the configuration item CLEARstent is set to Yes in
the system config. ( CLEARstent (key) / Page 143)
Tab. 19 CLEARstent

Setting
Turn on/off additional debugging output on/off off n.a.
Number of intermediate frames for DSS 1,100 25 n.a.
Time in 0.1s after which preview image shall be 1,100 10 n.a.
shown
Use Stent ROI on/off on n.a.
Maximum number of megapixels to be processed 10,500 80 n.a.
Maximum number of frames to be processed 10,500 200 n.a.
Edge Enhancement Preview and Static Stent Image 0,50 15 n.a.
(SSI)
Edge Enhancement Dynamic Stent Scene (DSS) 0,50 15 n.a.
Vessel detection on/off off n.a.
10.4.13 IQ: CLEARstent Live

This configuration item appears only if the configuration item CLEARstent Live is set to
Yes in the system configuration. ( CLEARstent Live (key) / Page 144)

05.19
Tab. 20 CLEARstent Live

Setting
Scaling factor for window width 5,15 5 n.a.
CLEARstentLive WC offset -800,800 -200 n.a.
CLEARstent Live EE kernel 3,15 5 n.a.
CLEARstent Live EE percentage 0,100 20 n.a.
Filter factor for recursive filtering 100,1000 1000 n.a.
0
Number of frames for Stage1 1,60 15 n.a.
Max. misdetections in last 10 frames 1,10 8 n.a.
10.4.14 IQ: Nomsie
Fig. 85: IQ: Nomsie

05.19
n Overlay DSA Ref

Possible choices: Off, Auto1, Auto2, Auto3, Auto4, Auto5, Auto6, Auto7 and Auto8.
Do not use Auto1.....Auto7
If the customer uses the Ref. overlay and wants better vessel contrast, use: "Auto8"
n All other configuration parameters
They are fixed and cannot be changed.
10.4.15 IQ: Overlay Ref

Fig. 86: IQ: Ref. overlay
This parameter is for choosing the method of Overlay Ref Image processing.
n OVL-REF MirrorLevel
Range: -1 to 4095. Default: 2048
10.4.16 ECG gated X-ray

Fig. 87: ECG-gated X-ray
These configuration points are only in conjunction with Roadmap, ECG-gated Fluoro
and Acquisition. ( ECG-Gated Fluoro Module (key) / Page 147)
n EcgPreparationTime
Range: 0, 10 Default: 10
The period a stable ECG signal has to be present before it is acceptable to start radia‐
tion is configured here.

05.19
n no. triggers for calculating heart phase

The number of R-peaks is configured here. The mean heart rate is calculated with the
configured number of R-peaks. The mean time for a heart phase is derived from the
mean heart rate.
n fixed framerate, if ecg signal lost
Range: 1,4 Default: 2
If the ECG trigger signal is lost, the pulse rate which is configured here (1, 2, 3 or 4
pulses/s) is used.
n Ecg Drop Out Time setting (sec)
If no ECG trigger is identified within this time frame, it is assumed that the ECG signal
dropped out and it is switched over to internal triggered X-Ray.
The "Ecg Drop out time" is a time in sec., the ECG pulse rate is in 1/sec.
The "Ecg Drop out time" has to be longer than the time between two ECG pulses.
10.4.17 FD Monitoring Parameter (ACU)

Fig. 88: Artis one FD Monitoring Parameter (ACU)
on AVS Monitoring is switched on. Default: on

off AVS Monitoring is switched off.
10.4.18 Xray Lamp

Fig. 89: X-ray lamp

05.19
n Radiation indicator Light.
always on n Independant of the used radiation pulse frequency:

The X-ray indicator light on the DCS is always (permanently) switched
on during (pulsed) fluoroscopy or when an acquisition is released.
blinking n For a radiation pulse frequency higher than 4 f/s:

The X-ray indicator light on the DCS is always (permanently) switched
on during (pulsed) fluoroscopy or when an acquisition is released.
n For a radiation pulse frequency of 4 f/s and lower:
The X-Ray indication light on the DCS blinks because it is only switched
on during the radiation pulse when triggering pulsed fluoroscopy or an
acquisition.
Default: blinking.
n Supervision of current at D102

This configuration step monitors on board D102 the current passing through the relay
coil used to switch an optional external X-ray indication lamp.
NO Supervision of current on the D102 is disabled. Default: NO

In the current configuration always NO
YES Supervision of current on the D102 is enabled.
10.4.19 Hardware Options

Fig. 90: Hardware Options
For details, refer to: ( UPS/EPS, Door Switch / AXA6-000.815.03)

n Which Type of Emergency Power Supply is connected to the system
No EPS/UPS is connected Select if no UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) is

present for the entire system. This is the default.

05.19
Emergency Power Generator Select if the system is connected via a facility Diesel
(Diesel) is connected UPS system for limited operation. (EPG = Emergency
Power Generator).
System EPS is connected Select if the system is connected via a “Powerware”
EPS system (EPS = Emergency Power Supply).
 CAUTION
The system fails to reduce power in case of power failure, while supplied from the
Uninterrupted Power Supply.
System unavailable during Power failure.
 Perform the check of the UPS signal as part of each regular maintenance.
hm_serv_UPSFunctionTest
n Is Line Voltage Present signal connected

This parameter is shown only if either the UPS or the EPS option is configured.
Yes The Line Voltage Present signal (potential-free contact) is connected. For
details, refer to: ( UPS/EPS, Door Switch / AXA6-000.815.03)
No The Line Voltage Present signal is not connected.
Default: No
n Is a OR UPS (e.g. table UPS) connected to the system
Yes An OR table with UPS (e.g. table UPS) is connected to the system.
No An OR table with UPS (e.g. table UPS) is not connected to the system.
Default: No
n Is PUN logical unit connected to MainDistributor
Yes The connection cable is configured between Generator A M16.X10 and the
system control cabinet main distributor MD.X400.
No The connection cable is not installed/configured.
Default: No
n SystemEPS - Delay for UDC errors from PUN [s] [1,200]

This parameter is shown only if either the UPS or the EPS option is configured.
Range: 1,200. Default: 10
- If the Emergency Power Generator (Diesel) is connected, the option is configured:
Configure the bootup time of the Diesel here.

05.19
- If the System EPS is connected, the option is configured:

Keep the default value configured.
n Doorswitch
Not installed The door contact is not connected.

Default: Not installed
Stop X-ray immediately Radiation is interrupted immediately when the door con‐
with activated door switch tact is active.
Prevent X-ray release with Radiation in progress is not interrupted. However, trigger‐
activated door switch ing radiation again (e.g. following a fluoro pause) is not
permitted.
Interrupt fluoroscopy, com‐ Fluoroscopy is interrupted immediately, however an ac‐
plete acquisition quisition is completed normally and only then is radiation
blocked.
10.4.20 LINE Frequency Voltage Resistance

Line Frequency Select 50 Hz or 60 Hz, depending on the frequency that was meas‐
ured. Default: 50 Hz
Line Voltage Select 380 V, 400 V, 420 V, 440 V, 460 V or 480 V, depending on
the voltage that was measured.
Default: 400V.
Line Resistance Enter a value between 100 mΩ and 260 mΩ (in increments of 20
mΩ), depending on the internal line resistance that was measured.
Default: 100 mΩ.
10.4.21 Nominal anode frequency

An offset in the nominal anode frequency of the X-ray tube can be selected to reduce the
audible noise of harmonic mechanical vibrations.

05.19
Fig. 91: Nominal Anode Frequency
n Offset nominal anode frequency plane A

Range: -12Hz: -7Hz, 0Hz, +5Hz, +10Hz, Default: 0Hz
 A change here becomes valid only after a X-ray generator reset is performed (e.g. pow‐
ering the system OFF and ON again)!
10.4.22 Monitor
Fig. 92: Monitor
Important for Monitor Layout Changes:
 Due to syngo, there are at least 2 system reboots needed to make the changes valid. On‐
ly then is the change of the image display visible.
n CTRL_MONITOR_TYPE.
Default: Color Monitor Other possible choice: Black and White.
The factory ships the systems with Color Monitor configured.

05.19
n EXAM_MONITOR_TYPE.
Default: Color Monitor. Other possible choice: Black and White
The factory ships the systems with Color Monitor configured.
 The factory ships the systems with Color Monitor configured.
10.4.23 Reference Air Kerma Multi-Threshold Alert

This configuration item appears only if the “Reference Air Kerma Multi-Threshold Alert”
config item is configured to “enabled” in the Artis one system configuration. ( Reference
Air Kerma Multi-Threshold Alert / Page 131)
Fig. 93: Reference Air Kerma Multi-threshold Alert
If the accumulated reference air kerma has exceeded the low/medium/high thresh‐
old, then:
- the system controller (SYC) sends REP_BEEP 'On' via the AXCS to sound the alarm.
- The IAS flashes the displayed "actual skin dose rate" or "accumulated skin dose" val‐
ue on the Live display(s) at a frequency of 2 Hz.
- The IVS and EHC display the skin dose warning “Acc. Skin Dose has excee
ded predefined limit of… mGy” and enable the "Acknowledge button".
The beeper warning sound is the same for all thresholds and is the same as the “tube too
hot” warning. The sound continues until the user confirms the message (similar the fluoro
timer) that appears on EHC and system console.
The alerting audible signal can be generally enabled/disabled according to the customer’s
wish, see: ( Audible warnings / Page 284)
The threshold is shown in the message text on the on EHC and system console and has to
be confirmed by the user. Only then will the warning sound stop.
Example:
The user does not want to exceed or is urged to stay below an accumulated skin dose,
e.g. 5000 mGy for a patient, because otherwise a regulatory authority has to be notified.
To ensure that the customer is informed during the patient examination about the pro‐
gress of the actual accumulated skin dose before the limit is reached, e.g. a low threshold
3000 mGy, a medium threshold 4000 mGy and a high threshold 4500 mGy can be config‐
ured.

05.19
n Low Threshold (mGy)

Range: 0 to 99999 mGy, Default: 2000
Configure the value according to country regulations and/or the customer’s request.
Ask the user for the required value.
n Medium Threshold (mGy)
n High Threshold (mGy)

05.19
178 11 Artis one System (2), Others (SWMs, Config Check, ...)
11.1 M-Switch PortConfiguration

M-Switch Port Configuration is available on all Artis one SW VA10 systems.
The configuration is performed automatically by the system.

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Artis One System M-Switch PortConfiguration.
 The following screen appears, e.g.:
Fig. 94: M switch port configuration

05.19
Artis one System (2), Others (SWMs, Config Check, ...) 11 179
3. Check the status of the assigned ports.

The Ports No. 1....3 and 5 of the AXCS network switch must be assigned to specified
components.
The existing cabling must match the configuration/assignment requested by the SW.
 If the current arrangement of the cabling is correct and matches the requested
configuration, this will be shown under Status as OK. Example:
Fig. 95: M switch port configuration
 If the existing cabling does not match the requested configuration, the discrep‐
ancy will be shown under Status:

05.19
Fig. 96: Managed Switch Port Configuration showing errors
4. Alter the existing cabling if a discrepancy is shown under Status.

The sequence of components connected to the switch on the possibly assigned Ports
No. 1.....3 and 5 must be set as required by the SW.
This table shows all possible assigned ports:
Tab. 21 All possible assigned M-Switch ports
Assigned Component IP Address Remarks

Port No. Nominal
1 AXIS SMART 10.1.1.4 Instead of IVS
2 CCOM 10.1.1.2 Instead of RTC
3 Sinumeric (NCU710) 10.1.1.200 Instead of Flat Panel Detector
5 ULI 1 10.1.1.131 New.
5 EHC 10.1.1.5 Instead of TSC
 It must be IP Address Actual = IP Address Nominal and the Status must be

OK.
If the existing cabling must be modified, perform the following work steps:
a) Alter cabling of the network cables to match the network cables to the proper
components as shown in the table above.

05.19
b) Click on Refresh to verify that the modification was correct.

 The cabling status for the modified ports must now be OK.
c) Repeat work steps a+b as many times as needed until all components match their
assigned ports.
5. When the configuration for Ports No. 1.....3 and 5 is completed, click on Save to save
the performed configuration.
 The configuration is completed when the status OK is displayed for the as‐
signed components and Saving done appears in the action bar.
6. Click on Exit

05.19
11.2 EHC/OSD Import Export

This Config parameter can be used to export EHC ( EHC / Page 289) and OSD
( OSD / Page 247) data from one Artis one system to a data medium.
The EHC and OSD data can then be imported from the data medium to another Artis one
system.
When transferring EHC and OCD data from one Artis one system to another Artis one
 system, it is not checked whether or not the data are consistent (i.e. match each other's
configured SW options). The person who is doing the import must ensure this by match‐
ing the data manually.
1. Click on Configuration > Artis One System EHC/OSD Import Export.

 The EHC/OSD Import/Export screen is displayed:
Fig. 97: EHC/OSD Import/Export
2. Click on Select to select the drive where the data medium is located.
3. Click on Export to export the selected EHC and OSD data from the Artis one system to
the data medium.
a) Select Export Action
b) Select Component
c) Select Drive for export
d) Click on Go.
e) The caf file should be successfully exported to the selected drive root with the file
name <MachineName>_<serialnumber>_<ComponentName>_<CurrentSys‐
temVersion>_<Timestamp>.caf
4. Click on Import to import the selected EHC and OSD data from the data medium to
the Artis one system.
a) Select Import Action
b) Select the component to be imported

05.19
c) Select the drive and caf file to be imported.

d) Click on the Go button.
e) The selected file should be imported successfully.
A pop-up informs the user that the old settings will be overwritten.
A pop-up informs that depending on the options, the config will be set to default,
if not available in the target.
f) A config check is automatically triggered to reconcile differences between the sys‐
tem config and the imported CAF values.
Discrepancies can be removed by clicking on autoconfig.
1. Start to import or export the EHC/OSD data.

a) Click on Configuration > Artis One System EHC/OSD Import Export.
 The EHC/OSD Import/Export screen is displayed:
Fig. 98: EHC/OSD Import/Export
b) Double-click on one of the items in the drop-down menu to continue or click on

Exit to leave this menu.
2. Insert the data medium into the Artis one computer.
Insert either a CD/DVD into the DVD drive R: or a USB stick into the USB socket.
3. Select the drive where the data medium is located.
a) Double-click on Select in the drop-down menu of the EHC/OSD Import/Export
menu.

05.19
Fig. 99: Select Drive:
b) Select (highlight) the Drive letter where the data medium is located and then click
on Go to select the path.
4. Exporting EHC/OSD Data
a) Double-click on Export in the drop-down menu of the EHC/OSD Import/Export
menu.
 The EHC/OSD Export Action screen appears:
Fig. 100: EHC/OSD Export Action
b) If required, click on Select in the menu of EHC/OSD Export Action to verify and/or
change the drive which contains the data medium.

05.19
Fig. 101: EHC/OSD Export Action, Select Drive
Select (highlight) the Drive letter where the data medium is located and then click
on Go to select the path.
If no changes are necessary, click on Exit.
c) Set a checkmark for EHC and/or OSD, as desired, to select what data have to be
exported.
d) Click on Next to proceed with the export. (click on Back to abandon the export).
e) Follow the software dialog/s, if applicable.
f) Wait until the export is finished. Observe the status message/s to see the progress.
g) Click on Exit to close the EHC/OSD Export Action menu after the data export is fin‐
ished.
h) Remove the CD/DVD or the USB stick data medium. Eject the USB stick device using
the software (icon in the user interface) before removing the USB stick.
5. Importing EHC/OSD Data
a) Double-click on Import in the drop-down menu of the EHC/OSD Import/Export
menu.
 The EHC/OSD Import Action screen appears:
Fig. 102: EHC/OSD Import Action
b) If required, click on Select in the menu of EHC/OSD Import Action to verify and/or
change the drive which contains the data medium.

05.19
Fig. 103: EHC/OSD Import Action, Select Drive
Select (highlight) the Drive letter where the data medium is located and then click
on Go to select the path and caf file.
If no changes are necessary, click on Exit.
c) Set a checkmark for EHC and/or OSD, as desired, to select what data have to be
imported.
d) Click on Next to proceed with the import. (click on Back to abandon the import).
e) Follow the software dialog/s, if applicable.
f) Wait until the import is finished. Observe the status message/s to see the progress.
g) Click on Exit to close the EHC/OSD Import Action menu after the data import is fin‐
ished.
h) Remove the CD/DVD or the USB stick data medium. Eject the USB stick device using
the software (icon in the user interface) before removing the USB stick.
i) When exiting this config item, the config check and then the version check will run
automatically.
If discrepancies are reported, use autoconfig to remove them.
Leave the configuration menu with Home. If a reboot is requested, then click on
reboot now.
After the reboot, the system should be in working condition. Check all functions.

05.19
11.3 Pre Program Position
 Only for factory use!
Here it is possible to load pre-program positions from a ppp.dat file (xml construct) at the
factory during manufacture of the system.
The file should be in the root of the selected drive where the ppp.dat file is located.

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Artis One System Pre Program Position.
Fig. 104: Pre-program Position
3. Select Drive
Select the drive where the ppp.dat file is located. The file should be in the root of the
selected drive.
- [-C-] FIXED - in the IVS
- [-D-] FIXED - in the IVS
- [-E-] FIXED - in the IVS
- [-F-] REMOVABLE in the AXIS Smart
- [-G-] FIXED in the AXIS Smart
- [-I-] FIXED in the network
- [-R-] CD-R - in the IVS
- [-S-] CD-R in the AXIS Smart

05.19
4. Click on Go in the "Action Bar"

 The current ppp.dat file is overwritten.
5. Click on Exit in the "Action Bar" to leave this window.

05.19
11.4 Tube Config

Following an X-ray tube installation/replacement, the characteristic heating curves of
the new Megalix tube must be imported and then downloaded to the CCOM and ULI 1
CAN components.

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Artis one System Tube config.
Fig. 105: Tube Configuration
3. Import the characteristic heating curves of the new X-ray tube.

a) Insert the data carrier with the particular X-ray tube data into the appropriate slot
of the ACE: Either an USB device in the USB connector or a CD in the CD-R drive.
A Tube Data CD is always shipped with a Megalix X-ray tube!
b) Select Plane A.
c) Select the drive being used from the “Select Drive” drop-down list. Either for an
USB stick ([-G-] REMOVABLE) or for a CD ([-F-] CD-R).
d) Click on Go to start the import.
e) Follow the dialog with the software until the data import is finished.
4. Click on Exit when the data import is finished.
5. Click on Home to leave the configuration. If the system requests confirmation for a
reboot, confirm it.
6. Following a tube replacement, conditioning/dose adjustment must be performed.
7. To see the procedure in detail, see:( MEGALIX Cat Plus
125/40/90-125GW / AXA6-PAP.841.02)( Startup / AXA6-PAP.841.02)

05.19
11.5 SWM EHC

Prior to using the SW Manager, the system must be completely configured. A file is
generated from the configuration that is used to control the download.
The SWM EHC is used to download the software to the EHC and AXCS system compo‐
nents. Also refer to: ( SWM EHC / AXA6-000.816.01)
EHC SW Download Procedure:
/ Page 355)
2. Start the EHC Software Manager:
Click on Configuration > Artis One System SWM EHC.
 The EHC Software Manager menu is displayed.
Fig. 106: EHC Software Manager
- Description of “Install”: Downloading SW Packages from the Host PC to the EHC

and its components.
- Use of “Install”:: When replacing of the EHC or one of its components, when per‐
forming a system SW update or when performing a system SW reload.
The current software is always downloaded to the components, regardless of
which SW version is already saved in the component.
3. Mark the “Install” Checkbox with a Checkmark and click on Go in the “Action Bar” to
start the download.
 The download to all package/s included in the selection is performed. ( SWM
EHC / AXA6-000.816.01)
After the download is completed, the following screen appears:

05.19
Fig. 107: EHC Software Manager, completed
4. Click on “Exit” to close and leave the EHC Software Manager.

05.19
11.6 SWM RTC

The RTC Software Manager is used to download the software modules to the AXCS RTC
system components as well as the SW to the CAN components.
LanBoot can be used if the RTC system disk has been formatted first.
This configuration item is also described in the documentation of the Software Installa‐
tion Instructions ( RTC SWM / AXA6-000.816.01)
SW Download to RTC and CAN / IOB Component/s Procedure:
/ Page 355)
2. Starting the RTC SW Manager:
Click on Configuration > Artis One System SWM RTC.
 First the following text information is displayed: “Preparing download...
Please be patient. In some cases preparations can last
several minutes”
 Once all preparations have been completed by the SW, the “RTC Software
Manager” window is displayed automatically:
Fig. 108: RTC Software Manager
3. Decide how to proceed:

- To continue without a disk reformat or CAN download, click on > in the “Action
Bar”.
 Continue with List Item 5.
- To continue with a disk reformat and download to RTC A with LanBoot, first mark
the Checkbox with a checkmark and then click on Go.
 The following screen appears to provide instructions how to proceed:

05.19
Fig. 109: RTCA (Download via Network)
4. Follow the instructions provided by the RTC Software Manager.

 The following screen appears after the RTC disk is reformatted and the RTC SW
download has finished:
Fig. 110: ARTIS Software Manager RTC (Download Mode)
5. Observe and follow the instructions shown on the screen.

- If continuing without a disk reformat was selected under List Item 4:
RTC and/or CAN download can now be performed, as required.
Sequence if both Downloads have to be performed: First the RTC, then the CAN.
- If continuing with a disk reformat and a download to the RTC was selected under
List Item 3:
The RTC download is already completed. If required, the CAN download can be al‐
so be performed.
6. Perform the CAN download, if required.
a) Mark the CAN download Checkbox and then click on Go.

05.19
Fig. 111: CAN Download
b) Mark the Checkbox of the CAN Component/s which has/have to be downloaded

and then click on Go.
 A bar shows the download progress for each component selected for down‐
load:
Fig. 112: CAN Download Progress
 The following screen appears when the CAN download is finished:

05.19
Fig. 113: CAN Download finished
7. Perform the IOB (SIRC & ECG) download, if required.

a) Mark the IOB (SIRC & ECG) Checkbox and then click on Go.
Fig. 114: IOB (SIRC & ECG) Download
 The IOB Download screen appears:

Fig. 115: IOB Download
b) Mark the IOB component Checkbox and click on Go.

 The following message appears:

05.19
Fig. 116: IOB, message from webpage
c) Follow the instructions in the message, then click on OK to confirm the message
box.
 The following screen appears when the IOB download is finished:
Fig. 117: IOB Download finished
8. Click on Exit to leave the SWM download mode.

Fig. 118: ARTIS RTC Software Manager (Application Mode)
9. Click on Exit to leave the SWM and set the RTC back to the application mode.

05.19
11.7 SWM ULI

The ULI Software Manager is used to download the software modules to the ULI board as
well as to the CAN components.
This configuration item is also described in the documentation of the Software Installa‐
tion Instructions ( SWM ULI / AXA6-000.816.01)
SW Download to the ULI Procedure:
/ Page 355)
2. Starting the ULI SW Manager:
Click on Configuration > Artis One System SWM ULI.
Fig. 119: ULI Software Manager
3. Mark the Radio Button for the ULI 1 package and then click on Go.
 The following window pops up for some time:

05.19
Fig. 120: Switch Boot Mode window
 Then the ULI Board Download menu appears:

05.19
Fig. 121: ULI Download menu

05.19
4. Click on Start update.

 The following screen shows the result of the download:
Fig. 122: ULI Download finished

05.19
5. Click on Back to leave the ULI SWM.

 The RTC boot mode is set back to the Application Mode and the ULI SWM is
closed.

05.19
11.8 SWM MCI

MCI = Motion Control Industry
With the SWM MCI, the MCI software package is downloaded to the MCI (Motion Control
Interface).
How to perform the MCI download is explained here: ( MCI Installation and Start‐
up / AXA6-000.841.01)
See also the Software Download document: ( MCI SWM / AXA6-000.816.01)

05.19
11.9 VNC MCI (MCI Download Part 2)

This configuration item is used to establish a VNC connection to the MCI.
The VNC session can be used to access the SW platform of the MCI to perform manipula‐
tions including downloads and uploads.
How to perform the MCI download is explained here: ( MCI Installation and Start‐
up / AXA6-000.841.01)
For a description, also see: ( MCI SWM / AXA6-000.816.01)
MCI = Motion Control Industry
VNC = Virtual Network Computing

This is software which displays the displayed screen of a remote Workstation (Server) on a
local Workstation (Client).
Keyboard strikes and mouse movemens/clicks/scrolls of the client are sent to the server.
The user can work on a remote Workstation like he is sitting right in front of it.

05.19
11.10 Restore
Use of Restore:
For a system SW update, system SW reload, as well as for replacement of AXCS compo‐
nents or CAN components.
Function of Restore:
Download the configuration data to the AXCS and CAN components after successfully re‐
storing the system data on the AXIOM ivs.
n Following a SW download or SW update, this takes place automatically if Configura‐
tion > Artis one System Restore was clicked on.
Restore of the system data is included in the Software Installation Procedure. ( Re‐
storing the Configuration Data / AXA6-000.816.01)
n Following replacement of an AXCS component (e.g. RTC), restore functions automati‐
cally only if a Restore of the “syngo system and configuration backup” from the
Backup CD or network share to the AXIS was performed separately before this. ( Re‐
storing the Configuration Data / AXA6-000.816.01)
n If Restore of the “syngo system and configuration backup” to the AXIS was not per‐
formed, automatic Restore does not function. The following message appears:
“No current package available to execute! Restore the desired
package from system data backup first, using the ’Backup & Re
store’ menu”
n Manual Restore, e.g. following replacement of a component:
Following replacement of components, the configuration data can also be downloa‐
ded manually to the new components. To do this, click on the corresponding compo‐
nent configuration under Configuration > Artis One Components ........... and then,
without making any changes, save it in the components with Save and then close the
window again.
If no currently valid configuration file for this component can be found, a “Default”
configuration file is used. An appropriate “Warning” appears that must be confirmed
with OK. Then manually configure all parameters for this component and save it in
the component with Save.

05.19
11.11 Artis Hardware Inventory

The part number/serial number combination is used to name the LSS ((Local System Serv‐
er (includes MNP)) components (IAS-A and IVS), e.g. AX10095092-1012. Registering the
LSS components is done if Save is pressed on that page. LSS will be installed (only instal‐
led -> not registered) with the Artis IVS SW (System Management functions -> the Instal‐
led check box is checked and the status is -> partly running)
It is important that this is handled properly, because if the Artis one system is an online
system, these names are sent to the back-end server to identify the components.
Make sure that the correct material numbers are shown.
 There are stickers on the systems which explain where to find the part number and the
serial number.

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Artis One Components Artis Hardware Inventory.
 The Test Tools screen appears:
Fig. 123: Hardware Inventory
3. Click on Hardware Tests.


05.19
Fig. 124: Hardware Tests
4. Place a Checkmark:
- under “Components” in the Checkmark Box “AXIS-Smart: HW-Inventory check:”
- under “FRUs of AXIS-Smart: HW-Inventory check” in the check boxes “AXIS-
Smart: Create a new snapshot .....” and “AXIS-Smart: Hardware inventory
check....”.
and then click on “Go”.
Fig. 125: AXIS Smart: HW Inventory

05.19
Fig. 126: AXIS Smart: HW Inventory, confirmation to continue
5. Click on OK to continue execution of the selected items..

 A screen appears which shows the progress:
Fig. 127: AXIS Smart: HW Inventory, indication of progress
6. If all selected items are succesfully executed, the AXIS Smart HW Inventory is finished.

05.19
11.12 Config Check

Purpose of the Configuration Check
n The Configuration Check tests:
a) The consistency of the System Configuration.
b) The consistency of the System Configuration with the Component Configuration.
c) The existing SW licenses versus the configured options.
n After completing the Configuration Check:
- The result is displayed in the “Config Log”. ( Fig. 128 Page 208)
- The “Config Log” is also saved automatically under Reports and is also still present
there after closing the Configuration Check window.
Select under Reports > Tune-Up/QA/Tests Component Reports > ConfigCheckRe‐
sults.htm
The Auto Configuration log is also saved under Reports.

The information about which components were reconfigured in the Config Check can
 be found there once the AutoConf button has been pressed.
Click on Reports > Tune-Up/QA/Tests Component Reports > “Auto Reconfiguration” to
display this information.
Fig. 128: Config check with errors, auto-configuration and without errors

05.19
Config Check Starting

1. Methods of starting the Config Check:
a) Starting Automatically
If the system configuration was changed and exited by clicking on Save > Exit >
Next, the Config Check starts automatically
b) Starting Manually
Click on Configuration Artis One System Config Check.
 The Configuration Check is performed.
11.12.1 Configuration Check, Evaluating the Log and Correcting Inconsistencies

The Configuration Check log must be checked for any inconsistencies that are displayed.
If an inconsistency is found, the system switches to the “Bypass mode” and "Inconsis
tent Configuration, call SC" is displayed on the text monitor. The system will
then not be operational.
The system will remain in the “Bypass mode” until the conflict is corrected and the Con‐
fig Check is run through again without error. Only then will the “Configuration Inconsis‐
tancy Flag” be reset in the System Registry file.
Examples of Displayed Texts in the Log:
1. No errors have occurred.
Tab. 22 Configuration Check Result. No errors occurred.
The Configuration Check result can be found using Report Viewer after leaving with ’Exit’.
No errors detected.
###############################################################
Configuration Check finished!
###############################################################
2. Errors have occurred.
Tab. 23 Configuration Check Result. Error/s occurred.
The Configuration Check result can be found using Report Viewer after leaving with ’Exit’.
2 errors detected!
###############################################################
Configuration Check finished!
###############################################################
In an error situation, the text in the log must be searched to find the corresponding
number of Errors to determine which configuration point or which component has
caused the error.

05.19
Removal of Config Check Errors

1. Configuring Automatically:
- Select AutoConf in the “Action Bar” of the Config Check Result menu. The current
configuration parameters are automatically loaded to the particular components in
question. The “Config Check” window displays a report about the changes made
and their status.
The Auto Configuration log is also saved under Reports.

The information about which components were reconfigured in the Config Check
can be found there once the AutoConf button has been pressed. Click as following
to display this information: Reports > “Tune-Up/QA/Tests” Component Reports >
“Auto Reconfiguration”.
- Close the Config Check with Exit.

- Perform the Config Check again. A conflict may not be displayed.
However if a conflict is still found, AutoConf must be performed again.
Repeat the Auto Configuration until no more errors appear in the “Config Check”

log.
If the error cannot be corrected with Auto Configuration, there must be a “manual”
configuration. See the next List Item 2.)
- Close the Config Check with Exit.

2. Configuring Manually:
- Use one of the components displayed in the Config Check log with error with
Configuration > Artis One Components ......... log and after opening the configu‐
ration file, proceed as follows:
A window with the message “Changes......” can appear in which a question is
asked about whether changes (default values) are to be made automatically. Con‐
firm this window with OK. Then check all parameters to determine whether they
are ok.
- Select Save and then Exit to return to the Configuration.
- Select all components marked as error in the log and correct them.
- Select Save and then Exit to return to the service SW Home menu.
Repeat the “Manual Configuration” until no more errors appear in Config Check.

If this does not correct the error, there must be a hardware error:
n Perform the appropriate troubleshooting and replace the hardware.
n After correcting the problem, repeat the Config Check.

05.19
3. Configuration data contradict each other, or are not permitted (inconsistency)

Start Configuration > Artis One System System config, scroll through and look for
the “lightning” symbol.
Fig. 129: Configuration Conflict Where the symbol appears, the corre‐
sponding configuration point must be
selected and appropriately corrected.
Take note of the items included in the
shipment and the installed hardware!
4. SW option is configured, but there is no corresponding SW license

Start Configuration Artis One System System config, scroll through and look for the
“key” symbol.
Fig. 130: License key missing Where the symbol appears, either the
option must be deselected or a software
license for this option must be downloa‐
ded. ( Licensing / Page 60)

05.19
11.13 Version Check

Purpose of the Version Check
n Comparison of the current (actual) SW versions of the primary system compo‐
nents to a nominal version that is saved in the system.
- If communication to a component cannot be established, the message “.....not
reachable” is displayed in the “Status ” column.
- If the current SW version differs from the nominal SW version or a component can‐
not be reached, a Conflict is displayed for the affected component. The system
stays in the “Bypass” mode and the message "Inconsistent SW, call SC" is
displayed.
- The system cannot be used in this status until this “Conflict” is corrected.
- In addition, the current SW versions of a few non-critical SW components as well as
the HW and FW versions of the connected components are read out and displayed.
There are no nominal versions for these components and therefore the check is not
performed.
n Removal of the "Inconsistent SW, call SC” message so that the system can
be used again.
The SW version check must be completed successfully once without problems, e.g. af‐
ter replacing defective components and/or after a successful SW download to the
component that caused the error.
Version Check Starting
1. Methods of starting the Version Check:
a) Starting Automatically
- The system configuration was changed and exited with Save > Exit > Next.
 The Config Check starts automatically.
- The Config Check is finished and Next is clicked.
 The Version Check starts automatically.
This ensures that when adding a new AXCS or CAN component a check is
performed to determine, whether a download to this component is neces‐
sary or not.
b) Starting Manually
Select Configuration Artis One System Version Check.
 The Version Check is performed.

05.19
11.14 Format Image Disk

All patient images and the database will be deleted!
 The patient images can no longer be used by the customer for patient diagnostics.
Before performing “Format Image Disk”, if possible, archive all patient images which are
still needed by the customer.

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Artis One System Format Image Disk.
 A window with the message “Partitioning/Formatting will delete
all images and database: Do you wish to continue?“ will ap‐
pear.
3. Confirm the message with OK only if you are absolutely sure that the patient images
are either corrupted, obsolete and/or no longer needed.
 Partitioning and formatting of the Solid State Image Disk is performed.
(The system knows what storage options are installed and formats the solid
state disk accordingly)
4. Confirm the message “Formatting successfully completed” with “OK”.
(If a window which shows a link is still open, click on this link to erase and create a
new database).
5. Select Continue to remove the database when the partitioning and formatting proce‐
dure is finished.
 The system (IVS) will reboot and create a new database.
This can take up to approx. 15 to 25 minutes.
6. After the system has rebooted, it will be ready to be fully used.
Exception: If the Storage Option was changed.
7. If the Solid State Image Disk was formatted because there was an upgrade to the Stor‐
age Option 3 or from Storage Option 3 to Storage Option 4, follow the instructions
in the System Startup document: ( Storage Option 3/4 / AXA6-000.815.03)

05.19
214 12 Artis one Components (1), Image System
12.1 Image System

The Artis one is using the AXIS Smart Image System.

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Artis one Components Image System.
Fig. 131: AXIS Smart Image System
3. Select (highlight) the desired configuration point in the “Select Group To Config‐
ure”selection window and then click on Config in the “Action Bar” to start its configu‐
ration.
4. Make the configuration changes as desired and select OK to save the changes and exit
the screen

05.19
Artis one Components (1), Image System 12 215
5. Select and configure the other config item/s available on this screen as desired/descri‐
bed, or continue with step 6.) to finish the configuration.
6. Select Save > Exit to close the configuration.
12.1.1 General
Fig. 132: Image System, General
n Dr.Artis auto-restart (mSec)

If a “Dr.Watson” error occurs while using the Artis one application software, a “Dr.Ar‐
tis” window will appear that indicates how many seconds remain until the system per‐
forms an automatic restart. This time is counted down (Countdown).
 Do not change the “Countdown” time of the default: 15sec.
- Default value: 15000

This corresponds to a wait time of 15 s to an automatic restart.
- Maximum value: 2147483647
This corresponds to a wait time of approx. 597.5 hours to an automatic restart.
Automatic restart of the application is thus virtually suppressed.
- Minimum value: 0
This corresponds to a wait time of 0 sec. to an automatic restart.
Generation of a Dr. Artis file (for service) is thus virtually suppressed.

05.19
n CD Viewer
Which DICOM Viewer will be burned to the CD-R/DVD when doing image transfers to
this local device is configured here. ( Local Devices Tabcard / Page 332)
FastView Used for Universal Systems. It supports images with a resolution high‐
er than 1024x1024.
 The viewer must not be used for medical diagnostics!
n FLUSH_ONLY_EXAM_MONITORS
enabled After registering a new patient via SENSIS, only the monitors in the ex‐
amination room are darkened.
disabled After pressing "Close Patient", all monitors in the examination room
and in the control room are darkened.
n Fluoro Timer Display in Min/Sec format

This configuration changes the display format in both the examination and control
room.
Minutes & tenth of minute (MMM.x) MMM = 000....999 minutes, x = 0.......9

tenths of a minute (= 6 sec. steps)
Hours, minutes & seconds (HH:MM:SS) HH = 00....99 hours, MM = 00...59 minutes,
SS = 00...59 seconds

05.19
For USA only:
 Minutes & tenth of minute (MMM.x) must be configured because the “FDA-Regulation”
requires this. ( Fig. 133 Page 217)
Fig. 133: ONLY FOR USA: Fluoro Timer Display in Exam Room in Minutes & tenth of minute (MMM.x)
display format
n Work status
Directories use this “Work Status” configuration item to display the work status of an
image object in the Scene Directories view.
enabled DIR displays the work status. Default: Enabled

disabled DIR does not display the work status
n ANNOTATION_OBJECT_COUNT [0,100]
The total number of annotation objects an image can have. Default: 75. Do not
change this value
n Annotation Object Deletion via EHC
Delete Selected Annotation Objects Only the selected Annotation objects will be
deleted, if deletion is chosen on the EHC.
Delete All Annotation Objects All Annotation objects will be deleted, if dele‐
tion is chosen on the EHC.
n FONT_SIZE [10,50]
Default: 18. Do not change this value.
n FONT_TYPE [7]
Default: Arial. Do not change this value.

05.19
n INVALID_RECT_COUNT [0,10]
An invalid rectangle is a predefined area (rectangle) that encloses ID text that is
shown on the monitor. They are defined in the caf file. If any annotation text is placed
within these invalid rectangles, a dotted rectangle graphic is shown around the anno‐
tation text. Default: 0. Do not change this value.
n Carto AET
Enter the AET for the Carto System C3 here if it is configured in the System Config.
( Carto System / Page 138)
n Angio Active Frame Selection Distance [10,100]
Default: 50. Do not change.
n Return to working position after 3D
yes The stand C-Arm system returns to the working position after a 3D run is finished.
Default: yes
no The stand C-Arm system does not return to the working position after a 3D run is
finished.
12.1.2 Acquisition Control

Fig. 134: Acquisition Control
n Store/Show Patient Orientation
yes Saving and then display of the Patient orientation marks (R, L, A, P and H, F) is
switched on on the image display.
n Video Recording during Acquisition
enabled The AXIS Smart Video Recorder (Option) records with exposure.
n Video Recording during Fluoro
enabled The AXIS Smart Video Recorder (Option) records with fluoroscopy.

05.19
n Video Recording during Roadmap
enabled The AXIS Smart Video Recorder (Option) records with Roadmap.
n Dilatation timer display examroom
Yes The dilatation time is displayed on the Live monitor/display in the examination
room. Default: No
12.1.3 Image Processing Control

The image quality can be affected by these settings.

05.19
Fig. 135: Image Processing Control
n Extended Vessel Contrast [0,2047]

Default: 0
n Window Contrast White Range [1,1024]
Default: 15
n Invert Rdmap Phase 2 LIH
enabled Roadmap Phase 2 LIH is displayed inverted. Default: disabled
n Negative Edge Enhancement
enabled Negative edge enhancement is activated. Default: enabled

05.19
n With the other parameters, do not change the factory setting!
 The values are IQ-optimized and should be changed only if explicitly instructed to do so
(by the factory).
12.1.4 Image Overlay Control

Fig. 136: Image Overlay Control
n Anatomic Background % for Fluoro (Overlay Ref) [0,80]

Mixing factor of Reference image with the Fluoro Live image.
n Anatomic Background % for RoadMap Fluoro (Overlay Mask) [0,100]
Mixing factor of Roadmap Subtraction Mask image with the Roadmap Fluoro im‐
age.
n Anatomic Background % for Acquisition (Overlay Mask) [0,100]
Mixing factor of ACQ Subtraction Mask image with the ACQ Native image.
Tab. 24 Anatomic Background, example of mixing factors
Anatomic Background % for: Angio Systems Card Systems

Fluoro (Overlay Ref) 10% 10%
Roadmap Fluoro (Overlay Mask) 20% 0%
Acquisition (Overlay Mask) 30% 10%
12.1.5 Image Review Control (Display ECG Signal)

Fig. 137: Configuration of the Image Review Control group

05.19
n ECG_MAX_DISPLAY_DURATION [1,20]
Maximum time (in s) that the ECG signal appears on the monitor. Default: 10s.
n ECG_SHOW_PRESSURE
enabled The blood pressure (pressure sensor value from catheter) is displayed on
the monitor. Default: disabled
n ECG_PERCENTAGE_TOLERANCE [1,50]
Enter the max. tolerance of the ECG curve points in %. Default: 20. Do not change
this value!
n ECG SINGLE STEP DISPLAY DURATION[1,20]
Enter the time that a magnified section of an ECG curve is displayed. Default: 2s
n SLEEP TIMER TIMEOUT IN MINUTES [0,60]
A scene played back in an infinite loop is stopped after the configured time to permit
processing background processes. Default: 10

05.19
12.1.6 Overlay Text for Examination Display

Fig. 138: Overlay Text for Examinatrion Display
Overlay data can be enabled in this screen by selecting enabled. They are visible in Ex‐
amination Mode on the display.
The default configuration ((enabled / disabled) depends on which system model is con‐
figured with which options. Can be changed if the customer requests it.

05.19
12.1.7 Overlay Text for Post Processing

Fig. 139: Overlay Text for Post-processing

05.19
Overlay data can be enabled in this screen by selecting enabled. They are visible in Post‐
processing Mode on the monitor/display.
12.1.8 Overlay Text for Quantification Display

Overlay data can be enabled in this screen by selecting enabled. They are visible in Quan‐
tification Mode (Option) on the monitor/display.

05.19
12.1.9 Overlay Text for Reference Display

Fig. 140: Overlay Text for Reference Display
Overlay data can be enabled in this screen by selecting enabled. They are visible in Refer‐
ence Monitor/Display (Option).

05.19
If CLEARstent is used, make sure that “Overlay Text for Reference Display “ Image content
 1 & 2 “ is enabled in the mask. The reason for this is that the Image TEXT “ Preliminary
Results “ is displayed on the reference display while CLEARstent computation is in pro‐
gress, i.e., when a preliminary result of an CLEARstent Ref image is being displayed.

05.19
12.1.10 Overlay Text for Dormant Image

Fig. 141: Overlay Text for Dormant Image
The last image is kept on the monitor if radiation is stopped. A separate overlay text can
be configured for this LIH image.

05.19
Overlay data that are visible on the LIVE Monitor can be enabled in this screen by select‐
ing enabled.
The default configuration (enabled / disabled) depends on which System Type is config‐
ured with which options. Can be changed if the customer requests it.
12.1.11 System Calibration

Fig. 142: Image system, system calibration
n Image Display [1]

- Shutter Extra Pixels d:-12 [−20,20]
This is for correction of the opening of the electronic shutter. Default: -12
To open the shutter wider, a more negative value must be configured.
To determine the input values, see: ( Fluoroscopy Field Limitation and Electronic
Shutter Adjustment / Page 378)
The electronic shutter is adjusted so that the edges of the collimator plates are still just
 visible.
Changes here affect all zoom steps!
n Other Settings [1]

The range (min./max.) of the TOD is entered here, whereby the "Distance Measure‐
ment” with the Quantification Option can be used by the customer.
Tab. 25 System Calibration. Entry of "Quant min./max.”
Parameter designation Input value

Quant Minimum Table Object Distance d:0 [0,10] 0
Quant Maximum Table Object Distance d:40 [10,40] 40
12.1.12 QUANT PARAMETERS

This configuration item appears only if the Quantification option is installed.

05.19
Fig. 143: Quant parameters
n Format of stored Quant reports

When performing Quant from the EHC, the Create Report button can be configured to
create a normal or detailed report. In which format the Quant Report data will be stor‐
ed and whether it is also sent to the Network/Archive is configured here. Default: XA
- XA Image
- DICOM Structured report
- Both
n Automatic detection of ED frame for QCA3D
This works only when an ECG has been recorded.
The SW looks for the image with the highest contrast regarding LV area to back‐
ground.
Extra systoles are detected and beat(s) is (are) skipped. The first ED/ES is always skip‐
ped.
After entering the LV analysis and all prerequisites are met, an end-diastolic and the
appropriate end-systolic frame are selected automatically.
Yes The auto contour detection is used for QCA3D. Default: Yes
n Automatic detection of ED and ES frame for LVA

This works only when an ECG has been recorded.
The SW looks for the image with the highest contrast regarding LV area to back‐
ground.
Extra systoles are detected and beat(s) is (are) skipped. The first ED/ES is always skip‐
ped.
After entering the LV analysis and all prerequisites are met, an end-diastolic and the
appropriate end-systolic frame are selected automatically.
Yes The auto contour detection is used for LV. Default: Yes
n Position for Adjust C-Arm from ECC to drive to

Set one of these parameters here to define the target position when performing the
Adjust C-Arm from EHC to drive to... procedure.
- Current Model Position

05.19
- Optimal Next Projection/
12.1.13 Network Node: ...... / Offline Device: ......

Here the “Resize” of the different image types and the “Ready Processed” for each network node or
offline device are configured.
The service user can configure one network node and copy these settings and easily apply
them to another network node to save time. This is the purpose of the Copy button.
Fig. 144: Network Node

05.19
Fig. 145: Offline Device
Tab. 26 Processing steps per Network Node or Offline Device
Image Type Processing Range Default

Card Images, HeartSweep Images Ready Processed module 3/module 4/disabled disabled
and Ref Images ( Ready Processed
- Card scene images, HeartSweep Im‐ Images / Page 233)
ages and Reference Images created Resize enabled to 512/ enabled to enabled
from the CARD scene 1024/ disabled to 512
( Re‐
size / Page 235)
Rotational Images and Ref Images Ready Processed module 3/module 4/disabled disabled
- Dyna (Rotational) Images scene and ( Ready Processed
Reference Images created from the Images / Page 233)
scene Resize enabled to 512/ enabled to disabled
1024/ enabled to 12 bit/ disa‐
( Re‐
bled
size / Page 235)

05.19
Image Type Processing Range Default

Other Images and Ref Images Ready Processed module 3/module 4/disabled disabled
- Other (other than CARD) Images ( Ready Processed
scene and Reference Images created Images / Page 233)
from the scene Resize enabled to 512/ enabled to disabled
1024/disabled
( Re‐
size / Page 235)
Store Fluoros and Ref Images Ready Processed module 3/module 4/disabled disabled
- Store Fluoro image/scenes and Ref‐ ( Ready Processed
erence Images created from a Fluoro/ Images / Page 233)
Fluoro scene Resize enabled to 512/ enabled to enabled
1024/ disabled to 512
( Re‐
size / Page 235)
Store Monitor Ready Processed module 4 / disabled disabled
- Images created with the Store Moni‐ ( Ready Processed
tor function Images / Page 233)
Resize enabled to 512/ enabled to disabled
1024/ disabled
( Re‐
size / Page 235)
12.1.13.1 Ready Processed Images

This feature has been introduced to make the images look better on “other vendor’s” sys‐
tems. It is a method to display Artis one images with an identical impression on other
vendors' systems. (The processing parameters vary, depending on the configuration)
If images have a poor/wrong image impression on PACS, but Store Monitor images are
 displayed OK, then module4 should be implemented. (Store Monitor images have al‐
ready been processed, i.e. they are 'ready processed', with respect to “window” and
“edge enhancement”)
The image processing displayed by AXIS can be “burned” into the pixel data when the im‐
ages are sent to another network node. The service user has to configure this for every
network node.
Tab. 27 Ready processed images
Ready Pro‐ Gray scale Transformation Remarks

cessed ( Transforma‐
( Gray Scale / Page 234) tion / Page 234)
MOD SUB, incl. EE Window, Shutter Zoom, incl.
LUT AB, incl. incl. Invert Roam
pixel shift
disabled No No No n.a.

05.19
module 3 Yes No Yes released

module 4 Yes Yes Yes released
n Reasons for using Ready Processed

- Entire subtracted scenes can be sent to workstations that do not have advanced
subtraction postprocessing functions (e.g. Magic View).
- If a subtracted run is burned “Ready Processed” to a CD, Fastview and other DICOM
viewers can view it subtracted.
- Essentially, Artis one creates images, which have ““burned in”” all processing into
the image pixel data.
- This allows the image display for other, non-angiographic/-cardiac workstations to
be saved.
n Disadvantages of using Ready Processed images
- If images are sent that have been “Ready Processed”, the advanced postprocessing
features (e.g. Remask, Pixel Shift, etc.) can no longer be used on a Remote Worksta‐
tion that has these features.
12.1.13.2 Gray Scale

“Ready Processed” image means that the pixel data are re-sampled at the time of transfer
to include the following processing information in each frame of the image:
n Process steps:
a) Modality LUT correction performed on pixel data. The “Ready Processed” image
will be sent without modality LUT in the DICOM header. This ensures correct native
viewing of DSA scenes.
b) Subtraction is performed on pixel data using the correct mask frame if the stored
display mode is SUB. On subtracted images, additional pixel shift and Anatomical
Background (= AB) operations are performed on the pixel data.
c) Edge Enhancement (EE) operation is performed on the pixel data. The ready pro‐
cessed image should be sent with no information that would cause a receiving
workstation to perform Edge Enhancement again.
d) A Windowing operation is performed on the pixel data, including invert. The
“Ready Processed ” image is sent with an open window. The bit depth is retained
(i.e., a 10-bit image should remain a 10-bit image).
12.1.13.3 Transformation
n Process steps:
a) Shutter burned into the image (submit Shutter additional via DICOM shutter mod‐
ule).
b) Image Annotations (e.g. overlay graphics) are kept as overlay.
With VC14, the Module 4 also includes overlay graphics.

05.19
c) Spatial Transformation Flip is performed on the pixel data. This transformation is

performed by syngo. Spatial Transformation Zoom, including roam, is performed
on the pixel data.
 Spatial transformation also leads to a 1024x1024 image (as displayed on monitor).

This is also valid when resize 1024 is not selected.
d) Display text is not “burned” into the image
If “Quant” reports are sent to a destination or transferred to an offline device for which

“Ready Processed” is configured, the reports will not be processed!
They will always be transferred also as 1024x1024 12-bit regardless of the resize config‐
uration.
12.1.13.4 Resize
Here, it is defined whether the particular network nodes are to be enabled for Resizing .
12.1.14 Completed Flag Handling

Fig. 146: Image system, completed flag handling
If enabled is selected here, a “Flag” is set for the particular allocated image type. The
“Flag” that has been set will then be evaluated using the “Auto Transfer rules”. Setting up
the “Auto Transfer rules” is described under “Rules for Autotransfer”. ( Autotransfer
Tabcard / Page 331)
12.1.15 SCP Configuration

The SCP configuration is for the Worklist SCP
The Worklist SCP is used to provide the patient’s demographic data information via DICOM
Worklist to a connected OEM system, e.g. Terason or Volcano.
Any connected system can obtain this information via the DICOM Worklist functionality.

05.19
The information in the Image System Configuration (SCP Configuration) needs to be

changed if the OEM partner uses different from the configuration provided by default.
This is done e.g. for the "WORKLIST_SCU_AE_TITLE", because this is the AE used by the
OEM to identify itself. In most cases, the other parameters will be unchanged.
Fig. 147: SCP configuration
E.g. Patient is registered at Artis one (via worklist, Sensis or locally). Then a IVUS system
can pull a worklist from the Artis one. This worklist contains exactly one patient, the ac‐
quisition patient. Default: All text boxes are blank (no text)
Additional configuration parameters are available that have to be configured:
1. a) In the Configuration under DICOM > HIS/RIS > Local AETs the parameter Select
HIS/RIS Local AET. ( Local AETs / Page 70)
b) In the User Configuration Panel under Patient Registration the parameters on the
tab card HIS/RIS (e.g. Modality, AET, From RIS, MPPS node)
n WORKLIST_SCU_MODALITY
Enter XA for the Artis one modality here (max. 2 characters)
n WORKLIST_SCU_AE_TITLE (Please do not enter ’ \ ’ character)
Enter AE Title (max. 16 characters)
n WORKLIST_SCP_AE_TITLE (Please do not enter ’ \ ’ character)
Enter AE Title (max. 16 characters)
n WORKLIST_SCP_PORT_NUMBER
Enter the Port Number 3000 for the Artis one modality here (Range: 2000....65535)
12.1.16 Flexible pixel shift (FPS) grid size

Factory setting; do not change! Default: 32
Fig. 148: Configuration, Components, Image System, Flexible Pixel Shift (FPS), Grid Size

05.19
12.1.17 AXIOM Monitoring Parameter

Fig. 149: Image system, AXIOM monitoring parameters beginning with the VC14G SW
n Temperature Monitoring Sensor For AXIS Container
On Temperature Monitoring for AXIS Container enabled. Default: On
n Temperature Monitoring Interval for AXIS Container [1.60]

Default: 10
n AXIS Container Max Temperature [0,100]
Default: 37
n Temperature Monitoring Sensor For IVS CPU
On Temperature Monitoring for IVS CPU enabled. Default: On
n Temperature Monitoring Sensor For IVS Mother Board
On Temperature Monitoring for IVS Mother Board enabled. Default: On
n Speed Monitoring Sensor For IVS System Fan
On System Fan Speed Monitoring for IVS enabled. Default: On
n Voltage Monitoring Sensor For IVS Battery
On Voltage Monitoring for IVS battery enabled. Default: Off
n Voltage Monitoring Interval for IVS Battery [1,60]

Default: 10

05.19
n IVS Battery Min Voltage [0,5000]

Default: 2549
12.1.18 OGPE Configuration Parameter

Fig. 150: Configuration of the OGPE parameter
n Configure Password for OGPE dialog
Yes Password for OrGan Program Editor (OGPE) enabled. Default: No
Fig. 151: Changing the password
When the password is enabled, it is possible for the customer to change the password.
 If the password is lost, the CSE can reset it to the default. To reset the password to the
default, the CSE first has to open a service session. Default password: Artis
12.1.19 Configure Exam Protocol Transfer

Fig. 152: Configuring the Exam Protocol transfer
Transfer Exam Protocol As

n Neither Dose SR objects or Exam Protocol XA image objects
Exam Protocol is not transferred at all. (Neither DOSE Structured Report Object (SR)
nor Exam Protocol XA image object).

05.19
n Dose SR objects
Transfer of the Exam Protocol as a DICOM X-Ray Radiation Dose SR (Structured Report)
only. This is Default.
If the customer’s PACS cannot handle DICOM “Dose SR” objects, it will reject the PACS
images with the Dose Reports!
n Dose SR objects and Exam Protocol XA image objects
The exam protocol will be sent as two different objects, X-Ray Radiation Dose SR and
XA image object.
If the customer’s PACS cannot handle DICOM “Dose SR” objects, it will reject the PACS
images with the Dose Reports!
n Exam Protocol XA image objects
Transfer of Exam Protocol as an XA image object only.
Configure this if the customer’s PACS cannot handle “Dose SR” objects, but XA images
only
12.1.20 Video Capture

Here the color level of captured images can be enhanced separately for each Video
Source (1....4).
This can be necessary after the user changes the Video Capture Layout under “Artis one
Options” (Artis one - Configuration Panel > Display Layout Configurator) and the captured
images then look different.
Configure enabled or disabled (trial and error method) to find out with what setting the
image looks better.
The Video Capture config parameter is always present.
 But this config parameter is effective only if the Multimodality Viewing option in the
Artis One System Configuration is set to Yes. ( Multimodality Viewing / Page 131)

05.19
Fig. 153: Configuration Panel with Artis one
Reason why the captued images can look different from the original images:
When capturing Video Images, the resulting Image Pixel Data are subject to an automated
scaling process.
Due to this, scaling the captured images can look different from the original images, e.g.:
- the general image impression can be changed
- lines are thinner than before or even disappear
- colors fade
Fig. 154: Video Capture

05.19
n Color Level Enhancement (Video Source 1)
enabled Color Level Enhancement for Video Capture with Source 1 is possible.
disabled No Color Level Enhancement for Video Capture with Source 1 possible.
Default: disabled.
Default: disabled.
Default: disabled.
Default: disabled.
12.1.21 C.A.R.E settings

Fig. 155: C.A.R.E. settings
n CARE POSITION --- Initial power-up state
enabled Care Position is automatically activated after booting the system.
n CARE POSITION --- Angular range (degrees)

Input Value Range: 15˚ to 90˚
This is where the angulation range of the CARE position is entered. Default: 90˚
With Artis one Card systems: 45˚

05.19
n CARE (graphics) --- display timeout (seconds)

Input Value Range: 1s to 60s
With this parameter, the tracking time, C.A.R.E collimation as well as the graphic
collimation are configured in the image. Default: 5s
If collimation of the collimator plates is changed in the Fluoro Pause, the outlines of
the current collimator plate positions appear as a graphic in the LIH image. The cus‐
tomer can collimate without using radiation for orientation. This is used to save dose.
The same applies for collimation with C.A.R.E.
- Starting the C.A.R.E/Graphic Overlay:
Immediately if the position of the collimator plates is changed.
- Ending the C.A.R.E/Graphic Overlay:
Following expiration of the time programmed here, after ending collimation,
i.e., after the collimator plates have no longer been moved.

05.19
Artis one Components (2), Other Components 13 243
13.1 CSF_A
The SIO RTC Common Software Function can be configured here.
CSF = Common Software Function
SIO = Serial Input Output of the CCOM Component.
CCOM = is the name of the new component which is installed instead of the RTC formerly
used.
Procedure for making Changes: ( Doing changes under Artis One System/Compo‐
nents / Page 358)

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Artis One Components CSF A.
 The “Configuration of CSF A” screen appears:
Fig. 156: CSF A
3. Select (highlight) the desired configuration point in the “Select Group To Configure”
selection window and then click on Config in the “Action Bar” to start its configura‐
tion.
the screen

05.19
244 13 Artis one Components (2), Other Components
13.1.1 SIO
Fig. 157: CSF A, SIO for Artis one
Values changed here must be made valid to be used by the CCOM/system:

n Changing any of the “CSF_A” parameters in the service menu (e.g. changing "Se‐
lect QRS trigger" from YES to NO or vice versa):
a) The CCOM has to be powered off and back on after saving and exiting the service
 menu (black power button on the CCOM).
b) Then SW/FW needs a system power OFF/ON to load the new configuration.
n Changing one of the system config parameters in the service menu:
Perform a complete system power OFF/ON to make sure that all the parameters are
properly accepted by the various SW/FW modules).

05.19
n Select QRS trigger

It is preferable to configure the CCOM SIO to no. ( ECG Recording Sys‐
tem / AXA6-000.815.03)
yes The QRS trigger is evaluated and created internally by the new ECG module. The
external QRS trigger is not locked in and used.
The OEM ECG system can provide an external digital trigger, but is not required
to, since the Artis one is capable of generating the R-peak trigger internally by an‐
alyzing the provided analog ECG signal.
The internally generated trigger was developed and validated for uncritical heart
rhythm (sinus rhythm) only. This means it may not be applied for a disturbed
heart rhythm. The customer cannot expect that the performance is identical to
that of an ECG system such as Sensis/Dräger.
This parameter is used to activate the new functions of the Enhanced ECG-Mod‐
ule. If this parameter is set to the default value no, the new Enhanced ECG-Mod‐
ule acts like the old ECG Module.
no The external QRS trigger is locked in and used. The QRS trigger is not evaluated
and created internally by the new ECG module. Default: no
This is the preferred solution!
Generating a digital trigger from the analog ECG curve should be configured only
if the ECG device does not provide a digital trigger (QRS pulse).
n Invert selected trigger

The CCOM SIO is configured to yes. ( ECG Recording System / AXA6-000.815.03)
yes The trigger signal is inverted.

This parameter is used to activate the new functions of the Enhanced ECG-Mod‐
ule. If this parameter is set to the default value, the new Enhanced ECG-Module
acts like the old ECG Module.
no The trigger signal is not inverted. Default: no
n Select digital trigger

Select here which input signal is to be used for the trigger. ( ECG Recording Sys‐
tem / AXA6-000.815.03)
Choices: ISO_IN1, ISO_IN2, DTTL_IN1, DTTL_IN2 Default: ISO_IN1
This CCOM (A) SIO for the new ECG interface HW is configured to:
a) ISO_IN1, if a Sensis ECG system is connected.
b) DTTL_IN1, if an OEM ECG system is connected. The CSE must verify this with the
OEM ECG System Data sheets.
n Monitoring RTC temperatures & voltage
The CCOM temperatures and voltage monitoring can be switched on and off. Default:
on.

05.19
n Monitoring interval temperatures & voltages

The CCOM temperatures and voltages monitoring interval can be configured here.
Value range: 1.......60. Default: 10. (=10 minutes)
n Activation of MD overtemp high timer
off 1. First (lower) excess temperature threshold passed:

The system provides only a message to the user.
2. If the second (higher) excess temperature threshold is passed:
a) The system provides only a message to the user.
on 1. First (lower) excess temperature threshold passed:

The system provides only a message to the user.
2. If the second (higher) excess temperature threshold is passed:
a) The system starts a gradual shutdown of the system with a count-
down of 30 minutes before power off.
b) The system generates a user message which displays the remaining
time until shutdown (update every minute) as long as excess tempera‐
ture conditions exist.
c) The system shuts down when the count-down timer has expired.
n EASI board installed

EASI = Extended Appliances System Interface
yes The EASI board is installed in the back of the stand column. Default: yes
e.g. the stand column back proxy switch plate ( Column Back side Proxy : Yes/
No / Page 262) is connected to this board. See also: ( Column Contact Safety
Device / AXA6-000.815.03)
no The EASI board is not installed. This is only for factory use!

05.19
13.2 OSD
OSD = On-screen Setup Display
nents / Page 358)

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Artis One Components OSD.
 The Configuration of OSD 1 screen appears:
Fig. 158: OSD
3. Select (highlight) the desired configuration item in the “Select Group To Configure”
tion.
the screen

05.19
The OSD Config Parameter settings can be transferred from one Artis one system to an‐

other Artis one system using a data carrier.
To do this, click on “Configuration > Artis One System EHC/OSD Import Export” and fol‐
low the software dialog. ( EHC/OSD Import Export / Page 182)
13.2.1 general device settings

Fig. 159: General Device Settings
n enable logging of user selections
yes Whenever the user selects a button on the EHC, the information that this button
was selected is written into the event log. Default: no
13.2.2 Local OSD parameters

Fig. 160: Local OSD parameters
n idle time before automatically closing the menu

How long the system must be idle before the menu is automatically closed is config‐
ured here.
Possible choices: 5 sec, 10 sec or 30 sec. Default: 10 sec

05.19
n display time of no data dialog
 Do not change the default setting.
Value range: 0,5 sec......10 sec in 0,5 sec steps. Default: 3 sec
With this item you configure how long the no data dialog popup
( Fig. 161 Page 249) will appear on the display:
Fig. 161: No data dialog popup
This popup dialog appears on the display if there are no pages that can be viewed in
the OSD, and then the OSD is activated. Otherwise, there would be no visible change
for the user on the display, which would be confusing.
n enable different speed levels for horizontal scroll
yes Different speed levels for horizontal scrolling are enabled. Default: yes
no Different speed levels for horizontal scrolling are disabled.
n enable different speed levels for vertical scrolling
yes Different speed levels for vertical scrolling are enabled. Default: yes
no Different speed levels for vertical scrolling are enabled.
n enable performance reporting
yes Performance reporting is enabled. Default: yes

REP errors are written to the event log.
no Performance reporting is disabled.
n time to wait for thumbnails response

Possible choices: 50 msec, 100 msec or 150 msec. Default: 100 msec

05.19
How long the OSD waits for the response to the “thumbnails” (pre-view pictures) on
the display is configured here.
This is only relevant for 3D (OSD pages MPR and VRT).
13.2.3 OSD Animation parameters

Fig. 162: OSD Animation parameters
n enable animated horizontal scrolling
yes Animated horizontal scrolling is enabled. Default: yes

no Animated horizontal scrolling is disabled.
n enable animated vertical scrolling
yes Animated vertical scrolling is enabled. Default: yes

no Animated vertical scrolling is disabled.
13.2.4 Local DDIS parameters

Fig. 163: Local DDIS parameters
n Display time of collision help graphics

n Display time of standard window

05.19
This setting is only effective if the next list point Display Stand/Table Popup is config‐
ured to yes.
The “standard window” is the “Stand Window” popup that appear on the display if
system movements are performed.
How long the “Stand Window” is shown on the display after movements are finished
is configured here.
n Display Stand/Table Popup
yes During stand or table movements, the current stand/table positions appear on
the Exam Room display. Default: yes
The Stand Window is shown on the display during movement.
The setting of the previous list item Display time of standard window is in ef‐
fect.
no No current stand positions are displayed in the exam room during movement.
13.2.5 Sensis related configuration items

This configuration item appears only if the item Sensis (key) ( ECG-System / Page 138)
and the item Sensis Type enhanced ( Sensis Type / Page 139) are configured in the
“System Config”.
Fig. 164: Sensis-related configuration items
13.2.5.1 number of Physio remote monitors

The Sensis ECG system has two separate image outputs for remote monitors.
The number of remote monitors installed to display these two images in the Artis one
examination room is configured here:
Display on the 1st Monitor Display on the 2nd Monitor

Always the Realtime ECG Curve Always the Dialogue Page for operation, evalua‐
tion, reports or display of saved curves

05.19
Tab. 28 Number of Physio Remote Monitors
number of Physio Description

remote monitors
1 The additional softkey switch screens is available in the OSD to
select that one of the two monitor image outputs of the Sensis is
displayed on one monitor.
The Sensis is controlled with this softkey switch screens to toggle
between the two possible images at one of its outputs.
2 No extra soft key is available in the OSD. Both images are sent out
simultaneously by the Sensis to two outputs.
13.2.5.2 show peripheral sites
yes Peripheral sites are shown.

no Peripheral sites are not shown. Default: no
13.2.6 OSD Page - General

Fig. 165: OSD Page, General

05.19
n display page
yes The OSD “General” page is available. Default: yes

no The OSD “General” page is not available.
n Page Item 1.....17

The functionalies available at each particular page location (Page Item 1.....17) are
configured here.
The functionalities shown in the screen shot are available for every Page Item.
If a functionality item is marked with *, it is optional and is not installed. Configure as
required.

05.19
13.2.7 OSD Page - Native

Fig. 166: OSD Page, Native

05.19
n display page
yes The OSD “Native” page is available. Default: yes

no The OSD “Native” page is not available.

configured here.
required.

05.19
13.2.8 OSD Page - DSA

Fig. 167: OSD Page, DSA
n display page
yes The OSD “DSA” page is available. Default: yes

no The OSD “DSA” page is not available.

05.19

configured here.
required.
13.2.9 OSD Page - Sensis

Sensis = Newcor
Fig. 168: OSD Page, Sensis
n display page
yes The OSD “Sensis” page is available.

no The OSD “Sensis” page is not available. Default: no

05.19

configured here.
required.
13.2.10 OSD Page - MPR

MPR = Multi Planar Reconstruction
n display page
yes The OSD “MPR” page is available. Default: yes

MPR visualization is the well-established display technique for scan slices.
no The OSD “MPR” page is not available.
13.2.11 OSD Page - MPR 2

MPR = Multi Planar Reconstruction
n display page
yes The OSD “MPR 2” page is available. Default: yes

MPR visualization is the well-established display technique for scan slices.
no The OSD “MPR 2” page is not available.
13.2.12 OSD Page VRT

VRT = Volume Rendering Technique
n display page
yes The OSD “VRT” page is available. Default: yes

VRT displays CT, MR, NM and conventional angiography volume data sets in 3D
with excellent quality to the finest detail and provides advanced editing.
no The OSD “VRT” page is not available.
13.2.13 OSD Page VRT 2

VRT = Volume Rendering Technique

05.19
n display page
yes The OSD “VRT 2” page is available. Default: yes

VRT displays CT, MR, NM and conventional angiography volume data sets in 3D
with excellent quality to the finest detail and provides advanced editing.
no The OSD “VRT 2” page is not available.
13.2.14 OSD Page Workflow

n display page
yes The OSD “Workflow” page is available. Default: yes

syngo® Workflow MLR1 drives the radiological workflow from order entry to im‐
age and report distribution.
no The OSD “Workflow” page is not available.
13.2.15 OSD Page - Exam

Fig. 169: OSD Page, Exam
n display page
yes The OSD “Exam” page (= Examination) is available. Default: yes

no The OSD “Exam” page is not available.

05.19
n Page Item 1.....5

The functionalies available at each particular page location (Page Item 1.....5) are con‐
figured here.
required.
13.2.16 OSD Page - Roadmap

Fig. 170: OSD Page, Roadmap
n display page
yes The OSD “Roadmap” page is available. Default: yes

no The OSD “Roadmap” page is not available.
n Page Item 1.....4

The functionalies available at each particular page location (Page Item 1.....4) are con‐
figured here.
required.

05.19
13.3 Stand
The stand parameters can be configured here.
nents / Page 358)

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Artis One Components Stand.
 The “Configuration of Stand Control Unit” screen appears:
Fig. 171: Stand Control Unit (SCU)
3. Select (highlight) the desired configuration item in the “Select Group To Configure”
tion.
the screen

05.19
13.3.1 Collision Help Display
Yes The display of “Collision Help” is enabled on the DDIS XP. Default: No
If a mechanical collision of the system occurs during a movement, a “Help ar‐
row” appears in the DDIS XP that is shown in the display on the DCS. This arrow
advises the customer about what movement must be made in which direction
to move the system out of the collision.
The time for how long the Display collision help graphics is displayed is con‐
figured in the OSD > Local DDIS parameters config. item. ( Local DDIS pa‐
rameters / Page 250)
13.3.2 Max. speed in patient safety zone
50% The speed in the patient safety zone is 50% of the max. speed
30% The speed in the patient safety zone is 30% of the max. speed. Default: 30%
13.3.3 Column Back side Proxy : Yes/No

This is a hidden parameter and therefore is not shown to the CSE!
Yes/No is automatically set by the Tune Up SW, depending on the Tune Up result.
An optional contact safety switch on the stand column is required if the stand is installed
in an extremely small room and therefore the head-end wall safety distance must be de‐
creased to <500 mm. In this case, an optional contact safety switch must be installed on
the stand column cover during the installation and startup of the system. Refer to the In‐
stallation Startup Document.
The “Column Back side Proxy” configuration is used by the Stand Tune-up SW to config‐
ure whether or not this optional stand column cover with contact safety switch is instal‐
led on the stand column.

05.19
n Column Back side Proxy
No Standard installation, the room size is sufficient. The head-end wall safety dis‐
tance is ≥ 500 mm.
The contaft safety switch is NOT configured. The size of smallest zone is 500
mm and movement is stopped (i.e. stop zone)
Default: No
Yes Installation in an extremely small room, the room size is insufficient. The
head-end wall safety distance is <500 mm.
The contaft safety switch is configured. The size of smallest zone is 310 mm
with a speed of 50% (no stop!)
The movement is stopped if the additional contact safety switch is reached/
pressed.
IMPORTANT:
The parameter here is set automatically by the Tune Up SW to Yes after a suc‐
cessful proxy switch test of the Column Back side Proxy switch.
If the proxy switch test was not successful, the No parameter is set automati‐
cally.
The proxy switch test is started in the Service SW under: “Tune Up > Compo‐
nent Adjustment Stand > Gantry Column Proximity”.
13.3.4 Stand Test Configuration

Fig. 172: Stand Test Configuration
n Active Brake Test

Yes. The brake test is mandatory.
n Activate Force Sensor Calibration
No Set brake test without force sensor calibration.

Yes Set brake test together with force sensor calibration.
Recommend: Yes

05.19
13.3.5 Safety Parameters

The number of hours of accumulated power-on time of the Artis one stand after which
the SW will request the user to perform the “Brake Test” procedure for the axes/move‐
ments is configured here.
n Brake test request timer [hour]
Range: 1.......648. Default: 648 (27 days).
This parameter must be set to 600 (=25 days)!
The detailed description of the function is located in the Operator Manual > Function‐
al and Safety > Checking the brakes
When the number of hours the stand power-on time (hours) configured here is
reached, the SW will request the user to perform the “Brake Test” procedure for the
axes/movements.
The following message will pop up to request the “Brake Test”:
“Stand test necessary within # days”
The customer now has 5 days to perform the brake test. If the brake test is not per‐
formed within this time frame, following message will pop up for the customer:
“Reduced stand/table speed, Stand Test necessary”
The system movements are now possible only at low (safety) speed.
If the “Brake test” is performed successfully, the stand will move again at normal
speed. If the “Brake test” is performed and fails, the stand will be blocked and further
movements are not possible until the brake problem is resolved.
13.3.6 General Parameters

Fig. 173: General Parameters (Stand)
n II/FD automatic backoff
Yes If the FD contact safety device is activated, the FD moves in the opposite direc‐
tion (away from the patient). Prerequisites: The DMG is pressed and the end
position has not yet been reached. Default: Yes
No The collision must be eliminated using manually controlled movements.

05.19
n Manual Table Top panning, ignore collision calculator
Yes With table longitudinal movement in the direction of the C-Arm, the movement
of the tabletop is braked automatically to avoid a collision with the C-Arm. The
brakes are then released again automatically. This function can be switched off
here. Default: No
No Table longitudinal movement is stopped by the collision calculator.
n Movement Monitoring (Default: stop + 1 second)
stop + 1 second All axis movements are written to the Artis log file.
Default: stop + 1 second
No Monitoring is disabled.
13.3.7 General Drive Parameters

Fig. 174: General Drive Parameters
n Basic joystick movements: Cranial/Caudal or Longitudinal/Transversal

The parameter which is configured here is used as the default SCM joystick movement
functionality after the system is powered on.
During the examination, it can be switched ( 2/Fig. 175 Page 266) by the user to an‐
other functionality (toggle). However, if a certain system idle time is exceeded (limit

05.19
specified by the SW), this functionality will be automatically canceled and the default
parameter which is configured here applies again.
The setting here depends on the customer's prefered working method.
The goal is that the majority of the movements that the customer uses should work
with the default functionality by deflecting the joystick while simultaneously pressing
the DMG, without the customer’s having to switch to another functionality.
Default: Cranial/Caudal
Fig. 175: SCM joystick functionalities
(1) Dead man's switch

(2) Switching buttons (toggle function)
(3) FD Up/Down switches

05.19
Cranial/Caudal The C-Arm Cranial/Caudal movement functions are se‐

lected as the default after power is swtiched on. The
SCM joystick must be deflected and the DMG pressed at
the same time to perform these movements.
C-Arm Longitudinal/Transverse: First these functions
must be selected at the SCM ( 2/Fig. 175 Page 266),
then the SCM joystick must be deflected and the DMG
must be pressed at the same time to perform these
movements. Be aware of the system idle time!
Longitudinal/Transversal The C-Arm Longitudinal/Transverse movement func‐
tions are selected as the default after power is switched
on. The SCM joystick must be deflected and the DMG
pressed at the same time to perform these movements.
C-Arm Cranial/Caudal: First these functions must be se‐
lected at the SCM ( 2/Fig. 175 Page 266), then the
SCM joystick must be deflected and the DMG must be
pressed at the same time to perform these movements.
Be aware of the system idle time!
13.3.8 Room Configuration

The Artis one system has collision monitoring between the system (floor stand, table) and
the walls of the examination room. If the distance to the wall is less than 500 mm, motor‐
ized movement is blocked. When calculating the collision zones, the system assumes that
this is a rectangular room.
Fig. 176: Room configuration
Attention: Beginning with Artis one SW VA10C, the ranges for the minimum wall distan‐
ces will change:
x1, the new planned range is: [....,5000]
 x2, the new planned range is: [....,5000]
y1, the new planned range is: [....,5000]
y2, the new planned range is: [....,5000]
Determining the Input Parameters:

05.19
To determine the collision values, the distances from the table base to the room walls
(without cover) must be measured (in mm).
This procedure is described in the Startup Instructions for the Artis one system. ( Config‐
uration of the Room Size / AXA6-000.815.03)
 WARNING
Room size is incorrectly configured.
Injury to personnel or damage to the system possible.
 Following installation and following service work, check the collision zones.
hm_serv_CheckStandPositions
13.3.9 HeartSweep Trajectories
 Do not make changes here unless instructed/authorized by a (factory) specialist, UI, KB,
etc.
The HeartSweep Trajectories are configured here for Stand User Positions #41 through
#50 which are used for the 3D applications.
Changes here are made by the SIEMENS specialist in cooperation with the customer.

05.19
Fig. 177: HeartSweep Trajectories, Part 1

05.19
Fig. 178: HeartSweep Trajectories, Part 2
13.3.10 Perivision
Fig. 179: Perivision
These values can be altered on customer request!

05.19
n Step width (0.1mm, default 1300) [0, 3000]

Configuration of the Peri stepping movement with FD 26x30 Landscape format. De‐
fault: 1300
Detector Size Peri step length Input value

26x30 cm (Midsize Trixell FD) 165 mm 1650
n Second step width (portrait) (0.1mm, default 1500) [0, 3000]

Configuration of the Peri Step Movement with the 26x30 FD Portrait format. Default:
1500
Detector Size Peri step length Input value

26x30 cm (Midsize Trixell FD) (por‐ 180 mm 1800
trait)
n Minimal step width (0.1mm, default 825) [0, 3000]

This is the minimum required Peri step width that must be performed in the last step
of the test movement so that this “end position” is accepted and saved as the last
step.
Normally all step positions are moved through at the configured step advance speed.
It is possible that only the last step is not completely performed because either the
end of the table longitudinal movement has been reached or the customer does not
wish to completely perform the step because of the location of the object.
The standard value is always 1/2 step width. Default: 825
Detector Size Minimum Peri step length Input value

26x30 cm (Midsize Trixell FD) 82.5 mm 825
13.3.11 Default ISO Center

Configure the Stand Default ISO-center here that is required for the X and Y Directions.
Fig. 180: Default ISO Center
n X
Value range: -1000 to 2000 Default: 500

05.19
n Y
Value range: -2000 to 2000. Default: 150
13.3.12 Preprogramming timeouts/parameters

Fig. 181: Pre-programming timeouts/parameters
n Handsfree speed system positions (0... 100%) [40,100]

This is where the speed is configured that is used with “Handsfree” movement
( Footswitch/Handswitch / Page 149) into a system position. Default: 70
n Handsfree speed user positions (0... 100%) [40,100]
This is where the speed is configured that is used with “Handsfree” movement
( Footswitch/Handswitch / Page 149) into a user position. Default: 70
n User timeout without requesting movement (s) [10,1200]
If the user program is not performed within the specified time, the DDIS switches back
to the normal display. Default: 30 s
n User timeout for manual movement (s) [5,3600]
If the manual movement is not performed within the specified time, the DDIS
switches back to the normal display. Default: 300 s
n II/FD position increment (cm) 0=max. position [0,30]
If the unit is moved in the “Automatic drive”, the FD receptor moves into the outside
end position. This position can be limited. Default: 0 cm
n Save path planner positions to file
No Always configure No here when the system is in normal use. Default No

Yes Activate this function only if you receive explicit instructions from the factory
to do so! (e.g. Speed Info, CS HSC, CS PS, LAB, etc.) The Path Planner writes
“Traces” into a Trace File in a defined folder; this results in different run time be‐
haviors!! These traces are for the developer in the LAB for fault analysis when trou‐
bleshooting a Path Planner malfunction.

05.19
13.3.13 Patient Transfer Region
Parameter Possible values Default

Receptor not checked (0) or 10 cm not checked (0)
Gantry Long. not checked (0) or 10 cm 10 cm
Gantry Transverse not checked (0) or 10 cm 10 cm
Gantry Lift not checked n.a. (value fixed)
13.3.14 Sys Pos - Patient Transfer Position

Factory setting; do not change!
Position Text/values permitted to be typed in [6] Default

Table Transverse ASIS or a value [0.1 mm] [6] ASIS
Table Long. ASIS or a value [0.1 mm] [6] ASIS
(=Table Longitudinal)
Table Lift ASIS1, MAX2, MIN3, ISOC4 or a value [0.1mm] [6] MIN
Table Rotation ASIS or a value [0.01°] [6] ASIS
1. ASIS: With stand movements, the table holds the position AS it IS

2. MAX : With stand movements, the table moves to maximum position
3. MIN : With stand movements, the table moves to minimum position
4. ISOC : With stand movements, the table moves to Isocenter
 If Table Lift is incorrectly configured as ASIS, the brake test may fail.
13.3.15 Sys Pos - Head Side

Head Side: stand position is at the patient’s head end.

05.19

Table Lift ASIS1, MAX2, MIN3, ISOC4 or a value [0.1mm] [6] ISOC

13.3.16 Sys Pos - Parking position


Table Lift ASIS1, MAX2, MIN3, ISOC4 or a value [0.1mm] [6] MIN

13.3.17 Sys Pos - Left Side Position

Left Side: stand position is on the patient’s left side.


13.3.18 Sys Pos - Right Side Position Table Rotated

Right Side: stand position is on the patient’s right side.

05.19


13.3.19 Sys Pos - OR Position



13.3.20 Sys Pos - Peri Position




05.19
13.4 Collimator
The collimator configuration depends on the system configuration (e.g. the selected FD
has an effect on the Bypass parameter and the FD format).
nents / Page 358)

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Artis one Components Collimator.
 The “Configuration of Collimator Control Unit A” screen appears:
Fig. 182: Collimator Control Unit A
tion.
4. Make the configuration changes as desired and select “OK” to save the changes and
exit the screen
13.4.1 User Interface

Fig. 183: Collimator, User Interface

05.19
Configurable items under Configuration of Group User Interface.

1. Behavior of the collimator in case of zoom change
stay unchanged
If “stay unchanged” is configured: When there is a change in the zoom, there is no
change of the plate opening. Only the plate pair that touches the “edge of the im‐
age” is moved in when there is a zoom change.
Fig. 184: Collimator behavior with configuration of "stay unchanged"

05.19
open to maximum
If “open to maximum” is configured: When there is a change in the zoom, the
plates move to the max. opening.
Fig. 185: Collimator behavior with configuration of "open to maximum"

05.19
stay unchanged if moved

If “stay unchanged if moved” is configured: When there is a change in the zoom, there is no
change of the plate opening. Only the plate pair that touches the “edge of the image” is moved
in when there is a zoom change. However if there is a switch back to a larger format, the plate
pair previously moved in will “stick” at the edge of the image.
Fig. 186: Collimator behavior with configuration of "stay unchanged if moved"
2. Longitudinal speed for the joysticks [ mm/s]

The collimation blades longitudinal (vertical/horizontal) speed can be entered in the
range from 0 mm/sec. to 150 mm/sec. Default: 150 mm/s

05.19
3. Rotational speed for the joysticks [ °/ s ]

The collimation blades rotation speed can be entered in the range from 0 /s to 40 °/
sec. Default: 40
13.4.2 FD Format M
Fig. 187: Collimator, FD Format M
The collimator opening for all zoom formats is set at the factory.
Adjustment by the service technician is necessary only if there is a replacement of the col‐
limator or the FD detector or if the customer requests this.
To determine the input values, see: ( Fluoroscopy Field Limitation and Electronic Shut‐
ter Adjustment / Page 378)

05.19
 It is absolutely necessary to observe country-specific regulations!
CAUTION: If the maximum opening is incorrectly configured for Zoom 0:

the collimator plate opening in the collimator can be larger than the diameter of the FD
detector. Radiation can pass unhindered by the lead shielding of the detector into the
area of the system.
 Thus personnel will be exposed to direct radiation if they are in the direct radiation field
behind the FD detector.
Therefore adjust the max. collimator opening with all Zoom formats so that the edges of
the collimator plates are still visible in the area of the image and are also not completely
covered by the electronic shutter.
CAUTION: If the maximum opening for zoom formats is incorrectly configured:

the collimator plates can either be outside of the visible range of the image or complete‐
ly covered by the electronic shutter. The customer cannot see the actual size of the colli‐
mated radiation field and not if there are any malfunctions of the collimator.
 Thus the patient will receive a higher radiation dose than necessary, because a portion
of the radiation field does not produce an image, i.e., cannot be used for diagnostic pur‐
poses.
Therefore adjust the max. collimator opening with all Zoom formats so that the edges of

05.19
13.5 Angiomatic
nents / Page 358)

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Artis One Components Angiomatic.
 The “Configuration of Angiomatic A” screen appears:
Fig. 188: Angiomatic
 There are no parameters available with service level 7.
3. Select Exit in the “Action Bar” to close this configuration.

05.19
13.6 System Controller

nents / Page 358)

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Artis One Components System Controller.
Fig. 189: System Controller
3. Select (highlight) the desired configuration point in the “Select Group To Config‐
ure”selection window and then click on Config in the “Action Bar” to start its configu‐
ration.
the screen
13.6.1 StartupValues for SystemController

Fig. 190: Startup Values for System Controller
n StartupValue for Fluoroprogram
first Following system bootup, the first fluoro program in the default Exam Set will
be selected automatically (normally the lowest dose) and will be used.
second Following system bootup, the second fluoro program in the default Exam Set
will be selected automatically (normally higher dose) and will be used. Default:
second

05.19
n Block radiation
always Following system bootup, triggering radiation is blocked. The user

can cancel the blockage of radiation by pressing the corresponding
button on the EHC or IVS. Default: always
in transfer position Following system bootup, triggering radiation is blocked if the
stand system is in the transfer position. The user can cancel the
blockage of radiation by pressing the corresponding button on the
EHC or IVS or by moving the stand system out of the transfer posi‐
tion.
n Fluoro Timer Limit in min [1,5]

Default: 5 (= 5 min.)
n does the fl timer reset with each fluoro
Yes The fluro timer is reset with each fluoro.

No The fluoro timer is not reset with each fluoro. Default: No
13.6.2 Audible warnings

n Fluoro timer
Observe country-specific regulations!!!
Yes An audible warning signal sounds when the fluoro timer expires. Default: Yes
n Heat units
For warranty reasons, it is not permitted to switch off the audible warning signal
for the “Heat units”!
Yes There is an audible warning signal when the configured tube-dependent

threshold is reached (e.g. 74% for MEGALIX CAT+)
Default: Yes
No The warning signal is switched off. Never switch off!
n High contrast fluoro
Yes An audible warning signal sounds with HCF. Default: Yes

Observe country-specific regulations!
The setting must be “Yes” for systems in the USA (DHHS)!

05.19
n Collision detection
Yes An audible warning signal sounds when the collision zone is reached. Default: Yes
n Safety Zone
Yes An audible warning signal (sonar sound) sounds to signal that a unit movement
has been made inside of a safety zone (=patient envelope). Default: Yes
n End of acquisition
Yes An audible warning signal sounds at the end of a scene (end of radiation with
Acquisition). Default: Yes
 Observe country-specific regulations!
n Position reached with automatic drive
Yes An audible warning signal sound when an “Direct Position” or “User Position”
that was selected from memory and has been reached. Default: Yes
n Speech command recognized
Yes An audible warning signal sounds to confirm to the customer that a language
command that has been given was recognized.
Not used for Artis one!
n Air Kerma Multi-Treshold Alert

This configuration parameter appears only if the “Skindose Multi-Treshold Alert” con‐
fig item is configured to Yes in the System Configuration. ( Reference Air Kerma Mul‐
ti-Threshold Alert / Page 176)
Yes An audible warning signal sounds every time one of the thresholds configured
under ( Reference Air Kerma Multi-Threshold Alert / Page 176) is reached. De‐
fault: Yes
n Rotating Anode during Acq

Default for system type “Card system”: No. Default for system type “Angio system”:
Yes
Yes An audible signal sounds during acquisition to warn the customer about the
triggered radiation.

05.19
n Rotating Anode during Fluoro

Default for system type “Card system”: No. Default for system type “Angio system”:
Yes
Yes An audible signal sounds during fluoroscopy to warn the customer about the
triggered radiation.
13.6.3 Write protection of direct positions

n Direct Position 1, Direct Position 2 and Direct Position 3
Yes The direct position of the stand is write-protected. This is required, e.g. for 3D
Reconstruction Start Positions, to avoid having to perform a new adjustment.
Default: No

05.19
13.7 ACU
nents / Page 358)

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Artis One Components ACU.
 The “ACU A” screen appears:
Fig. 191: ACU
3. Select (highlight) the desired configuration point in the "Select Group To Configure”
tion.
the screen
13.7.1 FD Video Gain Parameter
 Do not change these parameters unless explicitly ordered by the factory (e.g. UI, Speed
Info, CB-DOC, CS HSC, CS PS or LAB).
Parameter Default Value

gain value for fix gain Roadmap [128,1024] 256
gain value for fix gain DR [128,1024] 256
gain value for fix gain DSA [128,1024] 256
gain value for fix gain CARD DSA [128,1024] 256
gain value for fix gain kV/ms [128,1024] 256
(Manual Gain for Manual kV/ms)

05.19
13.7.2 MFIELD
n Mfield reduced by collimator position
MFIELD means: Measuring FIELD of the FD Detector.
If the plates in the collimator are moved in (closed), the left measuring field and the
right measuring field are automatically not used for the measurement if they are parti‐
ally or completely covered by the plates. In this case (if necessary), there is a change
to the middle measuring field and measurement is only with this one.
If there is a case in which the middle measuring field is also partially covered by the
collimator plates, there is the following configuration:
YES Only the part (pixels) of the middle measuring field in the FD detector that is
not covered by the collimator plates is used for the measurement. Default: YES
In other words, the dose for the collimated field is not automatically increased
by the dose controller.
NO The entire middle measuring field is used and evaluated for the measurement.
In other words, the dose for the collimated field increases automatically the
more the plates are closed.

05.19
13.8 EHC
EHC = Examination Hardware Control
nents / Page 358)

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Artis One Components EHC.
 The Configuration of EHC screen appears:
Fig. 192: EHC Configuration
tion.
4. Make the configuration changes as wished and select OK to save the changes and exit
the screen.
The EHC Config Parameter settings can be transfered from one Artis one system to an‐

other Artis one system using a data medium.
To do this, click on “Configuration > Artis One System EHC/OSD Import Export” and fol‐
low the software dialog. ( EHC/OSD Import Export / Page 182)
13.8.1 general device setting

n Enable logging of user selections
yes Whenever the user selects a button on the EHC, the information that this button
was selected is written into the event log. Default: no

05.19
13.8.2 Sound Configuration

n EHC confirmation beep
on A signal sounds every time a button is selected at the EHC. Default: off
n EHC alert beep
on If a button that is selected at the EHC is rejected by the component that process‐
es the corresponding function, or the response for a button selection is not re‐
ceived within a certain time, a signal is sounded. Default: on
n EHC beep for disabled buttons
on Every time a disabled button is selected at the EHC, it rejects/does not accept the
selection and a signal sounds. Default: on
n sound volume EHC [20,90]

The sound volume of the EHC can be configured here. Default: 70
13.8.3 EHC Button Configuration

For additional information, see: ( Changing the EHC Inlay & attaching the Button Icon
Labels / Page 372)

05.19
Fig. 193: EHC console with the "Default Inlay"
1
2
(1) Review using joystick or HW buttons

(2) OSD Examination menu button
(3) OSD Post-processing menu button
(4) Configured default layout and default functionalities (for CARD user)
Configure up to 12 programmable buttons (depending on the inlay used).

n Choose a function for the button/s which have to be re-programmed from the drop-
down list. Double use of a function is not possible.
- Default Layout (shipped ex-factory):
The functionality of the 3 soft buttons on the left side and the 3 soft buttons on the
right side can be re-programmed.

05.19
- Alternative Layout (modified on-site):

The functionality of all 12 soft buttons can be re-programmed.
Fig. 194: EHC, inlays
Fig. 195: EHC button configuration (default layout for Card user)
When selecting a functionality from the drop-down list, the appropriate icon is shown
here.
The CSE can then match the button icon label included in the shipment to install it on the
EHC inlay.
Some functions must also be configured in the OSD menu.

If e.g. the "Edit Series Description" function is configured on the EHC as a HW button, this
 function must also be configured in the OSD menu. Otherwise this function will ignore
any button pressed.
 What symbol belongs to what function is also explained in the Operator Manual in the
chapter System Overview.

05.19
Tab. 29 EHC Button Configuration Possible choices in the drop-down list.
n Default Layout: n Edit Series Description 5

- Store Monitor n Frame rate -
- Store Fluoro n Frame rate +
- Store Reference Image n Image -
- Ref Image - n Image +
- Ref Image + n Invert Gray Scale
- Scene - n Line Annotation
- Scene + n Loop All Scenes
- Pulse Rate - n Manipulate all Objects6
- Pulse Rate + n Next Acquisition Program
- Scene Directory n Next Fluoro Program
- Dilatation Timer n Overlay Reference Image
- Layout Gallery n Pointer
n None n Polygon Line Annotation
n Adjust Windowing n Polyline Curve Measurements
n Anatomical Background1 n Previous Acquisition Program
n Angle Measurements n Previous Fluoro Program
n Arrow Annotation n Reference Directory
n Auto Windowing n Reset Fluoro Timer
n Automap Image2 n Roadmap7
n Circle Annotation n Start/Pause Scene
n CLEARstent3 n Toggle Display Layout
n Display Scene Native4 n Zoom by factor 2
n Distance Measurements
n Edge Enhancement
1. only available if in the system configuration “DSA” ( DSA Acquisition Module (key) / Page 143) is config‐
ured to “yes”.
2. available only if “Automap” ( Automap Module (key) / Page 145) is configured to “yes” in the system
configuration.
3. available only if “CLEARstent” ( CLEARstent (key) / Page 143) is configured in the system configuration
to “yes”.
4. available only if “DSA” ( DSA Acquisition Module (key) / Page 143) is configured in the system configura‐
tion to “yes”.
5. If the "Edit Series Description" function is configured on the EHC as a HW button, this function must also
be configured in the OSD menu. Otherwise this function will ignore any button pressed.
6. available only if “3D Angio” ( 3D Acquisition (key) / Page 145)“ is configured in the system configuration
to “yes”.
7. available only if “DSA” ( DSA Acquisition Module (key) / Page 143) is configured in the system configura‐
tion to “yes”.

05.19
13.9 CMU
nents / Page 358)

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Artis One Components CMU.
 The “Care Monitor” screen appears:
Fig. 196: CMU, Care Monitor
3. Select (highlight) the desired configuration item in the “Select Group To Configure” se‐
lection window and then click on Config in the “Action Bar” to start its configuration.
the screen
5. Select Save and then Exit to close the configuration
13.9.1 General
Default for all 4 parameters: 0
Usually the default values are not changed for all patient sizes, except for Pediatric cases
(children, patient size < 1.0 m).
Fig. 197: CMU > Care Monitor > General
Regarding patient positioning on the table top there is a patient height (=patient size in
the screen shot) dependent configurable “offset” for the following patient heights: < 1.0
m, < 1.5 m, < 1.7 m and >= 1.7 m
The “offset” position is defined as follows:
- In case of head first positioned patients:
The distance from the cranium (skullcap) to the table top end (headwards) edge in
mm (max.: 1000 mm).

05.19
- In the case of patients positioned with feet first:

The distance from the sole of the foot to the tabletop end (head end) edge in mm
(max.: 1000 mm).
The customer must define (and mark) the 4 “offset” positions (depending of the 4 patient
heights) which they always will use to position the patients, either head first or feet first
to the tabletop end (head end) edge.
Then measure the 4 offsets and enter the data for each patient height accordingly in this
configuration mask:

05.19
13.10 Error Reporting (Maintenance)

nents / Page 358)

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Artis One Components Error Reporting.
Fig. 198: Error Reporting System
tion.
the screen
13.10.1 Settings of maintenance

Fig. 199: Maintenance Settings
Working hours until maintenance System operating hours until next maintenance. De‐
fault: 2000

05.19
Tube load units until maintenance Tube load until next maintenance
Default: 67000
Thresholds of maintenance bar Threshold setting of the maintenance display. De‐
fault: 80
If the value 100 is entered, display of the “Mainte‐
nance bar” is permanently disabled, i.e. the “Mainte‐
nance bar” is never displayed. Also refer to:
- ( Switch off the Maintenance bar permanent‐
ly / Page 297)
- ( Resetting the Maintenance bar / Page 297)
13.10.1.1 Switch off the Maintenance bar permanently

Procedure for permanent disabling the bar for the maintenance status:
1. Start the Service Software ( Starting the Local Service (Service UI) / Page 352)
2. Click on Configuration > Artis One Components Error Reporting.
3. Select (highlight) Settings of maintenance and then click on Config
4. In the Threshold of maintenance bar box, type in the max. value of 100 to perma‐
nently disable automatic display of the maintenance bar.
5. Click on OK > Save > Exit > Home to store the change and close the Configuration.
6. Close the Service Software and then reboot the system by switching it OFF and then
ON again.
syngo will be updated and the Maintenance bar, which is displayed for the customer’s
information, will never appear again.
13.10.1.2 Resetting the Maintenance bar

Procedure for clearing (resetting) the maintenance status:
1. Perform and finish the system maintenance according to the Maintenance Instruc‐
tions and Maintenance Checklist.
2. Start the Service Software ( Starting the Local Service (Service UI) / Page 352)
3. Click on Tune Up > Maintenance System usage.
 The System usage table appears.
4. Click on Maintenance completed.
 The “Please make your comment” box appears.
5. Enter any text in the “Please make your comment” box or leave it blank.
6. Click on OK.
 An updated “System usage table” appears. The Info box “Since last Mainte‐
nance” now shows the reset entry: (0)
7. Click on Exit > Home and then close the service software.
8. Move the mouse cursor to the center of the displayed syngo application image and
press the left mouse button.

05.19
9. Reboot the system by switching it OFF and then ON again.

 syngo is now updated and the Maintenance bar disappears.

05.19
13.11 Support Functions

nents / Page 358)

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Artis One Components Support Functions.
Fig. 200: Support Functions
tion.
the screen
5. Select and configure the other config item/s available on this screen as desired/descri‐
bed, or continue with step 6.) to finish the configuration.
13.11.1 Days between doing a System Backup in background

The time interval of how many days after the system is started is configured here; a Delta
Image backup process to the IAS Service Disk takes place automatically in the back‐
ground during the bootup phase.
Range: 0.......180 days. Default: 28 days.
If the value 0 is entered, an automatic backup will not be performed. This is absolutely
not recommended!

05.19
New feature:
Trigger of a system backup with the next reboot by the CSE in the service SW or by a
SW update.
If a system backup has to be performed e.g. after a SW update, a wait of approx. 25 min.
must be maintained until it is finished.
To avoid this wait time:
n The CSE has the possibility in the service SW to determine if the system should per‐
form a system backup with the next reboot.
n Triggering of an automatic system backup with the next reboot can also be included
 n
in the SW setting of a SW update.
Procedure for the CSE to trigger an automatic system backup during the next
bootup:
a) Start Local Service.
b) Click on TestTools in the Service Home Menu
c) Click on OEM under Test tool > Schedule backup on next reboot.
d) Click on Go.
e) Reboot the system either immediately or later (e.g. next day by customer).
f) A new system backup (Acronis) is performed only during the the next system
reboot.
13.11.2 Free space on IAS Backup HDD for System Backup

The threshold of how many GB of remaining free disk space may remain when the Service
Disk in the IAS is to be processed automatically or manually (data deletion) can be config‐
ured here so that more free disk space can be obtained.
Choices: 50 GB, 60 GB, 70 GB, 80 GB and 90 GB. Default: 50GB
Two scenarios are possible:
1. Automatic Backup:
A backup in the background is automatically triggered by the Scheduler (”Image Back‐
up Timeout” setting).
 If the threshold is reached, first the backup/delta backups of the oldest Artis
one version available on the service drive will be deleted automatically by the
SW to free up disk space, then the automatic backup is started.
2. Manual Backup:
A backup is triggered manually by the CSE
 If the threshold is reached, a “Selection Box” will open in which the CSE must
manually select which Artis one version backups/Delta backups the customer
wants to delete in order to free up space.

05.19
13.11.3 Tune Up parameters for FD

Fig. 201: Configuration, Components, Support Functions, Tune Up Parameters for FD
n Path for import data

This is where the drive letters from which import is performed can be entered. As a
rule, this is the drive R:\. Default: R:\
n Minimum time period of constant FD temperature
This is where the time is entered that must be waited following switching on the sys‐
tem until the flat panel detector has reached the correct operating temperature and
this temperature has stabilized. Default: 120 (= 2 min.)
Only then will it be possible for the DEXI adjustment, FD calibration or the FD-relevant
IQAP tests to be performed.
13.11.4 Reports parameter

Factory setting: 10
Change only on explicit instructions from the factory!
Fig. 202: Configuration, Components, Support Functions, Report Parameters
n Number of historical report instances [2,100]. Default: 10

The “History” flag can be set in the SW for every report generated in the system; only
then is the “Reports parameter” configuration effective.
Depending on the “History” attribute in the CDF report list, PMS holds a preconfigured
number of historical instances of the report file. The files are purged by the SER during
system startup.

05.19
13.11.5 Parameters for 3D Calibration

Fig. 203: Parameters for 3D Calibration
This parameter appears only if the system has the 3D Angio option installed.
n 3D application Active
This is a switch for/from PMS so that several different Leonardo Workstation Versions
can be handled when performing the 3D calibration.
Yes When performing the 3D calibration, the Service SW of the Artis one will expect
an answer/confirmation from the X-Leonardo / 3D Angio Module of Artis one
that a mode is correctly calibrated.
Default: Yes
No When performing the 3D calibration, the Service SW of the Artis one will not
expect an answer/confirmation from the X-Leonardo / 3D Angio Module of Artis
one that a mode is correctly calibrated. Instead, the Artis Service SW will “ask”
the CSE to confirm that a mode was successfully calibrated.
13.11.6 BACKUPRESTOREHOSTDETAILS
Fig. 204: BACKUP RESTORE HOST DETAILS
n Maximum number of slice per Archieve

Range: 1......100. Default: 10
n Maximum number of full backup for current version
n Maximum number of full backup for previous version (0: No deletion)

05.19
13.11.7 SDC Backup Xml files validity in Days (-1:Infinite)

Fig. 205: SDC Backup Xml files, validity in days
n Tube Guard
Range: -1......10000. Default: 90
n Asset Management
Range: -1......10000. Default: 90

05.19
13.12 3D Viewing
 Do not change any data/settings in the listed configuration items.
nents / Page 358)

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Artis One Components 3D.
 The Configuration of 4D Viewing screen appears:
Fig. 206: 4D Viewing
 Do not change any data/settings in the configuration items.
3. Select Exit to close this configuration without making any changes.

The config item Artis Connected is set by default to Yes. Do not change this.

05.19
Tab. 30 Example of values configured in the 4D Viewing screen.
Group To Configure Group Item Configured Value

SystemOpenGL GpuIdentifier0 n.a.
Trajectory Planning Target Point First True
Automatic Alignment True
Automatic Flight False
Flight Speed 50
Toolbox Group Properties Name Group
Color Assignment Palette
Color (e.g. 1.0,1.0,0.0) 1.0,1.0,0.0
Opacity (Float) 1.0
Volume Assignment Registered
Toolbox Marker Properties Visualization MPR In Plane
Show Name True
Clipping True
Lighting True
Display In Current Layout False
Toolbox Point Properties Point Size (Float) 2.0
Visualization MPR In Plane
Show Name True
Clipping True
Lighting True
Toolbox Line Properties Line Thickness (Float) 0.8
Show Name True
Show Length True
Clipping True
Lighting True

05.19

Toolbox Polyline Proper‐ Line Thickness (Float) 0.8
ties
Show Name False
Show Length False
Clipping True
Lighting True
Toolbox Needle Properties Line Thickness (Float) 0.8
Stand TrajectoryTurnOnLaser True
GraphicsOverlay ContourColor 0 255 0
ContourLineWidth 1
Graphic color on Live screen Color
VolumeOverlay MaximizeOnActivate True
Preset True
Reconstruction ModalityType XA
GPUPCIBusID4 n.a.
3D Stenosis Analysis Whether to apply VRT Preset Disable
upon Workstep selection
Preset to be applied upon work‐ StenosisAnalysis
step selection, if enabled
Workstep to auto select after Analyze Stenosis
successful computation
Default setting for graphics dis‐ No item is highligh‐
play in Analyze Stenosis Work‐ ted blue.
step
Default setting for graphics dis‐ Virtual Stent
play in Simulate Stent Workstep
Maximum number of seed 8
points

05.19

3D Aneurysm Analysis Apply a VRT Preset upon work‐ Apply the AA pre‐
flow selection set upon workflow
selection (See De‐
fineVrtPreset)
VRT Preset to be applied upon AneurysmAnalysis
workflow selection
Work step to select after suc‐ Go to the Analyze
cessful computation in Mark Aneurysm work
Aneurysm step after Mark
Aneurysm
Graphics to display in Analyze Show the vessel
Aneurysm work step centerline graphic
Show the Ostium
Plane graphic
Show the Ostium
Neck, Angle, and
Length lines
Show the Dome
Height and Width
lines
Show the Cutting
Plane graphic
Show the Aneur‐
ysm Surface graph‐
ic
Graphics to display in Simulate Show the Virtual
Stent work step Stent graphic
Select the Results Segment de‐ Show only impor‐
tail level tant analysis re‐
sults
Distance between Edit Center‐ 3
line nodes

05.19

Embolization Guidance Apply VRT Viewing Preset Disable
Preset to be applied upon work‐ EmbolizationGuid‐
step selection, if enabled ance
Initial volume selection for auto PlanningPrimary.0
volume check step
Initial volume selection for seg‐ PlanningPrimary.0
mentation step
Initial volume selection for Mark PlanningPrimary.1
Vessel step
Initial volume selection for Over‐ PlanningPrimary.0
lay step
Default display type of vessel VesselCenterline
overlay for EG Workflow
Default thickness of vessel cen‐ Medium
terline
Maximum number of seed 12
points
Multiplier to determine punch 3
mask - radius times this value
will be punched
Method to compute punch radi‐ variable
us
VesselCenterline Color 255 0 0
VesselSurface Color 255 255 0
VesselOutline Color 255 255 0

05.19

Segmentation Tool Volume Measurement Unit of ml
the segmentation results
Segmentation visualization Type Surface
in VRT
Segmentation visualization Type Filled
in MPR
InnerSurfaceColor object
Opacity of Strokes in MPR Seg‐ 40
ments
Define width for Thin Stroke 1
Define width for Medium Stroke 3
Define width for Thick Stroke 7
Size of sculpting sphere in per‐ 80
centage
Min. value of sculpting sphere 50
radius (in mm)
Max. value of sculpting sphere 100
radius (in mm)
ObjectStrokeColor 255 0 0
BackgroundStrokeColor 0 0 255
AdditionSculptingToolColor 255 0 0
RemovalSculptingToolColor 0 0 255
ExportBiosense False
ExportNavX none
ExportNavXRes False

05.19
310 14 External Devices (Paper Printer, etc.)
14.1 Paper Printer

In this menu, the media format/s for the network paper printer/s are set. The format/s
configured here are provided by SYNGO to the customer for selection.
Configure only the format/s here which are supported by the network printer/s that are
used and that are installed and configured under Windows 7, see: ( Add Print‐
er / Page 327)
14.1.1 Available paper printer media formats

1. Procedure for making changes: ( Doing changes in syngo SW Modules / Page 361)
Fig. 207: Configuration, External Devices, Paper Printer
3. Enter the desired paper size/s which is to be displayed for selection under “Availa
ble paper printer media formats”.
4. Click on > to advance to the next page.

05.19
External Devices (Paper Printer, etc.) 14 311
14.1.2 Configured Printers and Syngo Paper Size

Fig. 208: Printer Paper Size Mapping
2. Printer Paper Size Mapping

- Configured Printers
Select the appropriate printer from the list.
3. Syngo Paper Size
- This table shows an entry for each paper format which was configured on the pre‐
vious page under Available paper printer media formats ( Available paper printer
media formats / Page 310).
Each “Syngo Paper Size” entry displayed here has its own selection table for select‐
ing the “Printer Paper Size”.

05.19
312 14 External Devices (Paper Printer, etc.)
4. Printer Paper Size

- Enter the “Printer Paper Size” to be used for each selectable “Syngo Paper Size”

05.19
External Devices (Paper Printer, etc.) 14 313
14.2 PS LUT Files

The print quality of the paper printer can be improved by importing a lookup table for an
installed Postscript printer.
Fig. 209: External devices, Postscript printer LUT configuration
3. Import Postscript LUT and select for Current LUT

Since the tested paper printers do not require any additional LUTs, specially-tailored
LUTs are not available and are normally not needed. If needed/available:
a) Select Drive and Source Path of the specially-tailored LUT.
b) Click on the “Import” button to load the LUT into the PS LUT directory (several
LUTs can be imported).
c) Select the required LUT in the PS LUT directory and click on the Select button to
load the Current LUT (which will be active only if the Use LUT for Postscript
Printers checkmark is set).
d) To delete a LUT in the PS LUT directory, select the LUT and click on the Remove
button. Confirm the warning message (...no undo function...).
4. Check/set the checkmarks.
- Use LUT for Postscript Printers
Set the checkmark for the use of a specially tailored "Current LUT" (see below),
otherwise delete the checkmark (recommended: additional LUT not needed).
- Use Dicom LUT for Postscript Printers
Set the checkmark for paper printers with the linear density characteristic.
Delete the checkmark for paper printers with non-linear or unknown density char‐
acteristics (usually paper printers are not linear)
- Use floating Zoom factors
Set the checkmark to always use the full printable size (recommended).
If the checkmark is deleted, in some cases the image that is printed is too small,
e.g. with "Full Resolution" (2k pixel) 30x40 FD detector, Quant Report, etc.

05.19
314 15 Applications
15.1 Pat. Registration

The attributes for the Patient Registration platform can be set in this menu.

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Applications Pat. Registration.

05.19
Applications 15 315
Fig. 210: Applications, Patient Registration

05.19
316 15 Applications
3. Displayed Patient Registration Dialog Elements

Most of these attributes are predefined for the modality and cannot be changed here.
Configure the available parameters as desired.
4. Patient Registration Dialog Invocation
Always uncheck (deselect) the check box implicitly in scheduler!
This configuration will ensure correct patient position when a patient is registered via
a HIS/RIS/CIS system.
 CAUTION
Wrong patient position can implicitly be set by the system.
Treatment of the wrong side!
 Uncheck the configuration "Implicitly in scheduler" in the configuration of Pa‐
tient Registration.
hm_serv_ConfigPatientRegistration
5. Click on Save (only if changes were made) > Finish to close this window.

05.19
Applications 15 317
15.2 Viewer
Viewer settings for loading new studies or series are configured in this menu. If these
boxes are not selected, up to 3 studies will be kept open in the application and may be
selected in the user interface (viewer) in the upper right corner (folder icons).

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Applications Viewer.
Fig. 211: Applications, Viewer
3. Place a checkmark in the check box of the desired functionality.


05.19
318 15 Applications
15.3 CorRea (Correct & Rearrange)

This menu allows you to set attributes which may be modified in the Correct&Rearrange
platform.

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Applications CorRea.

05.19
Applications 15 319
Fig. 212: Applications, CorRea
3. Configure the available parameters as desired.

05.19
320 15 Applications

05.19
Applications 15 321
15.4 MPPS (Modality Performed Procedure Steps)

The attributes which are displayed in the customer user interface when a MPPS message
is sent to the RIS are set in this menu.

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Applications MPPS.
Fig. 213: Applications, MPPS
3. Dose Dialog. Configure this to obtain the task card for the dose data displayed in the
MPPS UI (Show MPPS ...),
4. Configure the other available parameters as desired. ( MPPS Startup / Page 321)
15.4.1 MPPS Startup

Overview of the MPPS Startup Steps
1. DICOM HIS/RIS Enabling
a) Configure DICOM HIS/RIS in the System Options. ( System Options / Page 24)

05.19
322 15 Applications
2. Importing the MPPS Software License (key)

a) Install the MPPS_SUPPORT SW license. ( Licensing / Page 60)
3. Enabling the MPPS
a) Start the system configuration. ( Starting/Closing the Configuration in Local
Service / Page 355)
b) Confirm the “MPPS” configuration item with Yes. ( MPPS(key) / Page 146)
4. Configuring the HIS/RIS Nodes for MPPS
a) Click on Configuration > DICOM HIS/RIS Nodes.
b) Configure the network nodes for HIS/RIS. ( HIS/RIS Nodes / Page 116):
MPPS is selected with a checkmark in the Basic Worklist and Performed Proce‐
dure Step checkboxes.
5. Configure MPPS message under “Applications”
a) Click on Configuration > Applications MPPS.
b) Depending on the attributes that one wishes to be sent to the HIS/RIS, the relevant
checkmarks must be set. ( MPPS (Modality Performed Procedure
Steps) / Page 321)
6. Customer User Interface (CUI) Configuring
a) On the application interface, move the mouse pointer to the top edge of the
screen and select Options > Configuration .
b) Double-click on the Patient Registration ICON in the Configuration Panel and se‐
lect the HIS/RIS tab card that then opens.
c) Configure the setting for MPPS on this tab card. ( Patient Registration / Page 336)
7. Config check Performing
a) Start Config Check. ( Config Check / Page 208)
b) The Config Check must be performed without problem. If errors (conflicts) are
displayed, click on Auto Config in the “Action Bar” of the Config Check window.
The errors will then be corrected automatically.
c) When no more errors are displayed, click on Exit and Finish in the “Actionbar” to
exit the Config Check.
d) Click on Home in the “Function Bar” to return to the Main menu of the service SW.
8. Importing Data from the HIS/RIS System
a) Generate a test patient on the HIS/RIS System.
b) Open the Patient Browser and import the data from the HIS/RIS under View and
update worklist. The necessary configurations for this can be made in the UI un‐
der Patient Registration on the HIS/RIS Tabcard.
9. Sending Data to the HIS/RIS System
a) Open a test patient and perform (simulate) the examination.
The examination progress will be automatically communicated to the HIS/RIS.

05.19
Applications 15 323
15.5 Worklist Results

The attributes displayed following a DICOM worklist request in the Patient Registration
form are set in this menu.

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Applications Worklist Result.
Fig. 214: Applications, Worklist Result
3. Configure the available parameters as desired.


05.19
324 15 Applications
15.6 syngo.via
This configuration item is not used in the EAS VA10 software.

/ Page 355)
2. Click on Configuration > Applications syngo.via.
Fig. 215: syngo.via
3. By default, the syngo.via check box is not marked. Do not change it!
Never mark the syngo.via check box.
4. Click on Finish to close this window.

05.19
Artis one, Configuration Panel in the Customer UI 16 325
Only the Artis one configuration panel configurations, which must be used by the CSE in
combination with performing Service Configurations, are described in this chapter.
1. Start the Artis one Configuration Panel ( Starting the Artis one - Configuration Pan‐
el in the Customer UI / Page 364)
 The Artis one - Configuration Panel window appears with its ICONS:
2. Start the desired configuration: Double-click on the corresponding icon.
 All the configurations in the Customer User Interface (UI) (also called “Configuration Pan‐
el”) are described in the User Manual !
 If “Audit Trail” does not open after clicking on the ICON, the “Security Properties” are not
set. In other words, the system does not have the “Security” option (HIPAA) installed
3. Service-relevant configurations to be checked/adapted by the CSE, if necessary:
Icon Name Link (Service-relevant Configuration)

Add Printer ( Add Printer / Page 327)
Transfer ( Transfer (Artis one - Configuration Pan‐
el) / Page 331)
Patient Registration ( Patient Registration / Page 336)

05.19
326 16 Artis one, Configuration Panel in the Customer UI
Icon Name Link (Service-relevant Configuration)

Regional and Language Options ( Regional and Language Options (UI) / Page 339)
Organize Stored Positions ( Organize Stored Positions / Page 344)
 All other configurations in the Artis one - Config Panel are performed by the customer/
user.
4. After all service-relevant checks/configurations are finished, click on “X” to close the
Artis one - Configuration Panel window.

05.19
16.1 Add Printer

This is the access point for the customer/clinical staff to configure a Network Printer.

For the CSE only; there is also another access point available to configure a Network
Printer, see: ( Adding a Printer (CSE only) / Page 328)
Prerequisites:
1. The optional “Film_Paper_Printer” SW license for using a network postscript printer
must already be installed.
2. The “Paper Printer” syngo option must already be configured, saved, etc., under “Sys‐
tem Options”. ( System Options / Page 24)
Procedure:
1. Start the Artis One Configuration Panel ( Starting the Artis one - Configuration Pan‐
2. Double-click on the Add Printer icon.
 The Add Printer window appears.
Fig. 217: Adding printers with SW VD10
 Only network printers may be connected and configured.
3. Click on Add a local printer.

 The Choose a printer port window appears.
4. To continue, follow the SW dialog that guides you through the procedure which is ex‐
plained under: ( Network Paper Printer installation / Page 329)

05.19
5. When finished with network printer installation, close the Windows 7 windows and
the Artis one - Configuration Panel.
6. End the session to switch off the system.
7. Switch on the system (AXIS IVS).
 During the boot routine, the printer will be installed automatically in SYNGO.
8. Perform the required configurations in Local Service under syngo, see: ( Configure
the Paper Printer in syngo / Page 330)
9. Print out a page from the Filming tab card in the application user interface.
16.1.1 Adding a Printer (CSE only)

This is the access point for the CSE to configure a Network Printer.
Prerequisites:
1. The optional “Film_Paper_Printer” SW license for using a network postscript printer
must already be installed.
2. The “Paper Printer” syngo option must already be configured, saved, etc., under “Sys‐
tem Options”. ( System Options / Page 24)
 Only network printers may be connected and configured.
Procedure:
1. The system must be booted to the normal mode for customer use.
2. Press the necessary key sequence (see the AX Password List in CS KB, ID 14522) to
gain access to the Windows OS for service.
3. Press the Windows key on the keyboard and then select Devices and Printers.
4. Select Add a printer and then select the Add a local printer item.
 The Choose a printer port window appears.
5. To continue, follow the description under: ( Network Paper Printer installa‐
tion / Page 329)
6. When finished with network printer installation, close the Windows 7 windows and
the Artis one - Configuration Panel.
7. End the session to switch off the system.
8. Switch on the system (AXIS IVS).
 During the boot routine, the printer will be installed automatically in SYNGO.
9. Perform the required configurations in Local Service under syngo, see: ( Configure
the Paper Printer in syngo / Page 330)

05.19
16.1.2 Network Paper Printer installation
 Only connection of network printers is released; connection of local printers is not per‐
mitted.
Installing the Printer

1. Click on Create a new port under Choose a printer port and then select
Standard TCP/IP Port under Type of Port.
2. Continue with Next.
3. Enter the IP address of the printer under Host name or IP address.
4. Continue with Next and make sure that Use the driver that is currently
installed (recommended) is selected.
5. Continue with Next.
 The configured printer will be shown on the Add Printer page.
6. Continue with Next; make sure that Do not share this printer is selected.
7. Continue with Next and Finish.
Configuring the Printer
1. Select the printer in the Devices and Printers window and open the context
menu by selecting See what‘s printing.
2. Select Printer > Printing Preferences.
3. Select Advanced Paper/Quality in the ...Printing References window.
4. Change the page size to A4 and select Apply > OK.
5. Select the printer in the Devices and Printers window and open the context
menu by selecting See what‘s printing.
6. Select Printer > Properties.
7. Select Device Settings in the ...Properties window.
8. Change all page sizes to the desired size (e.g. A4).
9. Click on Apply.
10. Select the Ports tab card.
11. Click on Configure Port....
12. Change the protocol to LPR.
13. In LPR Settings, add the Queue name (e.g.: IP address of the printer).
14. Confirm the changes with OK and close the Properties window.
Testing the Printer
1. Select the configured printer in the Devices and Printers window and click on
See what‘s printing.
2. Select Printer > Properties.

05.19
3. Select Print Test Page in the Properties window and after a successful printout,
confirm the message box with Close.
 If there is a corrupt installation, the printer must be reinstalled; first perform ( Uninstal‐
ling a Network Printer / Page 330).
4. Close all windows in Windows 7 to return to the Artis one Control Panel.
16.1.3 Configure the Paper Printer in syngo

1. Perform a restart: Options > End Session > Restart System.
 The printer is installed in syngo during the IVS boot routine.
2. Open the Service SW and select Configuration > System Options.
3. Set a checkmark for Paper Printer in the List of system options page and click
on Next > Next to open the “Paper Printer” menu under External Devices. ( Ex‐
ternal Devices (Paper Printer, etc.) / Page 310)
4. Enter the desired size under Available paper printer media formats and
save change with Save > OK. ( Available paper printer media formats / Page 310)
5. Select > in the action bar to continue and select Next > Finish.
6. Continue with Home and confirm the system restart request with OK.
16.1.4 Uninstalling a Network Printer

See also: ( Uninstalling a Network Printer / AXA6-000.816.01)
If there is a corrupt printer installation, the following steps must be performed to remove
this printer before installing it again:
1. Press the necessary key sequence (see the AX Password List in CS KB, ID 14522) to
gain access to the Windows OS for service.
2. Press the Windows key on the keyboard and then select Devices and Printers.
3. Select the printer with a mouse click and select Remove device > Yes.
 Reinstallation of the printer can now be performed.

05.19
16.2 Transfer (Artis one - Configuration Panel)
16.2.1 Autotransfer Tabcard

1. Start the Artis one Configuration Panel ( Starting the Artis one - Configuration Pan‐
2. Double-click on the Transfer icon.
 The Transfer configuration screen appears with the Auto Transfer tab card:
Fig. 218: User Control Panel, Transfer Configuration, Auto Transfer tab card

05.19
Tab. 31 Possible Auto Transfer Rules
Work Sta‐ Processing Status Objects Destination

tus
* * Images (the drop-down list shows the net‐
None None Non Images work nodes that are available for
this system)
Does not Does not matter Reports
matter Archived Series
Completed Archived & Committed Waveforms
Read Archived & Verified Structure Set:
Verified Received RT Plan
Sent
Sent & Committed
Printed
Exported
3. Configuration of the desired “Transfer Rule” is performed by the customer and is ex‐
plained in the Operator Manual.
Recommended Transfer Rules:
a) To auto-transfer the complete study (all images + exam protocol) after closing the
patient:
Completed & Don't Care Study
b) To auto-transfer images directly after acquisition according to the configuration in

completed flag handling: ( Completed Flag Handling / Page 235):
Completed & Don't Care Images
c) To auto-transfer exam protocols:
Completed & Don't Care Reports
4. Check the Activate Transfer Rule check box to activate the rules, if desired.
5. Click on OK to save changes and close the window
 The Artis One - Configuration Panel window with its ICONS appears again.
16.2.2 Local Devices Tabcard

 The Transfer configuration screen with the Auto Transfer tab card appears

05.19
3. Select the Local Devices tab card.

 The Local Devices tab card appears:
Fig. 219: User Control Panel, Transfer Configuration, Local Devices
4. Perform the required configurations on this tab card.

For detailed explanations to configure this tab card, click on Help for the Artis Online
Help.
a) Compression Type
Select the Compression Type for the CD_R depending on the viewer that is being
used ( General DICOM Settings / Page 72):
- for “Fast View” set None or Lossless JPEG
b) Image Stamp
This is a drive-specific configuration and applicable only for CD/DVD/MOD media.
c) Recording Mode
Single or Multi-session mode can be selected. Default: Multi-session.
d) Media Usage
Default: Maximize media usage.

05.19
e) Automatic Labelling
Default: the Generate Label and Burn Dicom Viewer check boxes are enabled.
- Automatic Labeling:
the Generate Label check box is checked. The window that asks the user to
enter the label text and to decide if the Viewer should be burned does not pop
up.
The “Burn DICOM Viewer” check box is available. The user selects always burn
(checked) or always not burn (not checked) the DICOM Viewer on the CD-R/
DVD.
- Manual Labeling:
the Generate Label check box is not checked. The window that asks the user
to enter the label text and to decide if the Viewer should be burned pops up.
The check box for “Burn DICOM Viewer” is dimmed. The user can choose man‐
ually for each CD-R/DVD burning whether or not the viewer should be included.
f) Directory Structure
Used for Offline Devices. If an offline device is selected, directories based on Pa‐
tient/Study name will be created.
g) Recordable Patient Size
Default: Not checked. Export / archive job will start directly.
5. Click on OK to save changes and close the window
16.2.3 Network Nodes Tabcard

el in the Customer UI / Page 364).
 The Transfer configuration screen with the Auto Transfer tab card appears
3. Select the Network Nodes tab card.
 The Network Nodes tab card appears:

05.19
Fig. 220: User Control Panel, Transfer Configuration, Network Nodes
4. Depending on the network nodes, select the Compression Type.

5. Click on OK to save the changes and close the window

05.19
16.3 Patient Registration
16.3.1 HIS/RIS Tabcard

1. Prior to start configuring here, following further configurations must be properly
done:
( HIS/RIS Setup with Worklist settings and MPPS / Page 122):
- ( System Options / Page 24)
- ( HIS/RIS Nodes / Page 116)
- ( Modality / Page 46)
- ( Worklist Results / Page 323)
- ( MPPS (Modality Performed Procedure Steps) / Page 321), if this option is
present
- ( MPPS Startup / Page 321), if this option is present
3. Double-click on the Patient Registration icon.
 The Registration Configuration screen with the “Entering Data” tab card ap‐
pears.
4. Select the HIS/RIS tab card.
 The HIS/RIS tab card appears:

05.19
Fig. 221: Patient Registration, VD10 SW, HIS/RIS tab card
5. Configuration of the “HIS/RIS” tab card is performed by the customer and is explained
in the Operator Manual.
6. Modality, AET, From RIS and MPPS node must be configured proper with valid en‐
tries of the customer’s site AETs and From RIS.
- To query the Hospital RIS to display all XA modality on worklist:
Modality: the 3 boxes set to XA - “blank” - “blank”

Could also be "RF - -" or "XA RF -" on Artis MP systems, see Modality Configuration.
( Modality / Page 46)
AET: set to Any (or Local Site AE worklist)

05.19
- To query the Hospital RIS to display all modalities on the worklist:

Modality: the 3 boxes set to Any - “blank” - “blank”
AET: Set to Any (or Local Site AE worklist)
With a newly shipped system, it may still be possible to select the HIS/RIS test node
from the factory (already deleted) under “AET” and “From RIS”. Make sure that after
 the HIS/RIS Node of the customer’s site was set up, this node and AET are selected
here in the drop-down menus.
The HIS/RIS will not work with the factory Test Node/AET
7. FromRIS
Select the active RIS when multiple RIS are available (e.g. Card and Angio)
8. MPPS node
Select the active MPPS node to be used
9. WL OFF (=WorkList OFF)
Check the check box to deactivate the work list and MPPS, e.g. when working with
Sensis and again activate it when the Sensis is shut down for Angio examinations.
10. Click on OK to save the changes and close the window

05.19
16.4 Regional and Language Options (UI)
16.4.1 Language Setting for the Syngo Display (Text Monitor/Display)

2. Double-click on the Regional and Language Options icon.
 The Regional and Language window opens with the Formats Tabcard (de‐
fault).
Fig. 222: Region and language for SW VD10
3. Select the desired language for the syngo user interface under "Format". Permitted
languages are:
Tab. 32 Control Panel, permitted syngo languages.
Country Remarks
English (United States) This is default.

05.19
Country Remarks
French (France) n.a.
German (Germany) n.a.
Spanish (Spain) n.a.
Japanese If the language setting needs to be changed to Japanese,
perform this according to the Document "Artis one VA10x SW
Installation”. ( Japanese Language Set‐
tings / AXA6-000.816.01)
Chinese If the language setting needs to be changed to Chinese, per‐
form this according to the Document "Artis one VA10x SW In‐
stallation”.
4. Clicking on Cancel will abandon the changes.

5. Click on Apply > OK to to save the changes and close the window.
 The Artis One - Configuration Panel window with its ICONS appears again
6. Close the Artis One - Configuration Panel window.
7. If the language was changed, open the Local Service now. ( Starting/Closing the
Configuration in Local Service / Page 355)
8. Configure the same language which is configured here by the customer or CSE in
the ”System Config“ under Language setting. ( Language Setting / Page 134)
9. Leave the configuration by using the Home button and confirm the required system
reboot to make the changes valid.
16.4.2 Keyboard Setting

2. Double-click on the Regional and Language Options icon.
 The Regional and Language window opens with the Formats Tabcard (default).
3. Click on the Keyboards and Languages tab card.

05.19
Fig. 223: Keyboards and languages with SW VD10
4. Click on Change keyboards....


05.19
Fig. 224: Text Services and Input Languages, General Remarks with SW VD10
5. Set the language for the keyboard under Default input language. Select it from
the drop-down menu which shows the installed services.
6. If the desired keyboard language does not appear in the drop-down menu, it must be
added.
Click on Add under “Installed” services.

05.19
Fig. 225: Adding an input language with SW VD10
7. Select the desired Input Language.

8. Click on OK to confirm and save the entry.
9. Set the newly added language for the keyboard under Default input language”
Select it from the drop-down menu which shows the installed services.
10. Click on OK > Apply > OK > Apply > OK to close/save all the windows and leave the
“Regional and Language options” window.
11. Perform a restart using the User Application Software End Session > Shutdown Sys‐
tem (Power OFF/ON)

05.19
16.5 Organize Stored Positions

2. Double-click on the Organize Stored Positions icon.
 The following window appears.
Fig. 226: Organize Stored Positions, Anatomical Positions
Click on Help to get more detailed information about how to proceed.

3. Perform all necessary changes required for Service and/or Customer in the “Anatomi‐
cal Positions” tab card.
4. Select the “System Positions” tab card and also perform all necessary changes re‐
quired for Service and/or Customer here.
5. Click on Copy to System Positions if this is necessary.
6. Click on Apply and then on OK to apply the changes and close this window.
 The Artis One - Configuration Panel window appears again.

05.19
Exam Set Editor 17 345
17.1 Exam Sets editing (User and Service)

The following can be created and changed with the ExamSet Editor:
n Acquisition Programs
n Fluoro Programs
n Fluoro Roadmap Programs
Refer to the Operator Manual for further handling information.
17.1.1 User (Customer) Access to Exam Sets (Normal and Expert)
Customer/User & Service Engineer (CSE):

All parameters which appear and have a white background are accessible to the custom‐
er and the CSE and can be changed by them as desired.
After opening the Exam Set Editor, only the tree with the OGPs (left side) for “User =
Standard” is displayed:

05.19
346 17 Exam Set Editor
Fig. 227: Exam Set Editor, User = Standard
An Organ Program must be selected and then the “Expert” field must be clicked on to
enable the user to also work with the program parameters (right side) for “User = Ex‐
pert”:

05.19
Fig. 228: Exam Sets, ACQ OPG, VC20/VC21
To go back to the the previous status (OGP tree only), click on the “Standard” field.
If the customer wishes, this Exam Set Editor function can be password-protected to pre‐
vent changes from being made by someone without proper authorization. The CSE must
enable this in the configuration; for more details, see: ( OGPE Configuration Parame‐
ter / Page 238)
1. a) Password protection is not enabled

The Exam Set parameters appear with a white background and can be changed by
the user.
If “Show Service Parameters” is clicked by the customer, other Exam Set parame‐
ters appear, but with a gray background and they cannot be changed. They can be
accessed and changed only by the CSE.

05.19
b) Password protection is enabled.

All program parameters appear with a gray background and cannot be changed.
Click on the “...Password...” field which is now available, follow the dialog and en‐
ter the proper password.
The Exam Set parameters appear with a white background and can be changed by
the user.
If “Show Service Parameters” is clicked by the customer, other Exam Set parame‐
ters appear but with a gray background and they cannot be changed. They can be
accessed and changed only by the CSE.

05.19
17.2 Service Access by CSE to Exam Sets (Normal and Expert)

All parameters which appear and have a gray background are not accessible to the cus‐
tomer and can be changed only if the CSE has enabled access. In this case, additional
“Service Parameters” will be displayed and can be adapted by the CSE.
Fig. 229: Exam Set Editor, Show Service Parameters
Service Technician (CSE):

If there are complaints by the customer about the image quality, the CSE can make
changes here to improve the image quality.
1. Logging into the Local Service (level 7 service password is required) is necessary to
change the parameters and they are no longer displayed in gray. ( Starting the Lo‐
cal Service (Service UI) / Page 352)
2. In addition, the “Show service parameters” ICON must be clicked to display the pa‐
rameters that are visible only to service. ( Fig. 229 Page 349)
3. The service window must remain opened and may be closed again only after all
changes have been completed and saved.
Logging into the Local Service starts the viewer that is required to change the parame‐
ters and the parameters are no longer displayed in gray. In addition, the “Show service
parameter.....” ICON must be clicked to display the parameters that are visible only to
service. The service window must remain opened and may be closed again only after all
changes have been completed and saved.
IMPORTANT: Clicking on the “Show service parameters” ICON when the Local Service
is opened overrides the password protection!
The parameters may be changed only according to the recommended “Default Exam‐
Sets” for VDxx (published in CB-DOC) or in the framework of a UI, Speed Info or by spe‐
cific instructions from the factory (e.g. IQ-Group).
Observe the hazard message and the remarks shown below!

05.19
Fig. 230: Exam Sets, ACQ OPG, VC20/21 service selected
I-Noise Reduction Details: Change only on factory request. The image quality can be af‐
fected by these settings
 Set Stripe Compensation to ON only if Biosense Carto XP is present and stripes are visible
with EP.

05.19
CAUTION: Changing X-Ray Parameters, Dose and Fluoro Type in an ExamSet can in‐
crease the amount of radiation to which the patient and operating personnel are subjec‐
ted.
The customer must be informed about any changes that were made to the X-Ray Param‐
 eters, Dose and Fluoro Type and also must be informed about the consequences arising
from this.
The customer must verify in writing that he has been informed of this and must confirm
his agreement with the changes.
Observe country-specific regulations.

05.19
352 18 Procedures
18.1 Starting the Local Service (Service UI)

Proceed as follows:
1. To start the service software user interface at the console, move the mouse pointer
(cursor) to the top edge of the screen in the application user interface.
 A selection list will appear at the top edge of the screen.
2. Click on the Options list item.
Fig. 231: Menu Options: Service - Local Service
3. Place the mouse pointer over Local Service and click on Local Service.
 The Authentication screen appears:

05.19
Procedures 18 353
Fig. 232: Authentication page, Artis one, VA10 SW
4. Type in the variable password ↵. You can enter either a new password (in this case,
delete the old password first) or only the last six characters of the existing password
(as shown in the example above). The characters are not visible when typed in.
5. Click on the OK button to submit the password entered.
If the submitted password is not valid, a notification window will pop up to this effect.
Click on OK to confirm and re-enter the password.
If the Set as Default check box is selected and a valid password has been entered, on‐
ly the first 14 characters will be saved. The next time you log in, these 14 characters
will be displayed and only the last six characters will need to be entered.
 The Home Menu of the service software is displayed:

05.19
354 18 Procedures
Fig. 233: Service Software, Home Menu, Artis one, VA10 SW
As soon as the service software has been started, an icon appears at the bottom right of
 the screen. If the service software window has been minimized, it can be maximized
again (reopened) by clicking on the icon.
Service Chat (new syngo feature)

The Service Chat is a simple communication tool using the syngo service software.
It can be utilized to exchange information during a service task between Support Center
staff and on-site staff.
 This means at least two service users must be logged in the service software on a dedica‐
ted syngo system.
Two remote users or a local and a remote user are able to communicate with each other.
More information is available in the Artis one CB-DOC under “Service > Siemens Remote
Service SRS for AX Systems Configuration > Additional Information > Service Chat”.

05.19
Procedures 18 355
18.2 Starting/Closing the Configuration in Local Service

Proceed as follows:
1. Start a service session. ( Starting the Local Service (Service UI) / Page 352)
2. Click on Configuration on the Home Page of the Service Software.
Fig. 234: Service Software, Home Menu, Artis one, VA10 SW
 The configuration program starts and opens the Configuration main menu.
All Configuration sub-menus can be selected from here.

05.19
356 18 Procedures
Fig. 235: Configuration Main menu for the Artis one with all possible parameters

05.19
Procedures 18 357
3. It is possible that after you click on Next in the “Action Bar”, the Initial Setup
window will appear instead of the Configuration Main Menu:
Fig. 236: Sample of Initial Setup
Reason: Either the syngo-based system is being configured for the first time (usually
in the factory during system startup) or an option was added/removed in the “List of
system options”. ( System Options / Page 24)
a) Click on Next.
 The guided configuration procedure starts.
b) Click on the > button
 Move step by step through the guided configuration procedure/s to perform all
the necessary mandatory configuration/s.
4. Closing the Configuration in Local Service:
Always use Home in the “Function Bar” of the Configuration Main Menu
Do not close the menu with the “X” button in the Windows window!
If the “restart application pending” info appeared previously, the decision
box now appears to initiate a reboot “now” or “later”.
Press now if no further configuration changes have to be made.
Press later if other configuration changes have to be made. Make sure to leave the
configuration with the Home button to obtain the prompt window again to finally ini‐
tiate the system reboot.

05.19
358 18 Procedures
18.3 Doing changes under Artis One System/Components

This procedure is valid for:
n Following configuration items listed under Artis one System:
- System Configuration
n All configuration items listed under Artis one Components
uration!
18.3.1 Starting and handling the Menu Pages

/ Page 355)
2. Select the desired configuration item either under Configuration > Artis One Sys‐
tem ............................ or under Configuration > Artis One Compo‐
nents ............................
 The “Configuration” menu of the selected configuration item is displayed.
3. Observe the information about using the ( Command Bar (Action Bar) Soft‐
keys / Page 359)
4. Make the desired changes to the parameters which are available directly in this
screen:
Select the appropriate item or enter a valid value in the drop-down menu for the con‐
cerned parameters.
5. If applicable, make the desired changes of the parameters which are available under
“Select Group To Configure” in this screen:
a) Select (highlight) the desired configuration item in the “Select Group To Config‐
ure” box.
b) Click on Config in the “Action Bar”
 The menu for the selected item appears, e.g.:
Fig. 237: System Configuration, Select Group To Configure
c) Make the desired changes to the parameters available in this screen:

Select the appropriate item or enter a valid value in the drop-down menu for the
concerned parameters.
d) Click on Cancel to discard the changes or click on OK to leave this screen and keep
the changes.

05.19
Procedures 18 359
6. A Software License Key is required for an optional item with its name marked ......
(Key). First install the software license (import of a new license.dat file), then enable
the item in the System Config with “Yes”.
7. Status ICONS will indicate an inadmissible status, see: ( Status ICONS / Page 360)
8. Click on “Save” to save all the changes.
 The information “restart application pending” can appear
9. Click on Exit to leave this screen and return to the Configuration menu.
10. If the configuration was changed and saved, the configuration check and then the
version check will be started automatically when exiting the specific configuration
module. Use autoconfig to correct all inconsistencies shown by the configuration
check.
Make absolutely sure to click on Home to leave the Configuration to make the
changes valid.
It is highly recommended to click on now to make the changes that were made valid.
If later is clicked on (e.g. more configuration changes have to be made), make sure to
leave the configuration again with the Home button to get the prompt window again
to finally initiate the system reboot.
18.3.2 Command Bar (Action Bar) Softkeys

Possible functions (soft keys) in the “Action Bar”:
Tab. 33 AX Soft keys in the Action Bar
Software-but‐ Meaning
ton
Abort The program/procedure that is currently being executed is aborted.
Autoconfig Executes the Autoconfiguration of components which are found to
be inconsistent during the Config Check.
AutoLic Auto Licensing ( Licensing / Page 60) executes the System Configura‐
tion. All options for which licenses are available are displayed and ena‐
bled (set to “Yes”).
Cancel Cancels the configuration changes made in an item chosen from the
“Select Group To Configure” window.
Config Starts the configuration for the parameter item that is selected in the
“Select Group To Configure” window.
Exit Leaves the configuration item without saving the current changes.
Go Executes the function of the selected program item.
Ok Accepts and keeps the configuration changes made in an item chosen
in the “Select Group To Configure” window when leaving this screen.

05.19
360 18 Procedures
Software-but‐ Meaning
ton
Refresh Refreshes the displayed screen with updated information.
Reset Changes are discarded and all parameters are set back to their original
values.
Save Saves the current configuration, including the changes.
> Proceed forwards to the next function page.
< Proceed backwards to the previous function page.
18.3.3 Status ICONS

The following icons indicate an inadmissible status.
Tab. 34 Icons for Status Display
ICON Meaning
Fig. 238: Configuration Conflict Configuration Conflict!
This symbol indicates an inadmissible configuration. The
message box opens with the inadmissible conditions by
clicking on the icon. If there is one or more of these icons
visible, it is not possible to save the configuration
Fig. 239: License key missing License key not available!

This symbol indicates an option for which there is no li‐
cense key. More information can be obtained by moving
the cursor onto the symbol. If one or more of these icons
is visible, it is not possible to save the configuration
( Licensing / Page 60)
Fig. 240: Default value used Default values are used!

This symbol indicates a parameter that has not yet been
configured and for which default values are used.
After saving the configuration, the symbol disappears.

05.19
Procedures 18 361
18.4 Doing changes in syngo SW Modules

This procedure is used for the following syngo software modules:
n Local Host
n Security
n Service
n DICOM
n Import/Export
n System Mgmt
n External Devices
n Applications
18.4.1 Starting and Stepping through the Menu Pages

General Information:
n Currently, the syngo SW modules can have up to max. 3 configuration pages.
n Paging (stepping) forward and back is possible by clicking on > and <.
n “Save” will appear in the menu page if something has been changed there.
n “Save” will always appear in the last menu page.
n The changes are saved by clicking on “Save”.
n Click on “Finish” to leave this configuration item at this current stage. If changes have
been made but are not saved yet by clicking on “Save”, a window appears and asks if
the changes should be saved or discarded.
n When clicking on “Reset”, if offered, changes are discarded and all parameters are set
back to their original values. The page stays open and a new attempt can be made to
make changes.
Change Procedure:
/ Page 355)
2. Select the desired syngo software module configuration item (e.g. Configuration >
Local Host Site Info)
 The “Configuration” menu page 1 of the selected configuration item is dis‐
played.
3. Make the desired changes to the parameters which are available in screen page 1.
cerned parameters.
4. Click on Save to save the changes.

05.19
362 18 Procedures
5. Select “Finish” to leave the configuration item in this stage. If changes have been
made but are not saved yet by clicking on “Save”, a window appears and asks if the
changes should be saved or discarded.
6. Click on > to proceed to the next page, if applicable, to also make changes there.
played.
cerned parameters.
8. Click on “Save” to save the changes.
10. Click on > to proceed to the next page, if applicable, to make changes there.
played.
cerned parameters.
12. Click on “Save” to save the changes.
Make absolutely sure to click on Home to leave the Configuration to make the
changes valid.
It is highly recommended to click on now to make the changes that were made valid.
If later is clicked on (e.g. more configuration changes have to be made), make sure to
leave the configuration again with the Home button to get the prompt window again
to finally initiate the system reboot.
18.4.2 Deleting syngo Configurations and/or Menu Pages

Delete the Host Name and/or Logical Name.
1. Deletion Procedure:
a) Start the Host Name and/or Logical Name deletion with the menu step 3, if appli‐
cable.

05.19
Procedures 18 363
b) Continue the Host Name and/or Logical Name deletion with the menu step 2, if ap‐
plicable.
c) Finally finish the Host Name and/or Logical Name deletion with the menu step 1
d) Click on Home to leave the configuration.
restore).
Delete a Print Device
1. Deleting a DICOM Camera from the Configuration Settings:
restore).

05.19
364 18 Procedures
18.5 Starting the Artis one - Configuration Panel in the Custom‐

er UI
1. Select the Examination or Post Processing tab card in the application interface.
2. Move the mouse pointer to the upper edge of the screen in the application UI on
the Live monitor.
 A selection bar will become visible.
3. Click on Options in the selection bar.
Fig. 241: Customer Configuration, Control Panel
4. Click on Configuration in the selection list that is displayed.

 The Artis one - Configuration Panel window opens:

05.19
Procedures 18 365

05.19
366 18 Procedures
18.6 Starting Configuration of the Quantification (Option) in

the User UI
The “Quantification (Option)” is configured by the customer according to the User In‐
structions. There is nothing special to be observed here for service.
Starting the Quantification Configuration:
1. Select the Quant “Tabcard” in the application interface on the Live monitor
2. Move the mouse pointer to the upper edge of the screen in the application UI on
the Live monitor.
 A selection bar will become visible.
Fig. 243: Quant Configuration
3. Click on Quant > Configuration in the selection bar.

 The “Quant Configuration” window appears with various “Tabcards”.
Tab. 35 Quant Configuration Tab Cards
Tabcard Name Remark

CAL CALibration (Catheter detection method)
QCA Quantitative Coronary Analysis
IZ3D syngo IZ3D creates the 3-dimensional model of a vessel. This vessel can
be freely rotated in this 3-dimensional cube and viewed at multiple an‐
gles.
QVA Quantitative Vessel Analysis
UI User Interface
ABOUT Shows the versions of the Quantitative Analysis module versions.
4. Double-click on the corresponding “Tabcard” to start the desired configuration.

05.19
Procedures 18 367
18.7 IP Address Reservation Tool for Creating a Unique IP Ad‐

dress
The SIEMENS Intranet tool “IP Address reservation” has to be used by the engineer or the
Uptime Service Center if the customer does not provide IP addresses to connect our sys‐
tem to the RDIAG Server. This is the case, e.g., if the customer has no local hospital net‐
work.
Procedure for Reserving a Unique IP Address Range:
1. Start the CS Home page on the SIEMENS Intranet: https://intranet.health‐
care.siemens.com/cms/cs/en/Home/Pages/Default.aspx ↵
Instead of logging in via the Siemens Intranet, the RDIAG Portal can also be started
directly (e.g. via the RDIAG server in Fürth https://crsp1.siemens.com/healthcare/ ↵
or Newark https://crsp2.siemens.com/healthcare/ ↵ ). In this case, continue with
step 4.
2. Click on Tools.
3. Click on IP Reservation Tool in the “Quicklinks” window
4. If a “Security Alert” window appears, click on Yes or “...load the page...”
The login window for “SIEMENS common Remote Service Platform” will appear.
5. Enter the “User Name” and the “Password” in the corresponding fields and then click
on Login or insert your Siemens ID card into the card reader, click on Login PKI, type
in your 8-digit PKI password and then press Enter.
 The “Welcome to Siemens Remote Service” page appears.
6. Move the mouse pointer on TabCard Administration and click on “IP Allocation”.
 The “IP Allocation - Search” window appears.
7. If there are any questions about how to use this tool, click on ? Help on this page
8. Enter the required data in all the data entry boxes.
9. Click on Search.
10. Ranges of 254 unique IP addresses will be offered by the tool
11. TCP/IP LAN: Only one of the addresses is used.

05.19
368 18 Procedures
18.8 Changing the Computer Name

Changing the computer name ( Identification / Page 34) has an effect on the Dicom AEs,
the Versant database, System Management, and the User Default Password !
 Whenever the computer name (= host name) is changed, the requested restart needs to
be performed before continuing the configuration process.
1. Before changing the name:

- Save the patient images
- Read out the Dicom AEs and make a note of them
- Uninstall the System Management Base.
2. Changing the name:
Change the computer name and save it. The local AET is generated automatically from
the computer name. Changing the computer name generates a pop-up window,
which allows you to select whether the AET should be changed as well. As soon as
DICOM connections are configured, the original AET should be kept.
If the system message “The computername has changed...” is confirmed with
OK, the AE titles are overwritten. If Cancel is clicked, the AETs are not overwritten.
3. After changing the name:
- Immediately after changing the name, completely shut down the system and re‐
boot it.
- Check the Dicom AETs and, if necessary, reenter the original AETs.
- Reinstall the System Management.
- Prepare a new syngo system and configuration data backup.
- Make the old syngo system and configuration data backup unusable.
- If you wish, change the password that has now been changed automatically to
“User Given Password” back to “User Default Password ”! ( Changing the Com‐
puter Name, Effect on the Password / Page 43)
4. Only if Syngo Security Option (HIPAA) is installed/activated:
See also: ( Settings / Page 49)
Due to a syngo problem, the following command has to be executed as the adminis‐
trator:
seci configValue install System Client_BuiltInDataSecPermissions #*DI‐
COM_USER@%COMPUTERNAME%@1f,#*UAutoReco@%COMPUTERNAME%@1f
“List of direct user permissions applied to all data security authorlze calls.”
This command has to be executed in a cmd shell as the user administrator and as the
last step of a EAS installation. This means configuration and backup/restore following
SW installation.
The command has to be executed again after a host name change.
The following steps are required for execution as the user administrator:
a) Deactivation of auto login (“Enable Autologin”) in the Service UI.
b) Switch the user to Administrator (“Log In Different User...”)

05.19
Procedures 18 369
c) Select the entry “Switch to Operating System Login...” in the syngo menu under
Options.
d) Log on as administrator.
The administrator password is available in the SIEMENS Knowledge Base (KB).
Problems solved by executing this command:
- Patient browser: Import of data has to be triggered twice for completion.

05.19
370 18 Procedures
18.9 Rules & Syntax for Host Name, Logical Name and AET
18.9.1 Rules & Syntax for Host Name of DICOM Remote Node
Rules & Syntax for Host Names:
n It must be coordinated with the local network administrator!
n It must be unique in the network!
n Only capital letters may be used!
n Enter 1 to 15 characters
n Do not use the special characters ; : " < > * + = \ | ? ,
n The characters “ _” (underscore) and “-” (minus) should be avoided, as they could
cause problems (even though it is possible to enter them).
n Do not use only numerical characters.
n Do not use a numerical character at the beginning of the name
18.9.2 Rules & Syntax for Application Entity Title (AET)

Rules & Syntax for the Local- and Remote Node AETs:
n Maximum 16 characters are permitted
n BLANKS and " (double quotes) are not allowed
n Do not use control characters such as LF (Line Feed), FF (Form Feed), CR and ESC
n Use only alphabetic and numeric characters as well as “ _” (underscore) and “-” (mi‐
nus)
n Write AETs in UPPER case
18.9.3 Rules & Syntax for Logical Name

Rules & Syntax for the Logical Names:
n Only letters, numbers and underscores are allowed.
n Do not use special characters
n The logical name must begin with a letter.

05.19
Procedures 18 371
18.10 SRS Help Desk

If there are any questions or problems with the Siemens Remote Services, contact
the SRS Help Desk:
Tab. 36 SRS Help Desk
SRS Help Desk, Worldwide SRS Help Desk, USA (only)

Service days Monday - Friday Monday - Friday
Service hours 24 hrs. 8:30 AM - 7:00 PM EST
Phone +49 9191 18 8080, Code 1-9-1 + 1 800 576 7336, Code 2-3-13
FAX +49 9131 84 13 7388 n.a.
E-mail remoteserver.healthcare@siemens.com csg.srs.healthcare@siemens.com

05.19
372 18 Procedures
18.11 Changing the EHC Inlay & attaching the Button Icon La‐
bels
Also see the User Interface Repair & Replacement document AXA6-000.841.05......:
( EHC / AXA6-000.841.05)
There are 16 buttons on the EHC:
1. The functionality of the 2 buttons Block Radiation and Block Movement is fixed.
2. The functionality of the 2 buttons Exam OSD and Postproc OSD are also fixed:
Fig. 244: OSD On-screen menus
3. For each botton where the functionality was changed from the Default Layout to an‐
other layout in the service software ( EHC Button Configuration / Page 290), the ap‐
propriately matching EHC button icon label must be taken from the EHC button
field templates ( Fig. 246 Page 372) template sheet and installed/inserted into the
EHC button field cover (=EHC Inlay) ( Fig. 245 Page 372).
See the illustrations below:
Fig. 245: EHC button field cover Fig. 246: EHC button field templates

05.19
Procedures 18 373
EHC Inlays and Layouts.

n EHC of Artis one systems shipped from the factory:
1
2
(1) Review using joystick or HW buttons

(3) OSD Post-processing menu button
(4) Configured default layout and default functionalities (for CARD user)
This illustration shows the EHC with the “Default Inlay” and the buttons configured in
the service software for the “default functionalities (CARD user) layout”.
No EHC button icon label/s are inserted in the EHC button field cover
( Fig. 245 Page 372).
At the customer’s request, the CSE can re-program the button layout by changing the
configuration in the service software and at the same time insert the matching EHC

05.19
374 18 Procedures
button icon label for the particular button. With the “Default Inlay”, this is possible
only for the 3 buttons of the left and the 3 buttons on the right side.
The OSD Examination Menu and OSD Postprocessing Menu as well as the Block Radia‐
tion and Block Movement button functionalities are fixed and cannot be changed.
If one of the 6 buttons in the center has to be reconfigured, the “Default Inlay” has to
be replaced with the “Alternative Layout”

05.19
Procedures 18 375
n EHC of Artis one systems changed on-site to the alternative inlay.

5 6
(1) Review using Joystick or HW Buttons

(3) OSD Postprocessing Menu Button
(4) Alternative inlay with default functionalities configured (for a CARD user)
(5) Block Radiation
(6) Block Movement

05.19
376 18 Procedures
This illustration shows the EHC console with Alternative Inlay and Default functionali‐
ties (CARD User) layout.
No EHC button icon label/s are inserted in the EHC button field cover
( Fig. 245 Page 372).
configuration in the service software and at the same time insert the matching EHC
button icon label for the particular button. This is with the “Alternative Inlay” possible
for all 12 soft buttons.
.
n EHC without Inlay installed.
Fig. 249: EHC without inlay
The touch botton foil with the Default Layout functionalities (CARD user) is visible.
n Configure up to 12 programmable buttons (depending on the inlay used).
configuration in the service software ( EHC Button Configuration / Page 290) and at
the same time inserting the matching EHC button icon label for the concerned but‐
ton.
The OSD Examination Menu and OSD Postprocessing Menu as well as the Block Radia‐
tion and Block Movement button functionalities are fixed and cannot be changed.
- Default Inlay (shipped ex-factory):
The functionality of the 3 soft buttons on the left side and the 3 soft buttons on the
right side can be re-programmed.
With the Default Inlay, if one of the 6 buttons in the center has to be reconfigured,
the “Default Inlay” has to be replaced with the “Alternative Layout”

05.19
Procedures 18 377
- Alternative Inlay (installed on-site):

The functionality of all 12 soft buttons can be re-programmed.
Fig. 250: EHC, inlays

05.19
378 18 Procedures
18.12 Fluoroscopy Field Limitation and Electronic Shutter Ad‐

justment
The adjustment is necessary only when replacing the FD and/or collimator or when re‐
quested by the customer.
 During this adjustment, the diagonal and the rectangular plates in the collimator are ad‐
justed so that they remain just visible in all formats as well as for both the min. and max.
SID. The electronic shutter is adjusted so that it just barely covers the collimator plates
when the collimator is opened or closed.
18.12.1 Adjusting fluoroscopy field limitation for FD systems
18.12.1.1 Preparations
n SID = 105 cm
n Format = Zoom 0
n Prefiltering = none
n IOB-E service radiation enable switch s1 = on
n Collimator = rectangular plates, completely open
18.12.1.2 Adjustment
See also: ( Collimator / Page 276)
1. Select in Local Service Configuration > Artis one Components Collimator

Fig. 251: Collimator Control Unit A
2. Select (highlight) FD Format M for 26x30 FD in the “Select Group To Configure” win‐
dow.
3. Press the Config button.
 The “Configuration of group FD Format M” screen appears:.

05.19
Procedures 18 379
Fig. 252: Collimator, FD Format M
4. Adapt the values for width, height and diameter for Zoom 0 - Zoom 5. Always enter
the same value for width and height for zoom steps Zoom 1..... Zoom 5 .
5. Press the OK button to go back to the “Configuration of Collimator...” window.
6. Press the Save and Exit buttons to save the values.
X 7. Trigger fluoroscopy and check the fluoroscopy field limitation with all zoom steps at
the min. and max. SID.

05.19
380 18 Procedures
8. Repeat the procedure until the rectangular plates remain just about visible at the edge
of the image.
When all adjustments have been performed:

1. At the IOB-E set the service radiation enable switch s1 back to off.
2. Select Backup & Restore in Local Service. Generate the backup using the following
 settings.
a) Select the <Backup> command.
b) Drives = \\10.1.1.16\DataBackup
c) Packages = Configuration
CAUTION, if the maximum opening for Zoom 0 is configured incorrectly:

the collimator plate opening in the collimator can be larger than the diameter of the FD
detector. Radiation can pass unhindered by the lead shielding of the detector into the
area of the system.
 Thus personnel will be exposed to direct radiation if they are in the direct radiation field
behind the FD detector.
Therefore, adjust the max. collimator opening with all zoom formats so that the edges of
CAUTION, if the maximum opening of zoom formats is incorrectly configured:

the collimator plates can either be outside of the visible range of the image or complete‐
ly covered by the electronic shutter. The customer cannot see the actual size of the colli‐
mated radiation field and whether there are any malfunctions of the collimator.
 Thus the patient will receive a higher radiation dose than necessary, because a portion
of the radiation field does not produce an image, i.e., cannot be used for diagnostic pur‐
poses.
Therefore, adjust the max. collimator opening with all zoom formats so that the edges of

05.19
Procedures 18 381
18.12.2 Adjusting the electronic shutter
CAUTION, if the electronic shutter is configured incorrectly:

The collimator plates can be completely covered by the electronic shutter. The customer
cannot detect the actual size of the collimated radiation field nor any malfunction of the
collimator.
 Thus the patient will receive a higher radiation dose than is necessary because part of
the radiation field is not generating an image, e.g. it is not being used for diagnostic pur‐
poses.
Adjust the electronic shutter so that the edges of the collimator plates with all zoom for‐
mats are still visible in the area of the image and are not completely covered by the elec‐
tronic shutter.
See also: ( System Calibration / Page 229)
1. Select in Local Service Configuration > Artis one Components Image System.
 The screen “Configuration of Image Visualization System Image Acquisition
System A” appears.
2. Select (highlight) under “Select Group To Configure” configuration item System Cali‐
bration.
3. Press the Config button
 The “Configuration of group System Calibration” screen appears:
Fig. 253: Image system, system calibration
4. Determine the value (Default: -12, Range: -20...+20) under Image Display [1] Shutter
Extra Pixels so that the collimator plates are visible inside the shutter. Use only zoom
steps 1 .- 5 for evaluation because, with the collimator open in zoom 0, the plates at
the edge of the shutter image are covered.

The parameter value for Shutter Extra Pixels has an effect on all zoom steps.
A more negative parameter value opens the shutter.
5. Press the OK button to get to the “Configuration of Image System” window.

6. Press the Save and Exit buttons to save the values.

05.19
382 18 Procedures
7. Repeat the procedure until the collimator plates are barely visible inside the shutter.

05.19
Changes to Previous Version 19 383
Version 08 versus version 07
Chapter/s Section / Link Change/s

All n.a. n.a.
General Information n.a. n.a.
Procedure when chang‐ n.a. n.a.
ing the configuration
System Options n.a. n.a.
Local Host n.a. n.a.
Security n.a. n.a.
Service n.a. n.a.
DICOM n.a. n.a.
Import/Export n.a. n.a.
System Mgmt. (System n.a. n.a.
Management)
Artis one System (1), Sys‐ System data MCI component PN
tem Configuration
Artis one System (2) Oth‐ n.a. n.a.
ers (SWMs, Configuration
Check, ...)
Artis one Components n.a. n.a.
(1), Image System
Artis one Components Sys Pos - Patient Transfer Note added about table lift con‐
(2), Other Components Position figuration.
External Devices (Paper n.a. n.a.
Printer, etc.)
Applications n.a. n.a.
Artis one, Configuration n.a. n.a.
Panel in the Customer UI
Exam Set Editor n.a. n.a.
Procedures n.a. n.a.

05.19
384 20 List of Hazard IDs
The list shows the Hazard IDs of this document.

n hm_serv_WarnSetUPSPowerMayBePresent
- Image system supplied by the UPS after system shutdown. (Page 13)
n hm_serv_UPSFunctionTest
- The system fails to reduce power in case of power failure, while supplied from the
Uninterrupted Power Supply. (Page 173)
n hm_serv_LabelPowerPresent
- Even after switching off the system (shutdown), power is still present at the control
cabinet and generator. (Page 13)
n hm_serv_CheckStandPositions
- Room size is incorrectly configured. (Page 268)
n hm_serv_ConfigPatientRegistration
- Wrong patient position can implicitly be set by the system. (Page 316)
n hm_serv_ProtectiveEarthMeasurement
- Improperly established protective ground conductor connections during installa‐
tion, maintenance, or service. (Page 12)
n hm_serv_FixCablesAfterService
- Unwanted disconnection of electrical cables. (Page 12)
n hm_serv_Training
- Missing training can result in failure. (Page 11)
n hm_serv_LabelLowDoseAcqPedal
- Footpedal not recognized as acquisition release pedal. (Page 156)(Page 150)
(Page 153)
n hm_serv_CheckBypassImage
- Bypass image is not displayed in exam room display. (Page 12)
n hm_serv_wrong_assembly
- Incorrect assembly, e.g. loose screw connections. (Page 12)

05.19
Index 21 385
3 3D Acquisition (key) ................................................................................................... 145

3D Calibration Parameters .......................................................................................... 302
3D HeartSweep Acquisition (key) ............................................................................... 145
3D Viewing ................................................................................................................ 304

05.19
386 21 Index
A Abbreviations ...............................................................................................................15
ACQ beeper ............................................................................................................... 285
Acquisition (Overlay Mask), Anatomic Background % .................................................. 221
Acquisition Control .................................................................................................... 218
Acquisition, 3D (key) .................................................................................................. 145
Activate Brake Test .....................................................................................................263
Activate Force Sensor Calibration ............................................................................... 263
Activation of MD overtemp high timer ........................................................................246
ACU ........................................................................................................................... 287
Adapter (Local Host) .................................................................................................... 35
Add Printer r .............................................................................................................. 327
Adding a Printer (CSE only) .........................................................................................328
Additionally Required Documents .................................................................................22
Adjust C-Arm from EHC to drive ..................................................................................230
AET for Carto ............................................................................................................. 218
AETs (DICOM, General) ................................................................................................ 70
Air Kerma treshold exceeded beeper .......................................................................... 285
Alternative Acquisition (= Low Dose Acquisition) ........................................................ 155
Anatomic Background % for Acquisition (Overlay Mask ............................................... 221
Anatomic Background % for Fluoro (Overlay Ref) ........................................................ 221
Anatomic Background % for RoadMap Fluoro (Overlay Mask) ......................................221
ang ............................................................................................................................161
Angio Active Frame Selection Distance ....................................................................... 218
angiomatic (ang) ....................................................................................................... 161
Angiomatic(Generator) .............................................................................................. 282
Annotation Object Deletion via EHC ............................................................................217
ANNOTATION_OBJECT_COUNT ...................................................................................217
Anode frequency, Nominal .........................................................................................174
Application Entity Properties (DICOM) .......................................................................... 84
Application Entity Title (AET), Rules & Syntax .............................................................. 370
APS ............................................................................................................................167
Artis Hardware Inventory ........................................................................................... 205
Asset Management .................................................................................................... 303
Audible warnings ....................................................................................................... 284
Auditing (Security) ....................................................................................................... 51
Auto and Sigmoid Window ......................................................................................... 166
Auto contour detection for Quant LV .......................................................................... 230
Auto contour detection for Quant QCA3D ...................................................................230
Auto Pixel Detect Bad Condition ................................................................................. 167
Auto Pixel Shift (APS) ................................................................................................. 167
Auto Pixel Shift for RM ............................................................................................... 167
Auto Pixel Shift K - factor for Bad condition .................................................................168
Auto Pixel Shift K Factor Default value ........................................................................ 167
Auto Pixel Shift Maximally Allowed shift from Image to Image .................................... 168

05.19
Index 21 387
Auto Pixel Shift Maximum Radius ............................................................................... 167

Auto Pixel Shift Maximum Threshold .......................................................................... 167
Auto Pixel Shift Maximum Threshold (DSA Review) ..................................................... 167
Auto Pixel Shift Sensitivity for DSA ..............................................................................167
Auto Pixel Shift Sensitivity for RM ............................................................................... 167
Auto Transfer ............................................................................................................... 56
Automap Module (key) .............................................................................................. 145
Automatic Labelling ................................................................................................... 334
Autotransfer Tabcard ................................................................................................. 331
Available paper printer media formats ........................................................................ 310
AXIOM Monitoring Parameter .................................................................................... 237
B Backup/Restore ............................................................................................................ 58
BACKUPRESTOREHOSTDETAILS ................................................................................... 302
Base rotation motor PN .............................................................................................. 132
Basic joystick movements: Cranial/Caudal or Longitudinal/Transversal ......................... 265
Biosense/Carto C3 ...................................................................................................... 138
Block radiation ........................................................................................................... 284

05.19
388 21 Index
C C.A.R.E settings ..........................................................................................................241

Calibration of System ................................................................................................. 229
Calibration: Image Display .......................................................................................... 229
Calibration: Other Settings ......................................................................................... 229
Camera Parameter Settings for DICOM Print Devices ..................................................... 98
Card Acquisition Module (key) ....................................................................................143
CARE (graphics) --- display timeout (seconds) ............................................................. 242
Care Monitor Threshold (mGy) ................................................................................... 136
CARE Monitor Unit ..................................................................................................... 294
Care Monitor, General ................................................................................................ 294
CARE POSITION --- Angular range (degrees) ................................................................ 241
CARE POSITION --- Initial power-up state .....................................................................241
CAREguard .................................................................................................................131
Carto AET ...................................................................................................................218
Carto C3 .................................................................................................................... 138
Carto System ............................................................................................................. 138
CD ROM/CD-RW Devices ............................................................................................... 77
CD Viewer ..................................................................................................................216
CD-R Archive Module (key) ......................................................................................... 146
Changing the Computer Name ............................................................................. 35, 368
Changing the Computer Name, Effect on the Password ................................................ 43
Changing the EHC Inlay & attaching the Button Icon Labels ........................................ 372
Changing the IP Address ...............................................................................................37
Character set (DICOM) ................................................................................................. 74
Character Set Exceptional Settings ............................................................................... 75
Character Set, DICOM ...................................................................................................74
CLEARstent ................................................................................................................ 168
CLEARstent (key) ........................................................................................................143
CLEARstent Live ......................................................................................................... 168
CLEARstent Live (key) .................................................................................................144
CLEARstent Live EE percentage ...................................................................................169
CLEARstentLive EE kernel ........................................................................................... 169
CLEARstentLive WC offset ...........................................................................................169
CMU .......................................................................................................................... 294
Collimator ..................................................................................................................276
Collimator behavior with Zoom-Change ..................................................................... 277
Collimator FD Format M ............................................................................................. 280
Collimator Long Distance Top .....................................................................................130
Collimator Longitudinal Speed ....................................................................................279
Collimator open to maximum .....................................................................................278
Collimator Rotational Speed ....................................................................................... 280
Collimator stay unchanged .........................................................................................277
Collimator stay unchanged if moved .......................................................................... 279
Collimator User Interface ............................................................................................276

05.19
Index 21 389
Collision calculator ignored with Manual Table Top panning ....................................... 265
Collision detection beeper .......................................................................................... 285
Collision Help Display (Stand) ..................................................................................... 262
Column Back side Proxy : Yes/No ................................................................................ 262
Command Bar (Action Bar) Softkeys ........................................................................... 359
Completed Flag Handling ........................................................................................... 235
Components - Image System ...................................................................................... 214
Compression (DICOM) ..................................................................................................87
Computer name ...........................................................................................................34
Computer name in DNS ................................................................................................35
Computer name restrictions ......................................................................................... 34
Config Check ............................................................................................................. 208
Config Check Staring ..................................................................................................209
Configuration Check, Evaluating the Log and Correcting Inconsistencies ..................... 209
Configure Exam Protocol Transfer .............................................................................. 238
Configure the Paper Printer in syngo .......................................................................... 330
Configured Printers and Syngo Paper Size ................................................................... 311
Configuring Release of the Tabletop Brakes with the Footswitch ................................. 160
Configuring Room Light Control with the Footswitch .................................................. 159
Conventions and Abbreviations .................................................................................... 15
CorRea (Correct & Rearrange)(Applications) ................................................................318
Correction LUT (= not recommended) .........................................................................112
Creating a Unique IP Address ......................................................................................367
CSF_A ........................................................................................................................ 243
Customer data (Site-specific) ........................................................................................28

05.19
390 21 Index
D Data acess check (Security) .......................................................................................... 51

Days between doing a System Backup in background ................................................. 299
DDO .......................................................................................................................... 164
Default ISO Center (Stand) ......................................................................................... 271
Default water value ....................................................................................................162
Delete a Print Device) ................................................................................................. 363
Deleting a DICOM Print Device (Camera) .....................................................................101
Deleting syngo Configurations and/or Menu Pages ..................................................... 362
Demo License .............................................................................................................. 69
DHCP Server .................................................................................................................36
DICOM access (Security) ...............................................................................................51
DICOM Character Set ....................................................................................................74
DICOM Query ...............................................................................................................75
DICOM Rearrange Character Set ................................................................................... 75
DICOM Settings for DICOM Network Nodes ...................................................................83
DICOM Settings for DICOM Print Devices (Camera) ....................................................... 96
DICOM settings for HIS/RIS server ............................................................................... 118
DICOM Settings, General .............................................................................................. 72
Dilatation Timer Display ............................................................................................. 219
Direct Positions 1, 2 and 3 .......................................................................................... 286
Directories (Import/Export .......................................................................................... 123
Display ECG Signal ..................................................................................................... 221
Display Stand/Table Popup ......................................................................................... 251
Display time of collision help graphics ........................................................................ 250
display time of no data dialog (OSD) ...........................................................................249
Display time of standard window ............................................................................... 250
DNS enable for Windows Resolution ............................................................................. 38
DNS of Local Host ........................................................................................................ 38
does the fl timer reset with each fluoro ...................................................................... 284
Doing changes in syngo SW Modules ..........................................................................361
Doing changes under Artis One System/Components ..................................................358
Doorswitch ................................................................................................................ 174
Dormant Image, Overlay Text ..................................................................................... 228
DR Acquisition Module (key) .......................................................................................143
DR Stepping (key) ...................................................................................................... 144
Dr.Artis auto-restart (mSec) ........................................................................................215
DSA Acquisition Module (key) .................................................................................... 143
DSA Ref. Overlay ........................................................................................................ 170
Duty Cycle of the Motors .............................................................................................. 13

05.19
Index 21 391
E EASI board installed ................................................................................................... 246

ECC Show Pressure .....................................................................................................222
ECG Curve Tolerance Percentage ................................................................................ 222
ECG Data Transfer ...................................................................................................... 139
ECG digital trigger selection ....................................................................................... 245
ECG gated X-ray ......................................................................................................... 170
ECG invert trigger selection ........................................................................................ 245
ECG Max Display Duration .......................................................................................... 222
ECG QRS trigger selection ...........................................................................................245
ECG Recording Module (key) ...................................................................................... 146
ECG Single Step Display Duration ............................................................................... 222
ECG-Gated Fluoro Module (key) ................................................................................. 147
ECG-System ............................................................................................................... 138
ED and ES frame auto detection for LV ....................................................................... 230
ED frame auto detection for QCA3D ........................................................................... 230
Edge Enhancement .................................................................................................... 164
Edge Enhancement Dynamic Stent Scene (DSS) ..........................................................168
Edge Enhancement Preview and Static Stent Immage (SSI .......................................... 168
Edge Enhancement, Negative .................................................................................... 220
EHC ........................................................................................................................... 289
EHC alert beep ........................................................................................................... 290
EHC beep for disabled buttons ....................................................................................290
EHC Button Configuration .......................................................................................... 290
EHC confirmation beep .............................................................................................. 290
EHC sound volume .....................................................................................................290
EHC SW Download Procedure ..................................................................................... 190
EHC, Enable logging of user selections ....................................................................... 289
EHC, Sound configuration .......................................................................................... 290
EHC/OSD Import Export .............................................................................................. 182
Electronic Shutter Configuration ................................................................................ 229
Emergency Power System, which type is connected to the system .............................. 172
enable animated horizontal scrolling (OSD) ................................................................ 250
enable animated vertical scrolling (OSD) .................................................................... 250
enable different speed levels for horizontal scroll (OSD) ..............................................249
enable different speed levels for vertical scrolling (OSD) ............................................. 249
enable logging of user selections (OSD) ......................................................................248
enable performance reporting (OSD) ..........................................................................249
Enable trusted host functionality (Security) .................................................................. 51
End of acquisition beeper ...........................................................................................285
EPS-Signal ..................................................................................................................172
Error Reporting (Maintenance) ................................................................................... 296
Eve2 .......................................................................................................................... 164
Eventlog ...................................................................................................................... 57
Exam Protocol Transfer Configuration ........................................................................ 238

05.19
392 21 Index
Exam Sets editing (User and Service) .......................................................................... 345

Examination Display, Overlay Text .............................................................................. 223
Examroom Dilatation timer ........................................................................................ 219
Export Directories ...................................................................................................... 123
Extended Vessel Contrast ........................................................................................... 220
F FD automatic backoff ................................................................................................. 264

FD Format M Collimator Opening ............................................................................... 280
FD Monitoring Parameter (ACU) ................................................................................. 171
FD Tune Up parameters ..............................................................................................301
FD Video Gain Parameter ............................................................................................287
Filter factor for recursive filtering ............................................................................... 169
Fixed Footswitch Pedal Allocations ............................................................................. 151
Flexible pixel shift (FPS) grid size ................................................................................ 236
Fluoro (Overlay Re), Anatomic Background % ............................................................. 221
Fluoro beeper ............................................................................................................ 286
Fluoro Loop Module (key) .......................................................................................... 145
Fluoro timer beeper ................................................................................................... 284
Fluoro Timer Display in Min/Sec format .......................................................................216
Fluoro Timer Limit in min [1,5] ...................................................................................284
Fluoro timer reset with each fluoro .............................................................................284
Flush Only Exam Monitors ..........................................................................................216
FONT_SIZE ................................................................................................................. 217
FONT_TYPE ................................................................................................................ 217
Footswitch .................................................................................................................149
Footswitch Pedal Configurations ................................................................................ 151
Footswitch Types and fixed Pedal Allocations ............................................................. 151
Format Image Disk ..................................................................................................... 213
Format of stored Quant reports .................................................................................. 230
Free space on IAS Backup HDD for System Backup ...................................................... 300
FTP .............................................................................................................................. 55
Functional check (Security) .......................................................................................... 51

05.19
Index 21 393
G Gateways Addresses of Local Host ................................................................................ 37

General (Care Monitor) .............................................................................................. 294
General (DICOM) ..........................................................................................................70
General (Image System) ............................................................................................. 215
general device settings ...............................................................................................248
general Device Settings (EHC) .................................................................................... 289
General Drive Parameters ........................................................................................... 265
General Information about Licensing ............................................................................61
General LUT File Information ...................................................................................... 105
General Node Properties for DICOM Print Devices (Camera) .......................................... 97
General Parameters (Stand) ........................................................................................264
General Remarks .......................................................................................................... 14
General Safety Information .......................................................................................... 11
General Safety Notes ....................................................................................................10
General Settings (Licensing) .........................................................................................62
Generator Limitation 800mA(key) .............................................................................. 147
Government Regulating ............................................................................................. 134
Graphics & Screen Shots ...............................................................................................14
Graphics in pixel data (DICOM) .....................................................................................89
Gray Scale ..................................................................................................................234
H Handsfree speed system positions (0... 100%) ............................................................ 272

Handsfree speed user positions (0... 100%) ................................................................ 272
Handswitch ................................................................................................................149
Handswitch Acquisition button, 2nd function assignment ...........................................158
Hardware Options ...................................................................................................... 172
Harmonisation (DDO) .................................................................................................164
Hazard Messages and Note .......................................................................................... 10
HC Overview (DICOM) ................................................................................................ 103
HeartSweep Acquisition 3D (key) ............................................................................... 145
HeartSweep Trajectories (Stand) ................................................................................ 268
Heat Units beeper ...................................................................................................... 284
High Contrast Beeper ................................................................................................. 161
High contrast fluoro beeper ........................................................................................284
High Contrast Fluoro in RM Phase 1,2 ......................................................................... 162
High Speed 30 fps Module (key) .................................................................................143
High Threshold (mGy) ................................................................................................ 177
HIPAA (Security) ...........................................................................................................51
HIPPA configured ....................................................................................................... 136
HIS/RIS Nodes (DICOM) .............................................................................................. 116
HIS/RIS Setup with Worklist settings and MPPS (DICOM) .............................................. 122
HIS/RIS Tabcard .......................................................................................................... 336
Host Name of DICOM Remote Node, Rules & Syntax ................................................... 370

05.19
394 21 Index
I Identification ............................................................................................................... 34
idle time before automatically closing the menu (OSD) ...............................................248
II/FD position increment (cm) 0=max. position [0,30] ................................................. 272
Image Overlay Control ............................................................................................... 221
Image Processing Control ........................................................................................... 219
Image Review Control ................................................................................................ 221
Image System ............................................................................................................ 214
implicit raw data transfer ............................................................................................. 73
Import date Path ........................................................................................................ 301
Import Directories ...................................................................................................... 123
Import LUT, Import of additional LUT Files .................................................................. 106
Import/Export Directories, Definition .......................................................................... 125
Initial Setup ................................................................................................................. 26
INoise ........................................................................................................................ 163
INVALID_RECT_COUNT ............................................................................................... 218
Invert Rdmap Phase 2 LIH ........................................................................................... 220
Invert selected trigger ................................................................................................ 245
IP Address Reservation Tool ........................................................................................ 367
IP Adresse (Local Host) ................................................................................................. 36
IP-Address of Local Host ............................................................................................... 37
IPv6 ............................................................................................................................. 38
IQ: Auto and Sigmoid Window ....................................................................................166
IQ: Auto Pixel Shift (APS) ............................................................................................ 167
IQ: CLEARstent ........................................................................................................... 168
IQ: CLEARstent Live .................................................................................................... 168
IQ: Edge Enhancement ...............................................................................................164
IQ: Eve2 ..................................................................................................................... 164
IQ: Harmonisation (DDO) ........................................................................................... 164
IQ: INoise ...................................................................................................................163
IQ: Multi scale motion detector (MSMD) ..................................................................... 163
IQ: Nomsie .................................................................................................................169
IQ: Overlay Ref ........................................................................................................... 170
IQ: Parameters for angiomatic (ang) ........................................................................... 161
IQ: Parameters for Preprocessing (ACU) ...................................................................... 162
IQ: Universal Dominant .............................................................................................. 163
Is a OR UPS (e.g. table UPS) connected to the system ..................................................173
Is Line Voltage Present signal connected .....................................................................173
K K-factor during Tabletop Movement ........................................................................... 162

Keyboard Setting ....................................................................................................... 340
KV - MS Exposure Point [1,4] ...................................................................................... 147

05.19
Index 21 395
L Language Options ......................................................................................................339

Language Setting .......................................................................................................134
Language Setting for the Syngo Display (Text Monitor/Display) ................................... 339
Layout of Display Monitors, Image / Tab Card Alignments ........................................... 175
Left Ventricle Analysis (key) ........................................................................................146
License Details ............................................................................................................. 65
License Options ......................................................................................................... 140
License.dat File import ................................................................................................. 63
Licenses with the Artis one VA10 SW ............................................................................ 66
Licensing ..................................................................................................................... 60
Line Frequency .......................................................................................................... 174
Line Frequency Voltage Resistance ............................................................................. 174
Line Resistance .......................................................................................................... 174
Line Voltage ...............................................................................................................174
LMHOSTS Lookup enable ............................................................................................. 38
Local DDIS parameters ............................................................................................... 250
Local Devices Tabcard ................................................................................................ 332
Local OSD parameters ................................................................................................ 248
Local OSD parameters (OSD) ...................................................................................... 248
Logical Name, Rules & Syntax .....................................................................................370
Low Dose Acquisition (= Alternative Acquisition) ........................................................ 155
Low Threshold (mGy) .................................................................................................177
LUT File, General Information ..................................................................................... 105
LUT Files (DICOM) ...................................................................................................... 105
LUT Files settings ....................................................................................................... 107

05.19
396 21 Index
M M-Switch PortConfiguration ....................................................................................... 178

Mail ............................................................................................................................. 54
Maintenance ..............................................................................................................296
Maintenance Settings ................................................................................................ 296
Managed switch port configuration ............................................................................ 178
Manual Table Top panning, ignore collision calculator ................................................ 265
Max. misdedtection in last 10 frames ......................................................................... 169
Max. speed in patient safety zone (Stand) .................................................................. 262
Maximum number of frames for Stage1 ..................................................................... 169
Maximum number of frames to be processed ............................................................. 168
Maximum number of full backup for current version ...................................................302
Maximum number of full backup for previous version .................................................302
Maximum number of megapixels to be processed ...................................................... 168
Maximum number of slice per Archieve ......................................................................302
maximum PDU size ...................................................................................................... 72
Medium Threshold (mGy) .......................................................................................... 177
MFIELD ...................................................................................................................... 288
mf_col mfield reduced by collimator position ............................................................. 288
Minimal step width .................................................................................................... 271
Minimum time period of constant FD temperature ..................................................... 301
Modality ...................................................................................................................... 46
Monitor ..................................................................................................................... 175
Monitor Type ............................................................................................................... 45
Monitors, Flush only Exam Monitors ...........................................................................216
Movement Monitoring (Default: stop + 1 second ........................................................ 265
MPPS (Modality Performed Procedure Steps) (Applications) ........................................ 321
MPPS Startup ............................................................................................................. 321
MPPS(key) ................................................................................................................. 146
MSMD ....................................................................................................................... 163
Multi scale motion detector (MSMD) .......................................................................... 163
Multimodality Viewing ............................................................................................... 131

05.19
Index 21 397
N Negative Edge Enhancement ..................................................................................... 220

Network adapter for AXCS ............................................................................................35
Network adapter for DICOM (external) ......................................................................... 35
Network adapter for IAS (A) <--> IVS .............................................................................36
Network Node, Image resizing configuration .............................................................. 231
Network Nodes (DICOM) .............................................................................................. 80
Network Nodes Tabcard ............................................................................................. 334
Network nodes, Remarks ..............................................................................................80
Network Paper Printer installation .............................................................................. 329
Nominal anode frequency .......................................................................................... 174
Nomsie ...................................................................................................................... 169
Note and Hazard Messages .......................................................................................... 10
Notes ...........................................................................................................................10
NTP Time Server activated ............................................................................................ 31
NTP Time Server not activated ...................................................................................... 30
Number of intermediate frames for DSS ..................................................................... 168
number of Physio remote monitors ............................................................................ 251

05.19
398 21 Index
O OEM EP System .......................................................................................................... 138

Offline Device, Image resizing configuration ...............................................................231
Offline Devices (DICOM) ...............................................................................................77
Offset nominal anode frequency plane A .................................................................... 175
OGPE Configuration Parameter ...................................................................................238
Organize Stored Positions ...........................................................................................344
OSD ........................................................................................................................... 247
OSD - general device settings ..................................................................................... 248
OSD - Local DDIS parameters ...................................................................................... 250
OSD Animation parameters ........................................................................................ 250
OSD Page - DSA ..........................................................................................................256
OSD Page - Exam ........................................................................................................259
OSD Page - General .................................................................................................... 252
OSD Page - MPR ......................................................................................................... 258
OSD Page - MPR 2 ...................................................................................................... 258
OSD Page - Native ...................................................................................................... 254
OSD Page - Roadmap ..................................................................................................260
OSD Page - Sensis ...................................................................................................... 257
OSD Page VRT ............................................................................................................ 258
OSD Page VRT 2 ......................................................................................................... 258
OSD Page Workflow ................................................................................................... 259
Other Safety Information ............................................................................................. 13
Overlay Reference ...................................................................................................... 170
Overlay Text for Dormant Image .................................................................................228
Overlay Text for Examination Display ..........................................................................223
Overlay Text for Post Processing ................................................................................. 224
Overlay Text for Quantification Display ....................................................................... 225
OverlayText for Reference Display .............................................................................. 226
Overview of the HC Settings .......................................................................................103

05.19
Index 21 399
P Paper Printer for Network ........................................................................................... 310

Password Rules ............................................................................................................ 43
Path for Import data ................................................................................................... 301
Patient Orientation .....................................................................................................218
Patient Registration ....................................................................................................336
Patient Registration (Applications) ..............................................................................314
Patient Transfer Region .............................................................................................. 273
Pedal Configurations of the Footswitch ...................................................................... 151
Perivision (key) .......................................................................................................... 144
Perivision (Stand) ....................................................................................................... 270
Perivision Step width .................................................................................................271
Position for Adjust C-Arm from EHC to drive to ............................................................230
Position reached with automatic drive beeper ............................................................ 285
Post Processing, Overlay Text ..................................................................................... 224
Post Script LUT Files ................................................................................................... 313
Pre Program Position .................................................................................................. 187
Preprogramming timeouts/parameters (Stand) ........................................................... 272
Presentation LUT (= recommended) ........................................................................... 109
Print Devices (DICOM) .................................................................................................. 93
Printer Paper Size Mapping .........................................................................................311
Product-specific Remarks ..............................................................................................13
PS LUT Files ................................................................................................................313
PUN logical unit connected to MainDistributor ............................................................173
Q Quant auto contour detection for LV .......................................................................... 230

Quant auto contour detection for QCA3D ................................................................... 230
QUANT PARAMETERS ................................................................................................. 229
Quant QCA (key) ........................................................................................................ 145
Quant QCA2D with bifurcation (key) .......................................................................... 145
Quant QCA3D (key) ....................................................................................................146
Quant QVA (key) ........................................................................................................ 146
Quantification Display, Overlay Text ........................................................................... 225
Query (DICOM) ............................................................................................................ 91

05.19
400 21 Index
R Radiation block .......................................................................................................... 284

Radiation indicator Light on DCS always on / blinking ..................................................172
Ready Processed ........................................................................................................ 231
Ready Processed Images .............................................................................................233
Reconfiguring the Footswitch / Hand Switch, General Procedure ................................. 158
Reference Air Kerma Base for Display ..........................................................................135
Reference Air Kerma display during X-ray Pause ..........................................................135
Reference Air Kerma Multi-Threshold Alert ................................................................. 176
Reference Air Kerma Multi-Threshold Alert) ................................................................ 131
Reference Display, Overlay Text ..................................................................................226
Regional Options ........................................................................................................339
Regulating Government ............................................................................................. 134
Remote service access (Security) .................................................................................. 52
Remote Service Center ................................................................................................. 29
Remove LUT, removal of LUT Files .............................................................................. 106
Reports parameter ..................................................................................................... 301
Requirements .............................................................................................................. 22
Resetting the Maintenance bar ...................................................................................297
Resize ........................................................................................................................ 235
Resizing configuration of Network Node / Offline Device .............................................231
Restore ...................................................................................................................... 204
Retrieve (DICOM) ......................................................................................................... 92
Return to working position after 3D ............................................................................218
RoadMap Fluoro (Overlay Mask),Anatomic Background % ........................................... 221
Room Configuration ...................................................................................................267
Rotating Anode during Acq beeper ............................................................................. 285
Rotating Anode during Fluoro beeper ......................................................................... 286
Routing to the SRS Gateway ......................................................................................... 40
RTC (CCOM) Temperatures & voltage Monitoring ........................................................245
RTC SWM ................................................................................................................... 192
Rules & Syntax for Host Name, Logical Name and AET .................................................370

05.19
Index 21 401
S Safety Information ....................................................................................................... 11

Safety Parameters (Stand) .......................................................................................... 264
Safety Zone beeper .................................................................................................... 285
Save path planner positions to file ..............................................................................272
Scaling factor for window width ................................................................................. 169
Scene Recorder .......................................................................................................... 142
SCP Configuration ...................................................................................................... 235
Screen Shots & Graphics ...............................................................................................14
SDC Backup Xml files validity in Days (-1:Infinite) ........................................................303
Second step width ..................................................................................................... 271
Security properties (Security) ....................................................................................... 51
Security Settings .......................................................................................................... 49
Security status (Security) ..............................................................................................51
Select digital trigger ................................................................................................... 245
Select Group To Configure items ................................................................................ 149
Select QRS trigger ...................................................................................................... 245
Selected Internet Protocol ............................................................................................ 85
Sensis ........................................................................................................................ 138
Sensis related configuration items ..............................................................................251
Sensis Type ................................................................................................................ 139
Service Access by CSE to Exam Sets (Normal and Expert) ............................................ 349
Service Chat ...............................................................................................................354
Settings (Security) ........................................................................................................49
Settings of maintenance ............................................................................................ 296
show peripheral sites ................................................................................................. 252
Shutter Extra Pixels .................................................................................................... 229
SID Tracking ...............................................................................................................161
Sigmoid Window ........................................................................................................166
Simultaneous DICOM associations ................................................................................ 72
SIO (Serial Input Output of CCOM Component) ...........................................................244
Site Info ....................................................................................................................... 28
Site-specific customer and system data .........................................................................28
skin entrance dose (mGy) ...........................................................................................136
Sleep Timer Timeout .................................................................................................. 222
Sound configuration of EHC ....................................................................................... 290
Specify an IP address .................................................................................................... 36
Speech command recognized beeper ......................................................................... 285
SRS ............................................................................................................................ 128
SRS Help Desk ............................................................................................................ 371
SSL encryption (Security) ............................................................................................. 52
Stand .........................................................................................................................261
Stand - Room Configuration ....................................................................................... 267
Stand Test Configuration ............................................................................................263
Starting and handling the Menu Pages ....................................................................... 358

05.19
402 21 Index
Starting and Stepping through the Menu Pages .......................................................... 361

Starting the Artis one, Configuration Panel in the Customer UI ....................................364
Starting the Config Check ..........................................................................................209
Starting the Local Service (Service UI) .........................................................................352
Starting the Quantification (Option) Configuration ..................................................... 366
Starting the Version Check ........................................................................................ 212
Starting/Closing Configurations in Local Service ..........................................................355
StartupValue for Fluoroprogram ................................................................................. 283
StartupValues for SystemController ............................................................................ 283
Step width Perivision ..................................................................................................271
Storage (DICOM) ..........................................................................................................86
Storage Commitment (DICOM) .....................................................................................91
Storage Extension 3 / 4 (key) ...................................................................................... 142
Store of Quant Report Formats ................................................................................... 230
Store/Show Patient Orientation .................................................................................. 218
Structured Reports (DICOM) ......................................................................................... 76
Subnet mask of Local Host ........................................................................................... 37
Supervision of current at D102 ................................................................................... 172
Support Functions ......................................................................................................299
Supported DICOM Services ........................................................................................... 85
Supported DICOM Services for DICOM Print Devices ......................................................98
Switch off the Maintenance bar permanently ............................................................. 297
Switching off Power to the Control Cabinets ................................................................. 13
SWM EHC ...................................................................................................................190
SWM MCI ................................................................................................................... 202
SWM ULI .................................................................................................................... 197
Syngo SW Modules, doing changes ............................................................................ 361
syngo task cards ...........................................................................................................48
syngo.via ................................................................................................................... 324
Sys Pos - Head Side (Stand) ........................................................................................ 273
Sys Pos - Left Side Position (Stand) ............................................................................. 274
Sys Pos - OR Position (Stand) ...................................................................................... 275
Sys Pos - Parking position (Stand) ............................................................................... 274
Sys Pos - Patient Transfer Position (Stand) ...................................................................273
Sys Pos - Peri Position (Stand) ..................................................................................... 275
Sys Pos - Right Side Position Table Rotated (Stand) ......................................................274
System Calibration ..................................................................................................... 229
System Configuration, Status ICONS ...........................................................................360
System Controller ...................................................................................................... 283
System Data ...............................................................................................................130
System data (Site-specific) ........................................................................................... 28
System EPS - Delay for UDC errors from PUN ............................................................... 173
System Management ................................................................................................. 128
System Naming Conventions ........................................................................................15
System Options ..........................................................................................................138

05.19
Index 21 403
System Options Configuration ......................................................................................24
T Table object distance ................................................................................................. 136

Table object distance for CARD Profile ........................................................................ 137
Table Positions, Definitions .......................................................................................... 13
TCP/IP and Hostname settings of DICOM Network Nodes ...............................................80
TCP/IP and Hostname settings of Import/Export Remote Host Nodes ............................123
TCP/IP LAN ................................................................................................................... 34
TCP/IP Settings for DICOM Print Devices (Camera) ......................................................... 94
TCP/IP settings for HIS/RIS server .................................................................................116
Temperatures & voltage monitoring Interval ...............................................................246
Temperatures & voltage Monitoring RTC (CCOM) ........................................................245
Time in 0.1s after which preview image shall be shown .............................................. 168
Time to toggle Roadmap/Fluoro (sec) ......................................................................... 158
time to wait for thumbnails response (OSD) ............................................................... 249
Time zone ....................................................................................................................30
Time zone (date & time) settings .................................................................................. 30
Time zone (date & time) settings, NTP Time Server activated ........................................ 31
Time zone (date & time) settings, NTP Time Server not activated .................................. 30
timeout values ............................................................................................................. 72
TOD ........................................................................................................................... 136
TOD (Card) .................................................................................................................137
Tolerance Data, Linear Dimensions ............................................................................... 14
Tolerance Data, Mechanical ..........................................................................................14
Tolerance Data, Torque Values ..................................................................................... 14
Tools, Test Equipment and Service Aids ........................................................................ 22
Transfer (Artis one - Configuration Panel) ................................................................... 331
Transformation .......................................................................................................... 234
Trial License ................................................................................................................. 69
Tube Config ............................................................................................................... 189
Tube Configuration .................................................................................................... 189
Tube Guard ................................................................................................................303
Tube voltage for High Contrast ...................................................................................162
Tune Up parameters for FD ........................................................................................ 301
Turn on/off additional debugging output ....................................................................168

05.19
404 21 Index
U Uninstalling a Network Printer ....................................................................................330

Universal Dominant ................................................................................................... 163
UPS-Signal ................................................................................................................. 172
Use Stent ROI ............................................................................................................. 168
User (Customer) Access to Exam Sets (Normal and Expert) ......................................... 345
User Location Interface I .............................................................................................130
User Location Interface III ...........................................................................................131
User Management (Security) ........................................................................................ 51
User timeout for manual movement (s) ...................................................................... 272
User timeout without requesting movement (s) ......................................................... 272
Users ........................................................................................................................... 42
V Version Check ............................................................................................................ 212

Version Check Starting ............................................................................................... 212
Vessel detection .........................................................................................................168
Video Capture ............................................................................................................ 239
Video Recording during Acquisition ............................................................................ 218
Video Recording during Fluoro ................................................................................... 218
Video Recording during Roadmap ...............................................................................219
Viewer (Applications) ................................................................................................. 317
Viewers for CD ........................................................................................................... 216
Virus Protection ......................................................................................................... 138
VNC MCI .................................................................................................................... 203
W Window Contrast White Range ................................................................................... 220

WINS Server of Local Host ............................................................................................ 38
Work status ................................................................................................................217
working position after 3D, return to ........................................................................... 218
Worklist Results (Applications) ....................................................................................323
Workspace Active .......................................................................................................302
Write protection of direct positions 1, 2 and 3 ............................................................ 286
X X Direction .................................................................................................................271
Xray Lamp ................................................................................................................. 171
Y Y Direction ................................................................................................................. 272

05.19
All documents may only be used for
rendering services on Siemens
Healthcare Products. Any document
in electronic form may be printed
once. Copy and distribution of elec‐
tronic documents and hardcopies is
prohibited. Offenders will be liable
for damages. All other rights are re‐
served.
siemens-healthineers.com
Siemens Healthineers Headquarters

Siemens Healthcare GmbH
Henkestr. 127
91052 Erlangen
Germany
Telephone: +49 9131 84-0
siemens-healthineers.com
Print No.: AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 | Replaces: AXA6-000.843.01.10.02

Doc. Gen. Date: 05.19 | Language: English
© Siemens Healthineers, 2013

Configuration System

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Configuration System

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Artis one

Artis one AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 2 of 405 © Siemens Healthineers, 2013

2 Proceedings when changing the Configuration 23

4.1 Site Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

© Siemens Healthineers, 2013 AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 3 of 405 Artis one

6.6.3 Select New License File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

8.1 Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

10 Artis one system (1), System Config 129

10.1 System Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Artis one AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 4 of 405 © Siemens Healthineers, 2013

10.1.8 Regulating Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

© Siemens Healthineers, 2013 AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 5 of 405 Artis one

10.4.12 IQ: CLEARstent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

11.1 M-Switch PortConfiguration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

12.1 Image System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Artis one AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 6 of 405 © Siemens Healthineers, 2013

12.1.16 Flexible pixel shift (FPS) grid size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

13.1 CSF_A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

© Siemens Healthineers, 2013 AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 7 of 405 Artis one

13.5 Angiomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

14.1 Paper Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

15.1 Pat. Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

16.1 Add Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Artis one AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 8 of 405 © Siemens Healthineers, 2013

16.2 Transfer (Artis one - Configuration Panel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

17.1 Exam Sets editing (User and Service) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

18.1 Starting the Local Service (Service UI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

20 List of Hazard IDs 384

© Siemens Healthineers, 2013 AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 9 of 405 Artis one

1.1.1 General Safety Notes

Artis one AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 10 of 405 © Siemens Healthineers, 2013

1.1.2 Safety Information

1.1.2.1 General Safety Information

© Siemens Healthineers, 2013 AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 11 of 405 Artis one

1.1.2.2 Checking the Ground Wires

Artis one AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 12 of 405 © Siemens Healthineers, 2013

1.1.2.3 Switching off Power to the Control Cabinets

1.1.2.4 Other Safety Information

1.1.3 Product-specific Remarks

Head side Foot side

© Siemens Healthineers, 2013 AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 13 of 405 Artis one

Fig. 4: Artis one Table

1.1.4 General Remarks

1.1.4.1 Tolerance Data

General tolerances for linear dimensions according to ISO 2768

1.1.4.2 Screen Shots and Graphics in this Document

Artis one AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 14 of 405 © Siemens Healthineers, 2013

1.1.5 Conventions and Abbreviations

1.1.5.1 System Naming Conventions

Tab. 1 System Naming

EAS Product Name EAS System Type Remarks

© Siemens Healthineers, 2013 AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 15 of 405 Artis one

C.A.R.E / Combined Application to Reduce Exposure

Artis one AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 16 of 405 © Siemens Healthineers, 2013

DSA Digital Subtraction Angiography

© Siemens Healthineers, 2013 AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 17 of 405 Artis one

IP Internet Protocol (see also TCP/IP)

Artis one AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 18 of 405 © Siemens Healthineers, 2013

NetBIOS Network Basic Input/Output System: a collection of network services and

© Siemens Healthineers, 2013 AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 19 of 405 Artis one

Artis one AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 20 of 405 © Siemens Healthineers, 2013

VCR Video Cassette Recorder

© Siemens Healthineers, 2013 AXA6-000.843.01.11.02 Page 21 of 405 Artis one

1.2.1 Additionally Required Documents